734625

Panasonic DC-S5 Lumix Manual

547
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/570
Next page
Operating Instructions
Digital Camera
DC-S5
DVQP2200ZA
F0920MR0
until
2020/09/01
2
Please read these instructions carefully before using this product, and
save this manual for future use.
Dear Customer,
We would like to take this opportunity to thank you for purchasing this Panasonic
Digital Camera. Please read this document carefully and keep it handy for future
reference. Please note that the actual controls and components, menu items, etc. of
your Digital Camera may look somewhat different from those shown in the illustrations
in this document.
Carefully observe copyright laws.
Recording of pre-recorded tapes or discs or other published or broadcast material for
purposes other than your own private use may infringe copyright laws. Even for the
purpose of private use, recording of certain material may be restricted.
Finding the Information You Need
You can find the information you need by looking at the following pages in this
document.
Contents l 6
Contents by Function l 15
Names of Parts l 27
Menu Guide l 344
Index l 560
3
Symbols Used in This Document
Symbols for recording modes, pictures, and videos that can be used
In this document, symbols are placed at the start of functional explanations (recording
modes, pictures, and videos) showing conditions in which these functions can be
used.
Black icons show conditions in which these can be used, and gray icons show
conditions in which these cannot be used.
Example: /
Operating symbols
In this document, camera operation is explained using the following symbols:
0
Other symbols, such as icons shown on the camera screen, are also used in
explanations.
0
This document describes the procedure for selecting menu items as follows:
Example) Set [Picture Quality] of the [Photo] ([Image Quality]) menu to [STD.].
About Operating Instructions
A Front dial
B Rear dial
C 3421
Cursor button up/down/left/right
or
Joystick up/down/left/right
D Press the center of the joystick
E [MENU/SET] button
F Control dial
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Picture Quality] ¨ Select [STD.]
About Operating Instructions
4
Notification classification symbols
In this document, notifications are classified and described using the following
symbols:
0
Images and illustrations used in this document are for explaining the functions.
0
Description in this document is based on the interchangeable lens (S-R2060).
To confirm prior to using the function
Hints for better use of the camera and tips for recording
Notifications and supplementary items regarding specifications
Related information and page number
5
Chapters
1. Introduction
19
2. Getting Started
33
3. Basic Operations
57
4. Image Recording
83
5. Focus/Zoom
92
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
128
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity
184
8. White Balance/Image Quality
202
9. Flash
227
10. Recording Videos
240
11. Connections with External Devices (Video)
289
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images
300
13. Camera Customization
320
14. Menu Guide
344
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
416
16. Connecting to Other Devices
473
17. Materials
490
6
About Operating Instructions .......................................................3
Chapters ......................................................................................5
Contents by Function.................................................................15
1. Introduction 19
Before Use.................................................................................19
Standard Accessories................................................................22
Lenses That Can Be Used.........................................................23
Memory Cards That Can Be Used.............................................24
Names of Parts ..........................................................................27
Camera.............................................................................................. 27
Supplied Lens.................................................................................... 31
Viewfinder/Monitor Displays .............................................................. 32
2. Getting Started 33
Attaching a Shoulder Strap........................................................33
Charging the Battery..................................................................34
Charging with the Charger ................................................................ 34
Battery Insertion ................................................................................ 37
Inserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging .............................. 39
Notifications Regarding Charging/Power Supply............................... 42
[Power Save Mode] ........................................................................... 44
Inserting Cards (Optional)..........................................................46
Formatting Cards (Initialization)......................................................... 48
Attaching a Lens........................................................................49
Attaching a Lens Hood ...................................................................... 51
Adjusting the Monitor Direction and Angle.................................53
Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time)............54
Contents
Contents
7
3. Basic Operations 57
Basic Recording Operations ......................................................57
How to Hold the Camera ................................................................... 57
Recording .......................................................................................... 59
Selecting the Recording Mode .......................................................... 60
Camera Setting Operations .......................................................61
Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings ..........................................65
Setting the Viewfinder ....................................................................... 65
Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder ................................ 66
Switching the Display Information ..................................................... 67
Quick Menu................................................................................69
Control Panel .............................................................................71
Menu Operation Methods ..........................................................73
[Reset] ............................................................................................... 76
Intelligent Auto Mode .................................................................77
Recording Using Touch Functions.............................................80
Touch AF/Touch Shutter ................................................................... 80
Touch AE........................................................................................... 81
4. Image Recording 83
[Aspect Ratio] ............................................................................83
[Picture Size]..............................................................................85
[Picture Quality] .........................................................................86
[Double Card Slot Function].......................................................88
[Folder / File Settings]................................................................89
[File Number Reset]...................................................................91
Contents
8
5. Focus/Zoom 92
Selecting the Focus Mode .........................................................93
Using AF ....................................................................................94
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)] .............................................................. 98
Selecting the AF Mode ............................................................100
[Face/Eye/Body/Animal Detect.]..................................................... 102
[Tracking]........................................................................................ 105
[225-Area]....................................................................................... 107
[Zone (Vert./ Horz.)]/ [Zone (Square)]/ [Zone (Oval)]...................... 108
[1-Area+]/ [1-Area].......................................................................... 110
[Pinpoint] ........................................................................................ 111
[Custom1] to [Custom3].................................................................. 113
AF Area Movement Operation .................................................115
Moving the AF Area by Touch ......................................................... 116
Moving the AF Area Position with the Touch Pad ........................... 118
[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]....................................................... 119
Record Using MF.....................................................................120
Recording with Zoom...............................................................124
Extended Tele Conversion .............................................................. 125
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer 128
Selecting the Drive Mode.........................................................128
Taking Burst Pictures...............................................................129
6K/4K Photo Recording ...........................................................133
Selecting Pictures from a 6K/4K Burst File..............................139
Correcting Pictures After Recording
(Post-Recording Refinement) .......................................................... 140
Picture Selection Operations ........................................................... 141
Recording with Time Lapse Shot.............................................145
Recording with Stop Motion Animation....................................149
Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos ....................152
Recording Using the Self-timer................................................154
Bracket Recording ...................................................................156
[Live View Composite] .............................................................162
Contents
9
Post-Focus Recording .............................................................166
Selecting the Focus Point for the Picture to Save ........................... 169
Focus Stacking................................................................................ 171
[Silent Mode]............................................................................174
[Shutter Type] ..........................................................................175
Image Stabilizer .......................................................................177
Image Stabilizer Settings................................................................. 179
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity 184
[Metering Mode].......................................................................184
Program AE Mode ...................................................................185
Aperture-Priority AE Mode.......................................................187
Shutter-Priority AE Mode .........................................................190
Manual Exposure Mode...........................................................192
Preview Mode ..........................................................................195
Exposure Compensation .........................................................196
Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock) ............................198
ISO Sensitivity .........................................................................199
8. White Balance/Image Quality 202
White Balance (WB) ................................................................202
Adjusting the White Balance ........................................................... 206
[Photo Style] ............................................................................208
[Filter Settings].........................................................................215
[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]..................................................... 220
[High Resolution Mode] ...........................................................221
[HLG Photo] .............................................................................225
Contents
10
9. Flash 227
Using an External Flash (Optional)..........................................227
Removing the Hot Shoe Cover........................................................ 227
Setting Flash............................................................................229
[Flash Mode].................................................................................... 229
[Red-Eye Removal] ......................................................................... 231
[Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.] ............................................... 232
[Flash Adjust.].................................................................................. 233
[Flash Synchro] ............................................................................... 234
[Auto Exposure Comp.] ................................................................... 235
Recording Using a Wireless Flash...........................................236
10. Recording Videos 240
Recording Videos ....................................................................240
Recording Modes Specifically for Video
(Creative Video/S&Q) ..............................................................244
Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos..................................... 245
Separating Settings for Recording Video and Pictures ................... 247
Video Recording Settings ........................................................248
[Switch NTSC/PAL] ......................................................................... 248
[Rec. File Format]............................................................................ 249
[Image Area of Video]...................................................................... 249
[Rec Quality].................................................................................... 250
Time Code ...............................................................................254
Setting the Time Code..................................................................... 254
Using AF (Video) .....................................................................256
[Continuous AF]............................................................................... 256
[AF Custom Setting(Video)]............................................................. 258
Video Brightness and Coloring ................................................259
[Luminance Level] ........................................................................... 259
Recording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee)......................... 260
[ISO Sensitivity (video)] ................................................................... 262
Audio Settings..........................................................................263
Main Assist Functions..............................................................264
[Waveform Monitor] ......................................................................... 264
Contents
11
[Luminance Spot Meter] .................................................................. 266
[Zebra Pattern] ................................................................................ 267
[Frame Marker]................................................................................ 268
Slow & Quick Video .................................................................269
[Live Cropping].........................................................................272
Log Recording .........................................................................276
[V-Log View Assist] ......................................................................... 278
HLG Videos .............................................................................280
[HLG View Assist]............................................................................ 282
Anamorphic Recording ............................................................283
[Anamorphic(4:3)]............................................................................ 284
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] ................................................... 286
List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be
Recorded .................................................................................287
11. Connections with External Devices (Video) 289
HDMI Devices (HDMI Output) .................................................289
Images Output via HDMI ................................................................. 290
[HDMI Rec Output] ..................................................................292
External Microphones (Optional) .............................................293
XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional)........................................296
Headphones ............................................................................298
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images 300
Playing Back Pictures ..............................................................300
Playing Back Videos................................................................303
Extracting a Picture ......................................................................... 305
Switching the Display Mode.....................................................306
Enlarged Display ............................................................................. 306
Thumbnail Screen ........................................................................... 308
Calendar Playback .......................................................................... 309
Group Images ..........................................................................310
Deleting Images.......................................................................311
[RAW Processing]....................................................................312
[Video Divide]...........................................................................318
Contents
12
13. Camera Customization 320
Fn Buttons ...............................................................................321
Register Functions to the Fn Buttons .............................................. 323
Use the Fn Buttons.......................................................................... 329
[Dial Operation Switch] ............................................................330
Register Functions to the Dials........................................................ 330
Temporarily Change Dial Operation ................................................ 331
Quick Menu Customization......................................................332
Register to the Quick Menu ............................................................. 332
Custom Mode ..........................................................................337
Register in Custom Mode................................................................ 337
Using Custom Mode........................................................................ 339
Calling Up Settings.......................................................................... 340
My Menu ..................................................................................341
Registration in My Menu.................................................................. 341
[Save/Restore Camera Setting] ...............................................343
14. Menu Guide 344
List of Menu .............................................................................345
[Photo] Menu ...........................................................................350
[Video] Menu............................................................................364
[Custom] Menu ........................................................................370
[Setup] Menu ...........................................................................395
[Playback] Menu ......................................................................406
Entering Characters.................................................................415
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth 416
Connecting to a Smartphone ...................................................418
Installing “LUMIX Sync” .................................................................. 419
Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection) ..................... 420
Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection])........................... 424
Operating the Camera with a Smartphone ..............................430
[Remote shooting] ........................................................................... 431
[Shutter Remote Control]................................................................. 433
Contents
13
[Import images]................................................................................ 435
[Auto Transfer]................................................................................. 437
[Location Logging] ........................................................................... 439
[Remote Wakeup]............................................................................ 440
[Auto Clock Set]............................................................................... 441
[Camera settings copy].................................................................... 442
Sending Images from the Camera...........................................443
[Smartphone]................................................................................... 447
[PC] ................................................................................................. 451
[Printer]............................................................................................ 454
[Web service]................................................................................... 456
[Cloud Sync. Service] ...................................................................... 458
Wi-Fi Connections ...................................................................460
[Via Network] ................................................................................... 460
[Direct] ............................................................................................. 463
Connect to Wi-Fi Using Previously Saved Settings......................... 464
Send Settings and Selecting Images.......................................466
Image Send Settings ....................................................................... 466
Selecting Images............................................................................. 467
[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu ..................................................................468
“LUMIX CLUB” ................................................................................ 469
16. Connecting to Other Devices 473
Viewing on a TV.......................................................................475
Importing Images to a PC ........................................................478
Copying Images to a PC ................................................................. 478
Installing Software ........................................................................... 480
Storing on a Recorder..............................................................483
Tethered Recording .................................................................484
Installing Software ........................................................................... 484
Operating the Camera from a PC.................................................... 485
Printing.....................................................................................486
Contents
14
17. Materials 490
Using Optional Accessories.....................................................490
Battery Grip (Optional) .................................................................... 490
Shutter Remote Control (Optional) .................................................. 491
Tripod Grip (Optional)...................................................................... 492
AC Adaptor (Optional)/DC Coupler (Optional)................................. 492
Monitor/Viewfinder Displays ....................................................493
Recording Screen............................................................................ 493
Playback Screen ............................................................................. 499
Message Displays....................................................................502
Troubleshooting .......................................................................505
Cautions for Use ......................................................................516
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available
Recording Time with the Battery..............................................525
Number of Still Images That Can Be Taken and Video
Recording Time with Cards .....................................................528
List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for
Copying....................................................................................531
List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode...545
Specifications...........................................................................550
Index ........................................................................................560
Trademarks and Licenses .......................................................567
15
Contents by Function
Power Source
Charging l 34
Charging error l 36
l 40
Battery indication l 42
Power supply l 41
Power save function l 44
Number of pictures that can
be taken, available recording
time
l 525
Card
Cards that can be used l 24
[Card Format] l 48
[Double Card Slot Function] l 88
[Destination Card Slot] l 88
Switching the playback card l 302
l 308
Folder structure l 479
[Folder / File Settings] l 89
[File Number Reset] l 91
Entering characters l 415
Number of pictures, length of
recording time
l 528
Lens
Attaching l 49
[Focal Length Set] l 183
Basic Settings
[Language] l 405
[Clock Set] l 54
[Time Zone] l 404
[Beep] l 399
[Copyright Information] l 395
[Reset] l 76
Viewfinder
Diopter adjustment l 65
Eye sensor l 66
[Eye Sensor AF] l 376
Display
Recording screen l 493
Playback screen l 499
Viewfinder l 32
Control panel l 71
l 497
Switching display l 67
Monitor/viewfinder
adjustment
l 397
Monitor/viewfinder
luminance
l 398
Display speed l 396
Level gauge l 391
Grid lines l 385
[Histogram] l 384
[Sheer Overlay] l 390
Checking overexposure l 389
[V-Log View Assist] l 278
[HLG View Assist] l 282
AF/MF
Focus mode l 93
[Continuous AF] l 256
Selecting the AF mode l 100
l 375
Face/eye/human detection l 102
Animal detection l 103
Movement tracking l 105
[AF ON] l 95
Moving the AF area l 115
Contents by Function
16
Enlarged display l 97
l 122
Setting the AF sensitivity l 98
l 258
AF/AE Lock l 198
Touch AF l 80
l 117
[Touch Pad AF] l 118
[AF Assist Light] l 355
MF l 120
[MF Guide] l 374
[MF Assist] l 374
[Focus Peaking] l 356
Image Stabilizer
[Image Stabilizer] l 177
[Operation Mode] l 181
[E-Stabilization (Video)] l 179
[Boost I.S. (Video)] l 182
[Anamorphic (Video)] l 182
[Focal Length Set] l 183
Drive
Drive mode l 128
Burst l 129
[6K/4K PHOTO] l 133
[Time Lapse Shot] l 145
Recording with Stop Motion
Animation
l 149
[Self Timer] l 154
[Post-Focus] l 166
Image Quality
[Picture Size] l 85
[Picture Quality] l 86
RAW l 86
JPEG l 86
Aspect ratio l 83
[White Balance] l 202
[Photo Style] l 208
[Filter Settings] l 215
[Color Space] l 371
[Reduce Rolling Shutter] l 140
[6K/4K PHOTO Noise
Reduction]
l 141
[Long Exposure NR] l 351
[i.Dynamic Range] l 353
[Vignetting Comp.] l 354
[Diffraction Compensation] l 354
Taking Pictures
Recording mode
l
60
Quick menu l 69
Zoom l 124
[Ex. Tele Conv.] l 125
Bracket recording l 156
[Live View Composite] l 162
Bulb recording
l
194
[High Resolution Mode] l 221
[Multiple Exposure] l 362
[HLG Photo] l 225
[Shutter Type] l 175
[Silent Mode] l 174
Remote control recording l 491
Screen display l 493
Contents by Function
17
Exposure
[Exposure Comp.] l 196
Program Shift l 186
Preview mode
l
195
[Metering Mode] l 184
AE Lock l 198
[One Push AE] l 325
[Touch AE] l 81
[Sensitivity] l 199
[Extended ISO] l 371
Flash
External flash l 227
[Firing Mode] l 232
[Flash Mode] l 229
[Flash Adjust.] l 233
[Flash Synchro] l 234
[Wireless Flash Setup] l 236
Video Recording
Video recording l 240
[Switch NTSC/PAL] l 248
[Image Area of Video] l 249
Creative Video mode l 244
Slow & Quick mode l 244
l 269
[Live Cropping] l 272
Log recording (V-Log) l 276
HLG video l 280
Anamorphic Recording l 283
[Time Code] l 254
Remote control recording l 491
Display (Video)
[Waveform Monitor] l 264
[Luminance Spot Meter] l 266
[Zebra Pattern] l 267
[Frame Marker] l 268
Image Quality (Video)
[Rec. File Format] l 249
[Rec Quality] l 250
Resolution l 250
Recording frame rate l 250
Bit rate l 250
[Flicker Decrease (Video)] l 365
Exposure (Video)
Exposure settings l 241
l 247
Luminance level l 259
Knee l 260
Audio
External microphone l 293
XLR Microphone Adaptor l 296
Headphones l 298
[Sound Output] l 298
[Sound Rec Level Disp.] l 263
[Sound Rec Level Adj.] l 263
Wind noise reduction l 263
Attenuator l 263
Contents by Function
18
Playback
[Auto Review] l 382
Playing back pictures l 300
Playing back videos l 303
Thumbnail display l 308
Calendar display l 309
Enlarged display l 306
Group images l 310
Saving 6K/4K photos l 139
Viewing on a TV l 475
Deleting l 311
Screen display l 499
[Slide Show] l 407
Editing of Images
[RAW Processing] l 312
[Protect] l 411
[Rating] l 411
[Resize] l 412
[Rotate] l 412
[Video Divide] l 318
[Copy] l 413
Customization
[Custom] menu l 370
Function button l 321
Custom recording mode l 337
[My Menu] l 341
Quick menu l 332
Dial operation l 330
Saving camera settings l 343
Connecting with Other Devices
Sending images (PC) l 478
Printing l 486
Viewing on a TV l 475
HDMI output l 289
l 476
Tethered recording l 484
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Bluetooth connection l 420
[Wi-Fi connection] l 424
l 460
[Wi-Fi Setup] l 468
Smartphone app “LUMIX
Sync”
l 418
[Remote shooting] l 431
Location information l 439
Sending images
([Smartphone])
l 435
l 447
Sending images ([PC]) l 451
Sending images ([Printer]) l 454
Sending images ([Web
service])
l 456
Sending images ([Cloud
Sync. Service])
l 458
Saving camera settings l 442
“LUMIX CLUB” l 469
Software
“PHOTOfunSTUDIO” l 481
“SILKYPIX ” l 482
“LUMIX Tether” l 484
Maintenance
[Sensor Cleaning] l 404
[Pixel Refresh] l 404
19
1.
Introduction
Firmware of Your Camera/Lens
Firmware updates may be provided in order to improve camera capabilities or to add
functionality. For smoother recording, we recommend updating the firmware of the
camera/lens to the latest version.
0
For the latest information on the firmware or to download/update the firmware,
visit the following support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(English only)
0
To check the firmware version of the camera/lens, attach the lens to the camera and
select [Firmware Version] in the [Setup] ([Others]) menu. You can also update the
firmware in [Firmware Version]. (l 405)
0
You can also update the firmware from a smartphone.
For details, refer to [Help] in “LUMIX Sync”. (l 419)
0
This document provides explanations for camera firmware version 1.0.
Handling of the Camera
When using the camera, take care not to drop it, bump it, or apply undue force.
These may cause malfunction or damage to the camera and lens.
If sand, dust, or liquid gets on the monitor, wipe it off with a dry soft cloth.
– Touch operations may be incorrectly recognized.
Do not place a hand inside the camera mount.
This may cause a failure or damage because the sensor is a precision device.
The sensor can move, making a rattling noise, when the camera is shaken while
it is off. This is caused by the image stabilizer mechanism in the body. It is not a
malfunction.
Before Use
1. Introduction
20
Splash Resistant
Splash Resistant is a term used to describe an extra level of protection this
camera offers against exposure to a minimal amount of moisture, water or dust.
Splash Resistant does not guarantee that damage will not occur if this camera is
subjected to direct contact with water.
In order to minimize the possibility of damage please be sure the following
precautions are taken:
– Splash Resistant works in conjunction with the lenses that were specifically
designed to support this feature.
– Securely close the doors, contact points cover, etc.
– When the lens or cap is removed or a door is open, do not allow sand, dust, and
moisture to enter inside.
– If liquid gets on the camera, wipe it off with a dry soft cloth.
Condensation (When the Lens, the Viewfinder or Monitor
is Fogged Up)
0
Condensation occurs when there are temperature or humidity differences. Take care
as this may lead to soiling, mold, and malfunctions in the lens, viewfinder, and
monitor.
0
If condensation occurs, turn off the camera and leave it for approx. 2 hours. The fog
will disappear naturally when the temperature of the camera becomes close to the
ambient temperature.
1. Introduction
21
Be Sure to Perform Trial Recording in Advance
Perform trial recording in advance of an important event (wedding, etc.) to check that
recording can be performed normally.
No Compensation Regarding Recording
Please note that compensation cannot be provided in the event that recording could
not be performed due to a problem with the camera or a card.
Be Careful with Regard to Copyrights
Under copyright law, you may not use the images and audio you have recorded for
other than personal enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder.
Be careful because there are cases where restrictions apply to recording even for the
purpose of personal enjoyment.
Also Read “Cautions for Use” (l 516)
1. Introduction
22
Check that all the accessories are supplied before using the camera.
0
The accessories and their shape will differ depending on the country or area where
the camera was purchased.
For details on the accessories, refer to “Operating Instructions <Basic>” (supplied).
0
Digital camera body is referred to as camera in this document.
0
Battery pack is referred to as battery pack or battery in this document.
0
Battery charger is referred to as battery charger or charger in this document.
0
The memory card is optional.
Standard Accessories
1. Introduction
23
The lens mount of this camera is compliant with the L-Mount standard of
Leica Camera AG.
It can be used with 35 mm full-frame interchangeable lenses and APS-C
size interchangeable lenses of this standard.
0
The interchangeable lenses used in the explanations are designated as follows in
this document.
0
When there is no distinguishing the type of lens, the explanation will use lens.
0
Refer to catalogs/websites for most current information regarding supported
lenses.
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(English only)
Lenses That Can Be Used
Types of interchangeable lens Designation in this document
35 mm full-frame interchangeable lens full-frame lens
APS-C-size interchangeable lens APS-C lens
0
The angle of view while recording with an APS-C lens is equivalent to the
angle of view of a focal length of 1.5k when converted to the focal length of a
35 mm film camera. (If a 50 mm lens is used, the angle of view will be
equivalent to a 75 mm lens.)
0
As the image area narrows, the following functions are not available when
using an APS-C lens:
– 6K photo
– [High Resolution Mode]
– [Multiple Exposure]
1. Introduction
24
You can use the following memory cards with this camera.
0
SD memory card, SDHC memory card, and SDXC memory card are referred to by
the generic name of card in this document.
Memory Cards That Can Be Used
SD memory card
(512 MB to 2 GB)
The SDHC/SDXC cards
supported by card slot 1 and
2 on this camera are
different.
0
Card slot 1
– UHS Speed Class 3 of the UHS-
I
/UHS-
II
standard
– Video Speed Class 90 of the UHS-
II
standard
0
Card slot 2
– UHS Speed Class 3 of the UHS-
I
standard
0
Operation with the Panasonic cards on the left has
been verified.
SDHC memory card
(4 GB to 32 GB)
SDXC memory card
(48 GB to 128 GB)
1. Introduction
25
Cards That Can Be Used Stably with This Camera
When using the following functions, use cards that have the correct SD
Speed Class, UHS Speed Class, and Video Speed Class.
0
Speed classes are standards to guarantee the minimum speed necessary for
continuous writing.
[Video Record]
[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
Bit rate of the
recording quality
Speed Class
Example of
indication
72 Mbps
Class 10
UHS Speed Class 1 or higher
Video Speed Class 10 or higher
100 Mbps to
200 Mbps
UHS Speed Class 3
Video Speed Class 30 or higher
Speed Class
Example of
indication
UHS Speed Class 3
Video Speed Class 30 or higher
1. Introduction
26
0
You can prevent the writing and deleting of data by setting
the write-protect switch A on the card to “LOCK”.
0
The data stored on a card may be damaged due to
electromagnetic waves, static electricity or a failure of the
camera or card. We recommend backing up important data.
0
Keep the memory card out of reach of children to prevent
swallowing.
1. Introduction
27
Camera
Names of Parts
2
3
4
1
6
7
5
11
12
13
14
10
15
8
9
1
Stereo microphone (l 263)
0
Do not block the microphone
with a finger. Audio will be
difficult to record.
2
Drive mode dial
(l
128)
3
Hot shoe (hot shoe cover) (l 227)
0
Keep the hot shoe cover out of
reach of children to prevent
swallowing.
4
Speaker (l 399)
5
Front dial (l 61)
6
Shutter button (l 59)
7
[WB] (White balance) button
(l 202)
8
[ISO] (ISO sensitivity) button
(l 199)
9
[ ] (Exposure compensation)
button (l 196)
10
Charging light (l 40)/
Wireless connection light (l 416)
11
Video rec. button (l 240)
12
[ ] (Recording distance
reference mark) (l 123)
13
Rear dial (l 61)
14
Camera on/off switch (l 54)
15
Mode dial (l 60)
1. Introduction
28
5
12
13
8
10
11
9
4
6
7
3
2
1
1
[LVF] button (l 66)
2
[(] (Playback) button (l 300)
3
Monitor
(l
32, 493)/
Touch screen (l 64)
4
[ ] (AF mode) button (l 94)
5
Focus mode lever
(l
93, 94, 120)
6
[AF ON] button (l 95)
7
Joystick (l 63)/
Fn buttons (l 321)
Center: Fn8, 3: Fn9, 1: Fn10,
4: Fn11, 2: Fn12
8
[Q] (Quick menu) button (l 69)
9
Cursor buttons (l 62)/
Fn buttons (l 321)
3: Fn13, 1: Fn14, 4: Fn15,
2: Fn16
10
Control dial (l 62)
11
[MENU/SET] button (l 62, 73)
12
[DISP.] button (l 67)
13
[ ] (Cancel) button (l 68, 75)/
[ ] (Delete) button (l 311)/
Fn button (Fn1) (l 321)
1. Introduction
29
5
2
3
9
12
13
4
1
7
6
8
11
10
1
Eye cup (l 518)
2
Viewfinder
(l
32, 66, 493)
3
Eye sensor (l 66)
4
Tripod mount (l 523)
0
If you attempt to attach a tripod
with a screw length of 5.5 mm
(0.22 inches) or more, you may
not be able to securely fix it in
place or it may damage the
camera.
5
Battery grip connector (cover for
the battery grip connector)
(l 490)
0
Keep the cover for the battery
grip connector out of reach of
children to prevent swallowing.
6
[REMOTE] socket (l 491)
7
Card slot 1 (l 46)
8
Card slot 2 (l 46)
9
Card door (l 46)
10
Card access light (l 46)
11
DC coupler cover (l 492)
0
When using an AC adaptor,
ensure that the Panasonic DC
Coupler (DMW-DCC17:
optional) and AC Adaptor
(DMW-AC10: optional) are
used.
12
Battery door (l 37)
13
Battery door release lever (l 37)
1. Introduction
30
10
9
8
7
5
6
2
3
4
1
13 14 1512 1611 1
1
Shoulder strap eyelet (l 33)
2
Preview button (l 195)/
Fn button (Fn2) (l 321)
3
Grip
4
Lens release button (l 49)
5
Self-timer light (l 154)/
AF assist light (l 355)
6
Diopter adjustment dial (l 65)
7
[MIC] socket (l 293)
8
Headphone socket (l 298)
0
Excessive sound pressure from
earphones and headphones can
cause hearing loss.
9
[HDMI] socket (l 289, 473)
10
USB port (l 39, 474)
11
Lens fitting mark (l 49)
12
Lens lock pin
13
Sensor
14
Contact points
15
Mount
16
Screw hole for function expansion
1. Introduction
31
Supplied Lens
S-R2060
5 6 71 2 3 4
1
Lens surface
2
Focus ring (l 121)
3
Zoom ring (l 124)
4
[AF/MF] switch (l 94, 120)
0
You can switch between AF and
MF.
If [MF] is set on either the lens or
camera, operation will be with
MF.
5
Contact points
6
Lens mount rubber (l 519)
7
Lens fitting mark (l 49)
0
Recording at or near the closest focusing distance at wide angle will degrade
image quality around the edges of the image. We recommend checking each
picture after you have taken it when recording.
1. Introduction
32
Viewfinder/Monitor Displays
At the time of purchase, the viewfinder/monitor displays the following
icons.
0
For information about the icons other than those described here, refer to page 493.
Viewfinder Monitor
999
ISO
100
F
3.560
L
FINE
AFSAFS
1 2
4
3 5 6 7
8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17
999
ISO
100F3.560
±
0
AFSAFS
L
FINE
1
Photo Style (l 208)
2
Level gauge (l 391)
3
Picture quality (l 86)/
Picture size (l 85)
4
AF area (l 115)
5
Focus mode (l 93, 120)
6
AF mode (l 100)
7
Image stabilizer (l 177)
8
Focus (green) (l 59, 95)/
Recording state (red) (l 223, 241)
9
Recording mode (l 60)
10
Metering mode (l 184)
11
Shutter speed (l 59)
12
Aperture value (l 59)
13
Exposure compensation value
(l 196)/
Manual Exposure Assist (l 193)
14
ISO sensitivity (l 199)
15
Card slot (l 46)/
Double card slot function (l 88)
16
Number of still images that can be
taken (l 528)/
Number of pictures that can be taken
continuously (l 131)
17
Battery indication (l 42)
0
Press [ ] to switch between display/hide of the level gauge.
33
2.
Getting Started
Attach a shoulder strap to the camera with the following procedure to
prevent it from dropping.
Attaching a Shoulder Strap
0
Pull the shoulder strap and check that it will not come out.
0
Attach the opposite end of the shoulder strap with the same procedure.
0
Use the shoulder strap around your shoulder.
– Do not wrap the strap around your neck.
It may result in injury or accident.
0
Do not leave the shoulder strap where an infant can reach it.
– It may result in an accident by mistakenly wrapping around the neck.
1
2
3
4
2. Getting Started
34
You can charge the battery either using the supplied charger, or in the
camera body.
You can also turn on the camera and supply power from an electrical
outlet.
0 The battery that can be used with the camera is DMW-BLK22. (As of
September 2020)
Charging with the Charger
0
Use the supplied charger and AC adaptor.
0
The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely.
The charging time may vary depending on how the battery has been used.
The charging time for the battery in hot/cold environments or a battery that has not
been used for a long time may be longer than normal.
Charging the Battery
0
The battery is not charged at the time of purchase. Charge the battery before
use.
Charging time Approx. 230 min
0
Use the products supplied with the camera for charging.
0
Use the charger indoors.
2. Getting Started
35
1
Connect the charger and the AC adaptor with the USB
connection cable.
0
Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the
plug.
(Inserting these at an angle may cause deformation or malfunction)
2
Connect the AC adaptor to an electrical outlet.
3
Insert the battery.
0
The charging lights ([CHARGE]) A blink and charging begins.
0
Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.
This may cause malfunction.
0
Do not use any other AC adaptors except the supplied one.
This may cause malfunction.
1
2
3
2. Getting Started
36
Charging Lights Indications
0
When the battery is inserted while the charger is not connected to the power source,
the charging lights turn on for a certain period to allow you to confirm the battery
level.
Charging
status
0 % to 49 % 50 % to 79 % 80 % to 99 % 100 %
Charging
lights
A Blinking B On C Off
0
After charging, disconnect the power source connection and remove the
battery.
0
If the [50%] light is blinking quickly, then charging is not occurring.
– The temperature of the battery or surroundings is either too high or too low.
Try charging at an ambient temperature between 10 °C and 30 °C (50 oF
and 86 oF).
– The terminals of the charger or the battery are dirty.
Remove the connection to the power source, and wipe with a dry cloth.
2. Getting Started
37
Battery Insertion
0
Always use genuine Panasonic batteries (DMW-BLK22).
0
If you use other batteries, we cannot guarantee the quality of this product.
0
Check that the lever A is holding the battery in place.
Removing the Battery
1
Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
2
Open the battery door.
0
Check that the card access light B is
turned off and then open the battery door.
3
Push the lever A in the direction of the
arrow and then remove the battery.
0
Check that the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF].
1
2
3
2. Getting Started
38
0
Ensure that no foreign objects are adhering to the inner side (cushion) of the
battery door.
0
Remove the battery after use.
(The battery will drain if left inserted in the camera for a long period of time.)
0
The battery becomes warm after use, during charging, and immediately after
charging.
The camera also becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.
0
Be careful when removing the battery as the battery will jump out.
2. Getting Started
39
Inserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging
0
Using the camera body and the supplied AC adaptor.
0
The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely.
The charging time may vary depending on how the battery has been used.
The charging time for the battery in hot/cold environments or a battery that has not
been used for a long time may be longer than normal.
1
Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
2
Insert the battery into the camera.
3
Connect the camera USB port and the AC adaptor using
the USB connection cable.
0
Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the
plug.
(Inserting these at an angle may cause deformation or malfunction)
4
Connect the AC adaptor to an electrical outlet.
0
The charging light A turns red and charging begins.
Charging time Approx. 240 min
0
Use the products supplied with the camera for charging.
2. Getting Started
40
Charging Light Indications
Charging light (red)
On: Charging.
Off: Charging has completed.
Blinking: Charging error.
0
You can also charge the battery by connecting a USB device (PC, etc.) and
the camera with the USB connection cable.
Charging may take longer in this case.
0
The battery in the Battery Grip (DMW-BGS5: optional) cannot be charged.
0
Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.
This may cause malfunction.
0
Do not use any other AC adaptors except the supplied one.
This may cause malfunction.
0
After charging, disconnect the connection to the power source.
0
While the charging light is blinking red, charging is not possible.
– The temperature of the battery or surroundings is either too high or too low.
Try charging at an ambient temperature between 10 °C and 30 °C (50 oF
and 86 oF).
– The terminals of the battery are dirty.
Remove the battery and wipe off the dirt with a dry cloth.
0
Even when the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF] thus turning the camera
off, it consumes power.
When the camera will not be used for a long time, remove the power plug from
the electrical outlet in order to save power.
2. Getting Started
41
Power Supply
When the battery is inserted into the camera for charging and the camera
is turned on, you can record while the camera is being supplied with power.
0
[ ] is displayed in the screen while power is being supplied.
0
You can also supply power by using a USB connection cable to connect the
camera and a USB device (PC, etc.).
0
The battery cannot be charged while power is being supplied.
0
Turn off the camera before connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor.
0
Remaining charge in the battery may decrease depending on usage
conditions. When the battery level is depleted, the camera will turn off.
0
If the temperature of the camera rises, [ ] may be displayed, recording may
stop, and some functions may become unavailable temporarily. Wait until the
camera cools down.
0
Depending on the power supply capabilities of the connected device, it may
not be possible to supply power.
0
USB power supply can be turned off:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [USB] ¨ [USB Power Supply] (l 400)
2. Getting Started
42
Notifications Regarding Charging/Power Supply
Power Indications
0
The battery level indicated on the screen is approximate.
The exact level varies depending on the environment and the operating conditions.
Indication on monitor
A USB connection cable supplying
power
B Battery indication
C Using the battery in the Battery Grip
80 % or higher
60 % to 79 %
40 % to 59 %
20 % to 39 %
19 % or below
Blinking
Low battery
0
Charge or replace the battery.
2. Getting Started
43
0
We recommend that genuine Panasonic batteries are used.
There is a possibility that the use of non-genuine batteries can cause
accidents or malfunctions that may lead to fire or explosion.
Please be advised that we are not liable for any accident or failure
resulting from the use of non-genuine batteries.
0
Do not leave any metal items (such as clips) near the contact areas of the
power plug.
Otherwise, a fire and/or electric shocks may be caused by short-circuiting or
the resulting heat generated.
0
Do not use the AC adaptor or USB connection cable on other devices.
This may cause a malfunction.
0
Do not use USB extension cables or USB conversion adaptors.
0
The battery can be charged even when it still has some charge left, but it is not
recommended that the battery charge be frequently topped up while the
battery is fully charged.
(Since characteristic swelling may occur.)
0
If there is a power outage or other problem with the electrical outlet, then
charging may not complete successfully.
Reconnect the power plug.
0
Do not connect to keyboard or printer USB ports, or to USB hubs.
0
If the connected PC enters sleep status, then charging/power supply may
stop.
2. Getting Started
44
[Power Save Mode]
This is a function to automatically turn the camera to sleep (power save)
status or turn off the viewfinder/monitor if no operation is performed for a
set time. Reduces battery consumption.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Power Save Mode]
0
To recover from [Sleep Mode], [Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)], or [Power Save LVF Shooting],
perform one of the following operations:
– Press the shutter button halfway.
– Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF] and then [ON] again.
0
To recover from [Auto LVF/Monitor Off], press any button.
[Sleep Mode] Sets the amount of time until the camera is put to sleep.
[Sleep
Mode(Wi-Fi)]
Sets the camera to sleep 15 minutes after being disconnected
from Wi-Fi.
[Auto LVF/
Monitor Off]
Sets the amount of time it takes for the viewfinder/monitor to turn
off.
(The camera is not turned off.)
[Power Save
LVF Shooting]
Puts the camera to sleep when the recording screen is being
displayed on the monitor when automatic viewfinder/monitor
switching is active.
[Time to
Sleep]
Sets the amount of time until the camera is put to
sleep.
[Method of
Activation]
Sets the screen where the camera is put to sleep.
[Only Control Panel]:
Puts the camera to sleep only when the control
panel (l 67) is displayed.
[While Recording Standby]:
Puts the camera to sleep from any screen during
recording standby.
2. Getting Started
45
0
[Power Save Mode] is not available in the following cases:
– While connected to a PC or printer
– During video recording/video playback
– When recording with [6K/4K Pre-Burst]
– During a [Time Lapse Shot]
– When recording with [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)
– When recording with [Live View Composite]
– When recording with [Multiple Exposure]
– During a [Slide Show]
– During HDMI output for recording
2. Getting Started
46
This camera supports the double card slot function.
When two cards are used, relay recording, backup recording, and
allocation recording are available.
A Card slot 1 (compatible with UHS-
I
/UHS-
II
)
B Card slot 2 (compatible with UHS-
I
)
0
Match the orientation of the cards as shown in the figure and then insert them firmly
until they click.
Card Access Indications
The card access light turns on while the
card is being accessed.
Inserting Cards (Optional)
0
You can set the way to record to card slots 1 and 2:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Double Card Slot Function] (l 88)
1
2
3
2. Getting Started
47
Removing a Card
1
Open the card door.
0
Check that the card access light A is
turned off and then open the card door.
2
Push the card until it clicks and then
pull the card out straight.
0
The card may be warm just after the camera has been used.
0
Do not perform the following operations during access.
The camera may operate incorrectly or the card and recorded images
may be damaged.
– Turn off the camera.
– Remove the battery or card or disconnect the power plug.
– Subject the camera to vibration, impacts, or static electricity.
2. Getting Started
48
Formatting Cards (Initialization)
Format the cards with the camera before use.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Card Format]
Settings: [Card Slot 1]/[Card Slot 2]
0
When a card is formatted, all of the data stored in the card is erased and
cannot be restored.
Save a backup of necessary data before formatting the card.
0
Do not turn off the camera or perform another operation during formatting.
0
Take care not to turn off the camera while formatting is in progress.
0
If the card has been formatted with a PC or other device, format it again with
the camera.
0
You can format the card while keeping the camera settings information stored
on the card:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Save/Restore Camera Setting] ¨ [Keep Settings While
Format] (l 343)
2. Getting Started
49
You can attach the Leica Camera AG L-Mount standard lens to this
camera.
For information about the lenses that can be used, refer to page 23.
0
When removing the body cap, rotate it while pressing the lens release button A.
B Lens fitting marks
Removing a Lens
0
While pressing the lens release button A, rotate
the lens in the direction of the arrow until it stops
and then remove it.
Attaching a Lens
0
Check that the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF].
0
Change the lens in a location where there is not a lot of dirt and dust. If dirt or
dust gets on the lens, refer to page 517.
0
Change the lens while the lens cap is attached.
1 2 3
2. Getting Started
50
0
When you have attached a lens that does not have a communication function
with this camera, after turning on the camera, a message asking for
confirmation of the focal length setting is displayed.
You can register the focal length of the lens when you select [Yes]. (l 183)
0
Insert the lens straight in.
Inserting this at an angle to attach it may damage the camera lens mount.
0
After removing the lens, be sure to attach the body cap and the lens rear cap.
2. Getting Started
51
Attaching a Lens Hood
For recording against strong backlight, a lens hood can reduce the
inclusion of unwanted light in images and drop in contrast resulting from
the irregular reflection of light that occurs within the lens.
It allows you take more beautiful pictures by cutting out excess light.
When attaching the lens hood (flower shape) supplied with the
interchangeable lens (S-R2060)
Hold the lens hood by placing your
fingers as shown in the figure.
0
Do not hold the lens hood in such a way
that it will become bent.
1
Align mark A ( ) on the
lens hood with the mark on
the tip of the lens.
2
Rotate the lens hood in the
direction of the arrow to align
mark B ( ) on the lens hood
with the mark on the tip of the
lens.
≥Attach the lens hood by rotating it
until it clicks.
2. Getting Started
52
Removing the Lens Hood
While pressing the lens hood button A,
rotate the lens hood in the direction of the
arrow and then remove it.
0
The lens hood can be attached in the reverse direction when carrying the
camera.
1 Align mark B ( ) on the lens hood with the mark on the tip of the lens.
2 Attach the lens hood by rotating it in the direction of the arrow until it clicks.
2. Getting Started
53
At the time of purchase, the monitor is stowed in the camera body.
Adjusting the Monitor Direction and
Angle
0
The angles of adjustment are guides only.
0
Do not apply an excessive force to the monitor. This may cause damage or
malfunction.
0
When not using the camera, close the monitor with the monitor surface facing
in.
180°
90°
180°
1
2
3
2. Getting Started
54
When you turn the camera on for the first time, a screen to set the time
zone and clock appears.
Be sure to set these settings before use to ensure images are recorded
with the correct date and time information.
1
Set the camera on/off switch
to [ON].
≥If the language select screen is not
displayed, proceed to Step
4
.
2
When [Please set the language] appears, press or
.
3
Set the language.
≥Press 34 to select the language and then press or .
4
When [Please set the time zone] appears, press or
.
5
Set the time zone.
≥Press 21 to select the time zone
and then press or .
0 If you are using Daylight Savings
[ ], press 3. (The time will
move forward by 1 hour.)
To return to the normal time, press
3 again.
A Time difference from GMT (Greenwich Mean Time)
Setting the Clock
(When Turning On for the First Time)
2. Getting Started
55
6
When [Please set the clock] appears, press or .
7
Set the clock.
To set the display order B and
time display format C
≥Press 21 to select [Style] and
then press or to display
the screen for setting the display
order and time display format.
8
Confirm your selection.
≥Press or .
9
When [The clock setting has
been completed.] appears, press or .
21: Select an item (year, month,
day, hour, minute, or second).
34: Select a value.
2. Getting Started
56
0
If the camera is used without setting the clock, it will be set to 0:00:00, 1st
January 2020.
0
Clock settings are maintained for approx. 3 months using the built-in clock
battery even without the battery.
(Leave the fully-charged battery in the camera for approx. 24 hours to charge
the built-in battery.)
0
[Time Zone] and [Clock Set] can be changed from the menu:
–[ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Time Zone] (l 404)
–[ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Clock Set]
57
3.
Basic Operations
How to Hold the Camera
To minimize camera shake, hold the camera so that it will not move during
recording.
Hold the camera with both hands, keep your arms still at your
side, and stand with your feet shoulder width apart.
≥ Hold the camera firmly by wrapping your right hand around the camera
grip.
≥ Support the lens from below with your left hand.
0
Do not cover the AF assist light A or microphone B with your fingers or other
objects.
Basic Recording Operations
3. Basic Operations
58
Vertical Orientation Detection Function
This function detects when pictures were
recorded with the camera held vertically
orientated.
With the default settings, pictures are
automatically played back vertically
oriented.
0
If you set [Rotate Disp.] to [OFF], pictures will be
played back without being rotated. (l 407)
0
When the camera is tilted significantly up or down, the vertical orientation
detection function may not work correctly.
0
Images recorded using the following functions are played back vertically
oriented only when displayed in thumbnail format:
– Video recording/[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
3. Basic Operations
59
Recording
1
Adjust the focus.
≥Press the shutter button halfway
(press it gently).
≥The aperture value A and shutter
speed B are displayed.
(When the correct exposure cannot
be obtained, the indications blink in
red.)
≥Once the subject is in focus, the
focus icon C lights.
(When the subject is not in focus,
the icon blinks.)
0
You can also perform the same operation by pressing [AF ON].
2
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully (press
it further).
≥When recording videos, press the
video rec. button. (l 240)
F3.5
F3.5
F3.560
60
60
3. Basic Operations
60
Selecting the Recording Mode
Rotate the mode dial to select the recording mode.
0
Recorded pictures can be displayed automatically by setting [Auto Review] of
the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Photo)]) menu. You can also change the
picture display duration to your preferred setting. (l 382)
0
With the default settings, you cannot take a picture until the subject is
brought into focus.
If you set [Focus/Shutter Priority] in the [Custom] ([Focus/Shutter])
menu to [BALANCE] or [RELEASE], you will be able to take a picture
even when the subject is not in focus. (l 373)
[iA] Intelligent Auto mode (l 77)
[P] Program AE mode (l 185)
[A] Aperture-Priority AE mode (l 187)
[S] Shutter-Priority AE mode (l 190)
[M] Manual Exposure mode (l 192)
[] Creative Video mode (l 244)
[S&Q] Slow & Quick mode (l 269)
[C1]/[C2]/[C3] Custom mode (l 337)
3. Basic Operations
61
When changing the camera settings, operate the camera using the
following operation parts.
Front Dial ( )/Rear Dial ( )
Rotate:
Selects an item or numeric value.
Camera Setting Operations
A Front dial (l 61)
B Rear dial (l 61)
C Control dial (l 62)
D Cursor buttons (l 62)
E [MENU/SET] button (l 62)
F Joystick (l 63)
G Touch screen (l 64)
3. Basic Operations
62
Control Dial ( )
Rotate:
Selects an item or numeric value.
Cursor Buttons (3421)
Press:
Selects an item or numeric value.
[MENU/SET] Button ( )
Press:
Confirms a setting.
0
Displays the menu during recording and
playback.
3. Basic Operations
63
Joystick (3421/)
The joystick can be operated in 4 directions by tilting it up, down, left and
right and by pressing the center part.
A Tilt: Selects an item or numeric value, or
moves a position.
0
Place your finger on the center of the joystick
before tilting. The joystick may not work as
expected when the sides are pressed.
B Press: Confirms a setting.
0
You can register [Operation Lock] to the Fn button to disable the operations of
operating parts:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Fn Button Set] ¨ [Setting in REC mode] ¨ [Operation
Lock] (l 321)
3. Basic Operations
64
Touch Screen
Operations can be performed by touching the icons, slide bars, menus,
and other items displayed on the screen.
A Touch
Operation of touching and then lifting your
finger from the touch screen.
B Drag
Operation of moving a finger while it
touches the touch screen.
C Pinch (widen/narrow)
Operations of widening the distance
between two fingers (pinch out) and
narrowing the distance between two fingers
(pinch in) while they are touching the touch
screen.
0
If you will use a commercially available monitor protection sheet, observe the
precautions for the sheet.
(Visibility and operability may be impaired depending on the type of monitor
protection sheet.)
0
Touch operations can be disabled:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Touch Settings] (l 377)
3. Basic Operations
65
Setting the Viewfinder
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter
Rotate the diopter adjustment dial
while looking through the
viewfinder.
0
Adjust until you can clearly see the text on the
viewfinder.
Monitor/Viewfinder Display Settings
3. Basic Operations
66
Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder
With the default settings, automatic viewfinder/monitor switching is set.
When you look through the viewfinder, the eye sensor A works and the
camera switches from monitor display to viewfinder display.
You can switch to viewfinder display or monitor display with [LVF] button
B.
Press [LVF].
Automatic viewfinder/
monitor switching
Viewfinder display Monitor display
0
The eye sensor may not work correctly due to the shape of eyeglasses, the
way the camera is held, or bright light shining around the eyepiece.
0
During video playback or slide show, automatic viewfinder/monitor switching
does not work.
0
To focus when looking through the viewfinder:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Eye Sensor AF] (l 376)
0
The sensitivity of the eye sensor can be changed:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Eye Sensor] (l 398)
3. Basic Operations
67
Switching the Display Information
Press [DISP.].
≥ The display information is switched.
Recording Screen
Monitor
Viewfinder
With information
Without
information
Control panel Turned off (black)
With information
Without
information
999
ISO
AUTO
±
0
AFSAFS
L
FINE
999
999
AWB
Fn
0 0
0
AFS FINE
3:2
ISO
AUTO
999
L
FINE
AFSAFS
3. Basic Operations
68
Playback Screen
¢1 Pressing 34 switches the display information. (l 501)
¢2 This is a screen without blinking highlights display that is shown when [Blinking
Highlights] of the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Photo)]) menu is set to [ON].
In other than this screen, overexposed parts of the screen will blink. (l 389)
0
Press [ ] to switch between display/hide of the level gauge.
This can also be set by using [Level Gauge]. (l 391)
0
Control panel operation (l 71)
0
You can hide the control panel and black screen:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Show/Hide Monitor Layout] (l 391)
0
The display can be changed so that live view and display information do not
overlap:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] (l 387)
With information
Detailed
information
display
¢1
Without
information
Without blinking
highlights
¢2
2020.12.1 10:00 100-0001 1/999
ISO
100
F
3.560
±
0
L
FINE
100
100-0001
ISO
0
F3.5
60
2020.12. 1 10:00
s
RGB
1/5
FINE
AFS
STD.
L
3:2
AWB
3. Basic Operations
69
This menu enables you to quickly set functions that are frequently used
during recording without calling up the menu screen. You can also change
the Quick menu display method and the items to display.
1
Display the Quick menu.
≥Press [Q].
2
Select a menu item.
≥Press 3421.
≥Selection is also possible by
rotating .
≥Selection is also possible by
touching a menu item.
3
Select a setting item.
≥Rotate or .
≥Selection is also possible by
touching a setting item.
4
Close the Quick menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
≥You can also close the menu by
pressing [Q].
Quick Menu
00 0
AWB
3:2
0 0
0
AUTO
ISO
00 0
AWB
3:2
0 0
0
AUTO
ISO
3. Basic Operations
70
0
Some items cannot be set depending on the recording mode or camera
settings.
0
The Quick menu can be customized:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Q.MENU Settings] (l 332)
3. Basic Operations
71
This screen allows you to view the current recording settings on the
monitor. You can also touch the screen to change the settings.
1
Display the control panel.
≥Press [DISP.] several times.
2
Touch the items.
≥The setting screens for each of the
items are displayed.
3
Change the setting.
Example) Changing the AF mode
≥Touch the setting item.
0
Refer to the pages explaining each item
for information on how to change the
settings.
4
Touch [Set].
Control Panel
999
999
AWB
Fn
ISO
AUTO
0 0
0
AFS
FINE
3:2
3. Basic Operations
72
Changing Directly Using the Dial
Steps
2
to
4
can also be changed using the
following operations.
1
Press one of 3421 to enable
selection of items.
0 Selected items are displayed in
yellow.
2
Press 3421 to select an item.
0 Selection is also possible by rotating
or .
3
Rotate to change the settings
values.
0
Some items cannot be set depending on the recording mode or camera
settings.
AWB
ISO
AUTO
0
0
AFS
FINE
3:2
AWB
ISO
AUTO
0
0
AFS
FINE
3:2
3. Basic Operations
73
In this camera, the menu is used for setting a wide variety of functions and
performing camera customizations.
Menu operations can be performed using the cursors, joystick, dial, or by
touch.
1
Display the menu.
≥Press .
Menu Operation Methods
Configuration and operation parts of the menu
The menu can be operated by pressing 21 to move between menu screens.
Direct operation of the main tabs, sub tabs, page tabs, and menu items is also
possible without moving through the different menu levels by using the operation
parts indicated in the parentheses below.
0
You can also operate by touching the icons, menu items, and setting items.
A Main tabs ([Q] button)
B Sub tabs ( )
C Menu items ( )
D Page tabs ( )
E Setting items
3. Basic Operations
74
2
Select a main tab.
≥Press 34 to select a main tab and
then press 1.
≥You can also perform the same
operation by rotating to select
the main tab and then pressing
or .
3
Select a sub tab.
≥Press 34 to select a sub tab and
then press 1.
≥You can also perform the same
operation by rotating to select
the sub tab and then pressing
or .
0
If there are page tabs A, then after the
page tabs have finished switching, the next
sub tab is switched to.
4
Select a menu item.
≥Press 34 to select a menu item
and then press 1.
≥You can also perform the same
operation by rotating to select
the menu item and then pressing
or .
3. Basic Operations
75
5
Select a setting item and then
confirm your selection.
≥Press 34 to select a setting item
and then press or .
≥You can also perform the same
operation by rotating to select
the setting item and then pressing
or .
6
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
≥You can also close the menu by
pressing [ ] several times.
Displaying Descriptions About Menu Items and Settings
If you press [DISP.] while a menu item or
setting item is selected, a description about
the item is displayed on the screen.
0
For details about menu items, refer to Menu Guide. (l 344)
3. Basic Operations
76
Grayed Out Menu Items
Menu items that cannot be set are
displayed grayed out.
If you press or while a grayed out
menu item is selected, the reason why it
cannot be set is displayed.
0
The reason why a menu item cannot be set may
not be displayed depending on the menu item.
[Reset]
Return each of the following settings to the default setting:
– Recording settings
– Network settings (settings of [Wi-Fi Setup] and [Bluetooth])
– Setup and custom settings (other than [Wi-Fi Setup] and [Bluetooth])
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Reset]
0
If the setup and custom settings are reset, the [Playback] menu is also reset.
0
The folder numbers and clock settings are not reset.
0
List of default settings and settings that can be reset (l 531)
3. Basic Operations
77
The [iA] mode (Intelligent Auto mode) can record images using settings
automatically selected by the camera.
The camera detects the scene to set the optimal recording settings
automatically to match the subject and recording conditions.
1
Set the mode dial to [iA].
2
Aim the camera at the subject.
≥When the camera detects the
scene, the recording mode icon
changes.
(Automatic Scene Detection)
3
Adjust the focus.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
≥Once the subject is in focus, the
focus icon lights.
(When the subject is not in focus,
the icon blinks.)
0
[ ] of the AF mode works and the AF area is displayed aligned to any
humans.
Intelligent Auto Mode
3. Basic Operations
78
4
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
Types of Automatic Scene Detection
: Scenes detected during picture taking
: Scenes detected during video recording
¢1 Detected when animal detection is enabled. (l 103)
¢2 Detected when using an external flash.
0
Backlight compensation operates automatically to prevent subjects from
appearing dark when there is a backlight.
:
i-Portrait
:
i-Portrait & Animal
¢1
:
i-Scenery
:
i-Macro
:
i-Night Portrait
¢2
:
i-Night Scenery
:
i-Food
:
i-Sunset
:
i-Low Light
:
3. Basic Operations
79
AF Mode
Changing the AF mode.
0
Each press of [ ] changes the AF mode.
Flash
When recording using a flash, the camera switches to the appropriate flash
mode for the recording conditions.
When Slow Sync. ([ ], [ ]), be careful with regard to camera shake
because the shutter speed becomes slow.
0
If none of the scenes are applicable, recording is with [ ] (standard setting).
0
Different scene types may be selected for the same subject depending on the
recording conditions.
[]/[]
([Face/Eye/
Body/Animal
Detect.])
The camera detects a person’s face, eyes,
and body (entire body or upper half of the
body) and the body of animals, and adjusts
the focus.
0
Each press of switches the person,
animal or eye to be brought into focus. It
cannot be switched by touching.
0
Animal detection will maintain the enable/disable setting selected
during other than [iA] mode.
[]
([Tracking])
When the focus mode is set to [AFC], the
AF area follows the movement of the
subject, maintaining focusing.
Aim the AF area over the subject and then
press and hold the shutter button halfway.
0
The camera will track the subject while the shutter button is
pressed halfway or fully.
0
For information about AF modes, refer to page 102 and 105.
0
When [ ] or [ ], Red-Eye Removal works.
0
For information about external flashes, refer to page 227.
3. Basic Operations
80
Touch AF/Touch Shutter
Touch functions allow you to focus on the point that you touch, release the
shutter, etc.
1
Touch [ ].
2
Touch the icon.
≥The icon switches each time you
touch it.
3
(When set to anything other
than OFF)
Touch the subject.
Recording Using Touch Functions
0
With the default settings, the Touch Tab is not displayed.
Set [Touch Tab] to [ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation])
menu. (l 377)
(Touch AF)
Focus on the touched position.
(Touch Shutter)
Record with focus on the point touched.
(OFF)
s
AF
3. Basic Operations
81
Touch AE
This function adjusts the brightness according to a touched position.
When a subject’s face appears dark, you can make the screen brighter to
match the face.
1
Touch [ ].
2
Touch [ ].
≥The Touch AE settings screen
appears.
0
When the Touch Shutter fails, the AF area first turns red and then disappears.
0
Refer to “Operations on the AF area movement screen” on page 104 for
information about operations to move the AF area.
0
It is also possible to optimize the focus and brightness on the touched
position:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Touch Settings] ¨ [Touch AF] ¨ [AF+AE] (l 116)
0
With the default settings, the Touch Tab is not displayed.
Set [Touch Tab] to [ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation])
menu. (l 377)
AF
AE
3. Basic Operations
82
3
Touch the subject to which
you wish to adjust the
brightness.
0
To return the position to which to adjust
the brightness to the center, touch
[Reset].
4
Touch [Set].
How to Disable Touch AE
Touch [ ].
0
When the following function is being used, Touch AE is not available:
– [Live Cropping]
0
You can also adjust both the focus and brightness to those of the position you
touch. (At this time, Touch AE is not available):
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Touch Settings] ¨ [Touch AF] ¨ [AF+AE] (l 116)
ュリヴヱハ
6HW
5HVHW
83
4.
Image Recording
You can select the image aspect ratio.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Aspect Ratio]
[Aspect Ratio]
[4:3] Aspect ratio of a 4:3 monitor
[3:2] Aspect ratio of a standard film camera
[16:9] Aspect ratio of a 16:9 TV
[1:1] Square aspect ratio
[65:24]
Panoramic aspect ratio
[2:1]
4. Image Recording
84
0
[16:9] and [1:1] aspect ratios are not available when using the following
functions:
– 6K photo
– [Post-Focus] (when set to [6K 18M])
0
[65:24] and [2:1] aspect ratios are not available when using the following
functions:
– [iA] mode
– Taking burst pictures
– [6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation]
– [HLG Photo]
– [High Resolution Mode]
– [Filter Settings]
– [Live View Composite]
– [Multiple Exposure]
0
When using APS-C lenses, [65:24] and [2:1] are not available.
0
A frame for trimming (cropping) can be displayed on the recording screen:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Frame Marker] (l 268)
4. Image Recording
85
Sets the picture’s image size. The image size varies depending on the
[Aspect Ratio] or the lens used.
When an APS-C lens is used, the image area switches to the one for
APS-C, thereby narrowing the angle of view.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Picture Size]
0
When [Ex. Tele Conv.] is set, the [M] and [S] image sizes are indicated with [ ].
[Picture Size]
[Aspect
Ratio]
[Picture Size]
When using full-frame lenses When using APS-C lenses
[4:3]
[L] (21.5M) 5328k4000 [L] (9.5M) 3536k2656
[M] (10.5M) 3792k2848 [M] (5M) 2560k1920
[S] (5.5M) 2688k2016 [S] (2.5M) 1840k1376
[3:2]
[L] (24M) 6000k4000 [L] (10.5M) 3984k2656
[M] (12M) 4272k2848 [M] (5.5M) 2880k1920
[S] (6M) 3024k2016 [S] (3M) 2064k1376
[16:9]
[L] (20M) 6000k3368 [L] (9M) 3984k2240
[M] (10M) 4272k2400 [M] (4.5M) 2880k1624
[S] (5M) 3024k1704 [S] (2M) 1920k1080
[1:1]
[L] (16M) 4000k4000 [L] (7M) 2656k2656
[M] (8M) 2848k2848 [M] (3.5M) 1920k1920
[S] (4M) 2016k2016 [S] (2M) 1376k1376
[65:24] [L] (13M) 6000k2208 s
[2:1] [L] (18M) 6000k3000 s
0
When the following functions are being used, [Picture Size] is not available:
– [6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
– [RAW] ([Picture Quality])
– [High Resolution Mode]
– [Multiple Exposure]
4. Image Recording
86
Set the compression rate used for storing pictures.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Picture Quality]
[Picture Quality]
Setting File format Settings details
[FINE]
JPEG
JPEG images that give priority to image quality.
[STD.]
JPEG images of standard image quality.
This is useful for increasing the number of
recordable pictures without changing the picture
size.
[RAWiFINE]
RAWiJPEG
This records RAW and JPEG images ([FINE] or
[STD.]) simultaneously.
[RAWiSTD.]
[RAW] RAW This records RAW images.
4. Image Recording
87
Note on RAW
RAW format refers to a data format of images that have not been processed on
the camera.
Playback and editing of RAW images require the camera or the dedicated
software.
0
You can process RAW images on the camera. (l 312)
0
Use software (“SILKYPIX Developer Studio” by Ichikawa Soft Laboratory) to
process and edit RAW files on a PC. (l 482)
0
Pictures taken with [RAW] cannot be displayed enlarged to the maximum
magnification during playback.
Take pictures with [RAWiFINE] or [RAWiSTD.] if you want to check their
focus on the camera after recording.
0
RAW images are always recorded in the [L] size of the [3:2] aspect ratio.
0
When you delete an image recorded with [RAWiFINE] or [RAWiSTD.] on
the camera, both the RAW and JPEG images will be deleted simultaneously.
0
When the following functions are being used, [Picture Quality] is not available:
– [6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
– [High Resolution Mode]
– [Multiple Exposure]
4. Image Recording
88
This sets the way recording to the card slots 1 and 2 is performed.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Double Card Slot Function]
[Double Card Slot Function]
[Recording
Method]
[Relay Rec]
Selects the priority of card slots for recording.
[Destination Card Slot]: [ ]/[ ]
Relays recording to the card in the other card
slot after the first card runs out of free space.
[Backup
Rec]
Records the same images to both cards
simultaneously.
[Allocation
Rec]
Allows you to specify the card slot to be used for
recording for different image formats.
[JPEG/HLG Photo Destn.]/[RAW Destination]/
[6K/4K Photo Destination]/[Video
Destination]
Notes about Backup Recording
0
We recommend using cards with the same Speed Class rating and capacity.
If the card Speed Class or capacity is insufficient when video recording,
recording to both cards stops.
0
When using the following combinations of cards, backup recording for videos,
6K/4K photos, and [Post-Focus] are not available:
– SD/SDHC memory card, and SDXC memory card
4. Image Recording
89
Set the folder and file name where to save the images.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Folder / File Settings]
¢ When [Double Card Slot Function] is set to [Allocation Rec], [Select Folder (Slot 1)]
and [Select Folder (Slot 2)] will be displayed.
0
Follow the steps on page 415 when the character entry screen is displayed.
Available characters: alphabetic characters (upper-case), numerals, [ _ ]
[Folder / File Settings]
Folder name File name
1 Folder number (3 digits, 100 to 999) 3
Color space
([P]: sRGB, [ _ ]: AdobeRGB)
2 5-character user-defined segment 4 3-character user-defined segment
5 File number (4 digits, 0001 to 9999)
6 Extension
[Select
Folder]
¢
Selects a folder for storing images.
[Create a New
Folder]
Creates a new folder with an incremented folder number.
0
If there are no recordable folders in the card, a screen for
resetting the folder number is displayed.
[OK]
Increments the folder number without changing the
5-character user-defined segment (2 above).
[Change]
Changes the 5-character user-defined segment
(2 above). This will also increment the folder number.
[File Name
Setting]
[Folder
Number
Link]
Uses the 3-character user-defined segment
(4 above) to set the folder number (1 above).
[User
Setting]
Changes the 3-character user-defined segment
(4 above).
100ABCDE
PABC0001.JPG
4. Image Recording
90
0
Each folder can store up to 1000 files.
0
File numbers are assigned sequentially from 0001 to 9999 in the order of
recording.
If you change the storage folder, a number continuing on from the last file
number will be assigned.
0
In the following cases, a new folder with an incremented folder number will be
created automatically when the next file is saved:
– The number of files in the current folder reaches 1000.
– The file number reaches 9999.
0
New folders cannot be created when there are folders numbered from 100 all
the way up to 999.
We recommend backing up your data and formatting the card.
0
[Select Folder] is not available when [Backup Rec] in [Double Card Slot
Function] is being used.
4. Image Recording
91
Refresh the folder number to reset the file number to 0001.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [File Number Reset]
Settings: [Card Slot 1]/[Card Slot 2]
[File Number Reset]
0
When the folder number reaches 999, the file number cannot be reset.
We recommend backing up your data and formatting the card.
0
To reset the folder number to 100:
1 Perform [Card Format] to format the card. (l 48)
2 Perform [File Number Reset] to reset the file number.
3 Select [Yes] on the folder number reset screen.
92
5.
Focus/Zoom
Smoother focusing is possible by selecting the focus mode and AF mode
most suited to the recording conditions and the subject.
It is also possible to customize the AF tracking features with [AFC].
Select the focus mode.
[AFS]
l 93
[AFC]
0
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)] (l 98)
[MF] l 120
Select the AF mode.
These focus on the subject the
camera automatically selected.
l 100
These focus on the specified AF
area.
This keeps tracking and focusing
on subject.
Move the position of the AF area.
Joystick l 115
Touch operation l 116
Touch pad l 118
AFS
AFC
ヤヒ
ヤビ
ヤピ
AFS
AFC
AFS
AFC
5. Focus/Zoom
93
Select the focusing method (focus mode) to match subject movement.
Set the focus mode lever.
Selecting the Focus Mode
[S]
([AFS])
This is suitable for recording still subjects.
When the shutter button is pressed halfway, the camera focuses
once.
The focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
[C]
([AFC])
This is suitable for recording moving subjects.
While the shutter button is pressed halfway, the focus is constantly
adjusted according to the movement of the subject.
0
This predicts the movement of the subject, maintaining focusing.
(Movement prediction)
[MF]
Manual focusing. Use this when you want to fix the focus or avoid
activating AF. (l 120)
0
In the following cases, [AFC] works the same as [AFS] when the shutter
button is pressed halfway:
– [ ] mode
– [S&Q] mode
– In low light situations
0
When the following functions are being used, [AFC] switches to [AFS]:
– [65:24]/[2:1] ([Aspect Ratio])
– [High Resolution Mode]
0
This function is not available for Post-Focus recording.
5. Focus/Zoom
94
AF (Auto Focus) refers to automatic focusing.
Select the focus mode and the AF mode appropriate for the subject and
scene.
1
Set the focus mode to [S] or
[C].
≥Set the focus mode lever. (l 93)
2
Select the AF mode.
≥Press [ ] to display the AF mode
selection screen, and set using
or . (l 100)
≥Selection is also possible by
pressing [ ].
0
In [iA] mode, each press of [ ] switches between [ ] and [ ]. (l 79)
3
Press the shutter button
halfway.
≥The AF operates.
Using AF
5. Focus/Zoom
95
Low illumination AF
0
In dark environments, low illumination AF automatically operates, and the focus icon
is indicated as [ ].
0
Achieving focus may take more time than usual.
Starlight AF
0
If the camera detects stars in the night sky after determining low illumination AF, then
Starlight AF will be activated.
When focus is achieved, the focus icon will display [ ], and the AF area will be
displayed on the area in focus.
0
Edges of the screen cannot detect Starlight AF.
[AF ON] button
You can also activate AF by pressing [AF ON].
Focus
In focus Not in focus
Focus icon A Lights Blinking
AF area B Green Red
AF beep Two beeps —
LOW
STAR
5. Focus/Zoom
96
Subjects and recording conditions that make focusing difficult with AF
mode
– Fast-moving subjects
– Extremely bright subjects
– Subjects without contrast
– Subjects recorded through windows
– Subjects near shiny objects
– Subjects in very dark locations
– When recording subjects both distant and near
0
You can change the operation of AF-ON so that AF prioritizes subjects close
by.
This function is useful when the camera mistakenly focuses on the
background:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Fn Button Set] ¨ [Setting in REC mode] ¨ [AF-ON : Near
Shift] (l 321)
0
You can change the operation of AF-ON so that AF prioritizes subjects far
away.
This function is useful when taking pictures through fences or nets:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Fn Button Set] ¨ [Setting in REC mode] ¨ [AF-ON : Far
Shift] (l 321)
0
When the following operations are performed while recording with [AFC], it
may take some time for the camera to focus:
– When zooming from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end
– When the subject is suddenly changed from one far away to one close by
0
If using the zoom after achieving focus, the focus may be erroneous. In that
case, re-adjust the focus.
0
When camera shake reduces, it is possible to focus automatically:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Quick AF] (l 376)
0
You can change the settings so that AF does not function when the shutter
button is pressed halfway:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Half-Press Shutter] (l 376)
0
The AF beep volume and sound can be changed:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Beep] ¨ [AF Beep Volume]/[AF Beep Tone] (l 399)
5. Focus/Zoom
97
Magnify the AF Area Position ([AF-Point Scope])
This magnifies the focus point when the AF mode is [ ], [ ], or [ ]. (In
other AF modes, the center of the screen is magnified.)
You can check focus and observe an enlarged subject as with a telephoto
lens.
1
Register [AF-Point Scope] to the Fn button. (l 321)
2
Enlarge the AF area position by pressing and holding the Fn button.
0
When the screen is enlarged, pressing the
shutter button halfway re-acquires focus in
a small central AF area.
0
When the screen is enlarged, turn or
to adjust the magnification.
Use for more detailed adjustments.
0
When the screen is enlarged, [AFC] changes to [AFS].
0
When the following functions are being used, AF-Point Scope does not work:
– [Post-Focus]
– [6K/4K Pre-Burst]
– [65:24]/[2:1] ([Aspect Ratio])
– [Miniature Effect] ([Filter Settings])
– [Multiple Exposure]
– [Live Cropping]
0
You can change the display method of the magnified screen:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [AF-Point Scope Setting] (l 376)
5. Focus/Zoom
98
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)]
Select features of AF operation when recording using [AFC] that are
appropriate for the subject and scene.
Each of these features can be further customized.
1
Set the focus mode to [AFC].
(l 93)
2
Set [AF Custom
Setting(Photo)].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [AF Custom
Setting(Photo)]
[Set 1] Basic general-purpose setting.
[Set 2]
Suggested for situations where the subject moves at a constant
speed in one direction.
[Set 3]
Suggested when the subject moves randomly, and other objects
may be in the scene.
[Set 4]
Suggested for situations where the speed of the subject
changes significantly.
0
When the following function is being used, [AF Custom Setting(Photo)] is not
available:
– [6K/4K PHOTO]
5. Focus/Zoom
99
Adjusting AF Custom Settings
1
Press 21 to select the AF Custom setting type.
2
Press 34 to select items and press 21 to adjust.
0
To reset settings to the default, press [DISP.].
3
Press or .
[AF Sensitivity]
Sets the tracking sensitivity for the movement of subjects.
[i]
When the distance to the subject changes drastically, the
camera re-adjusts the focus immediately. You can bring
different subjects into focus one after another.
[j]
When the distance to the subject changes drastically, the
camera waits for a short period of time before
re-adjusting the focus. This allows you to prevent the
focus from being accidentally re-adjusted when, for
example, an object moves across the image.
[AF Area
Switching
Sensitivity]
Sets the sensitivity for switching the AF area to match subject
movement.
(When in an AF mode where the AF area uses 225-area
focusing)
[i]
When the subject moves out of the AF area, the camera
immediately switches the AF area to keep the subject in
focus.
[j]
The camera switches the AF area at a gradual pace.
Effects caused by a slight movement of the subject or by
obstacles in front of the camera will be minimized.
[Moving Subject
Prediction]
Sets the level of movement prediction for changes in the speed
of subject movement.
0
At larger setting values, the camera tries to maintain focus by
responding even to sudden movements of the subject.
However, the camera becomes more sensitive to slight
movements of the subject, so focusing may become unstable.
[0] This is suited to a subject with minimal changes in speed.
[i1]
These are suited to a subject that changes its speed.
[i2]
5. Focus/Zoom
100
Select the focusing method to match the position and number of subjects.
1
Press [ ].
≥The AF mode selection screen
appears.
2
Select the AF mode.
≥Press 21 to select an item and
then press or .
≥Selection is also possible by
pressing [ ].
¢ This is not displayed with the default settings. From [Show/Hide AF Mode] in
the [Custom] ([Focus/Shutter]) menu, you can set the items to display on the
selection screen. (l 375)
Selecting the AF Mode
[Face/Eye/Body/
Animal Detect.]
l 102
[Tracking] l 105
[225-Area] l 107
[Zone (Vert./ Horz.)] l 108
[Zone (Square)]
¢
l 108
[Zone (Oval)] l 108
[1-Area+] l 110
[1-Area] l 110
[Pinpoint] l 111
[Custom1]
¢
,
[Custom2]
¢
,
[Custom3]
¢
l 113
ヤヒ
ヤビ
ヤピ
5. Focus/Zoom
101
0
When the following functions are being used, [ ] is not available:
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Live View Composite]
0
When the focus mode is set to [AFC], [ ] is not available.
0
When the following function is being used, the AF mode is fixed to [ ] (face
detection):
– [Live Cropping]
0
When the following functions are being used, the AF mode is fixed to [ ]:
– [65:24]/[2:1] ([Aspect Ratio])
– [Miniature Effect] ([Filter Settings])
0
The AF mode cannot be set when using Post-Focus.
5. Focus/Zoom
102
[Face/Eye/Body/Animal Detect.]
The camera detects a person’s face, eyes, and body (entire body or upper
half of the body) and adjusts the focus.
When animal detection is enabled, animals, such as birds, canines
(including wolves), and felines (including lions) will also be detected.
When the camera detects a person’s face
A/B or body or an animal’s body C, an AF
area is displayed.
0
Eye detection works only for the eyes inside the
yellow frame
A
.
Yellow
AF area to be brought into focus.
The camera selects this
automatically.
White
Displayed when multiple subjects
are detected.
0
When a person’s eyes are detected, the eye closer to the camera will be
brought into focus.
The exposure will be adjusted to the face. (When [Metering Mode] is set to
[])
0
The camera can detect the faces of up to 15 people.
0
The camera can detect a combined total of up to 3 human and animal bodies.
0
If any humans or animals are not detected, the camera operates as [ ].
5. Focus/Zoom
103
Enable/Disable Animal Detection
1
Press [ ] to display the AF mode selection screen.
2
Select [ ] and then press 3.
0
This enables animal detection, and the icon changes to [ ].
0
Press 3 again to disable animal detection.
Specify the Person, Animal, or Eye to Bring into Focus
When the person or animal to be brought into focus is shown using the
white AF area, you can change this to a yellow AF area.
≥ Touch operation
Touch the person, animal or eye indicated
with the white AF area.
0
The AF area will change to yellow.
0
Touching outside the AF area displays the AF
area setting screen. Touch [Set] to set the [ ]
AF area at the position touched.
0
To cancel the setting, touch [ ].
≥ Button operation
Press .
0
Each press of switches the person, animal or eye to be brought into focus.
0
To cancel the settings specified, press .
5. Focus/Zoom
104
Move and Change the Size of the Yellow AF Area
You can move the yellow AF area to the position of the white AF area and
replace the white AF area with the yellow AF area.
If moving to a position outside an AF area, then the [ ] AF area will be
set.
1
Press [ ] to display the AF mode selection screen.
2
Select [ ] or [ ] and then press 4.
3
Press 3421 to move the position of
the AF area.
4
Rotate , or to change the
size of the AF area.
5
Press .
0
On the recording screen, press , or
touch [ ] to cancel the AF area setting.
Operations on the AF area movement screen
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
3421 Touch Moves the AF area.
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges/reduces the AF area in small steps.
/ s Enlarges/reduces the AF area.
[DISP.] [Reset]
First time: Returns the AF area position to the
center.
Second time: Returns the AF area size to the
default setting.
5. Focus/Zoom
105
[Tracking]
When the focus mode is set to [AFC], the AF area follows the movement of
the subject, maintaining focusing.
Start tracking.
≥ Aim the AF area over the subject, and
press the shutter button halfway.
The camera will track the subject while
the shutter button is pressed halfway or
pressed fully.
0
If tracking fails, the AF area blinks red.
0
When set to [AFS], the focus will be on the AF area position. Tracking will not work.
0
In [ ]/[S&Q] mode, while recording video, and while recording with [6K/4K
Burst(S/S)], tracking will continue even if the shutter button is released.
To cancel tracking, press or , or touch [ ].
Tracking is also available with [AFS].
0
Set [Metering Mode] to [ ] to continue to adjust the exposure as well.
0
In the following, [ ] operates as [Ø]:
– [Monochrome]/[L.Monochrome]/[L.Monochrome D]/[Monochrome(HLG)]
([Photo Style])
– [Sepia]/[Monochrome]/[Dynamic Monochrome]/[Rough Monochrome]/[Silky
Monochrome]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/[Sunshine] ([Filter Settings])
5. Focus/Zoom
106
Move the Position of the AF Area
1
Press [ ] to display the AF mode selection screen.
2
Select [ ] and then press 4.
3
Press 3421 to move the position of the AF area.
0
You can also move the AF area by touching.
0
To return the position back to the center, press [DISP.].
4
Press .
5. Focus/Zoom
107
[225-Area]
The camera selects the most optimal AF
area to focus from 225 areas.
When multiple AF areas are selected, all
selected AF areas will be brought into
focus.
When the focus mode is set to [AFC],
ensuring that the subject stays within the
225 areas during recording will ensure the subject stays in focus.
Specify the [AFC] Start Point
When the focus mode is set to [AFC], you can specify at which area to start
[AFC].
1
Set the focus mode to [AFC]. (l 93)
2
Set [AFC Start Point (225-Area)] to [ON].
0
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [AFC Start Point (225-Area)] ¨ [ON]
3
Press [ ] to display the AF mode selection screen.
4
Select [ ] and then press 4.
0
After performing Steps 1 and 2, the icon changes from [ ] to [ ].
5
Press 3421 to move the AF area to the start point.
0
You can also move the AF area by touching.
0
To return the position back to the center, press [DISP.].
6
Press .
5. Focus/Zoom
108
[Zone (Vert./ Horz.)]/ [Zone (Square)]/ [Zone
(Oval)]
[Zone (Vert./ Horz.)]
Within the 225 AF areas, vertical and horizontal zones can be focused.
[Zone (Square)]
Within the 225 AF areas, a central square
zone can be focused.
[Zone (Oval)]
Within the 225 AF areas, a central oval
zone can be focused.
Horizontal pattern Vertical pattern
0
[ ] is not displayed with default settings. Set [Zone (Square)] to [ON] in
[Show/Hide AF Mode] in the [Custom] ([Focus/Shutter]) menu. (l 375)
5. Focus/Zoom
109
Move and Change the Size of the AF Area
1
Press [ ] to display the AF mode selection screen.
2
Select [ ], [ ] or [ ] and then press 4.
3
Press 3421 to move the position of
the AF area.
0
You can also move the AF area by
touching.
≥When [ ] is selected
– Press 34 to switch to a horizontal
pattern AF area.
– Press 21 to switch to a vertical pattern AF area.
4
Rotate , or to change the size of the AF area.
0
You can also pinch out/pinch in the AF area to change the size.
0
The first press of [DISP.] returns the AF area position to the center. The second
press returns the size of the AF area to the default.
5
Press .
0
The display method for the AF area using 225-area focusing can be changed:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [AF Area Display] (l 385)
5. Focus/Zoom
110
[1-Area+]/ [1-Area]
[1-Area+]
Emphasis within a single AF area can be
focused.
Even when the subject moves out of the
single AF area, the subject remains focused
in a supplementary AF area (A).
0
Effective when recording moving subjects that
are difficult to track with [ ].
[1-Area]
Specify the point to be brought into focus.
5. Focus/Zoom
111
Move and Change the Size of the AF Area
1
Press [ ] to display the AF mode selection screen.
2
Select [ ] or [ ] and then press 4.
3
Press 3421 to move the position of
the AF area.
4
Rotate , or to change the
size of the AF area.
5
Press .
[Pinpoint]
You can achieve a more precise focus on a
small point.
If you press the shutter button halfway, the
screen that lets you check the focus will be
enlarged.
0
Refer to “Operations on the AF area movement screen” on page 104 for
information about detailed operations to move the AF area.
0
Change the movement speed of a single AF area:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [1-Area AF Moving Speed] (l 356)
0
When the focus mode is set to [AFC], [ ] is not available.
5. Focus/Zoom
112
Move the Position of the AF Area
1
Press [ ] to display the AF mode selection screen.
2
Select [ ] and then press 4.
3
Press 3421 to set the position of [i] and then press or .
0
The selected position on the screen will be enlarged.
0
The AF area cannot be moved to the edge of the screen.
4
Press 3421 to fine-adjust the
position of [i].
5
Press or .
Operations on the Magnification Window
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
3421 Touch Moves [i].
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.
s Enlarges/reduces the screen.
Switches magnification window (windowed
mode/full screen mode).
[DISP.] [Reset]
First time: Returns to the screen in Step
3
.
Second time: Returns the AF area position to
the center.
5. Focus/Zoom
113
0
When the picture is displayed in windowed mode, you can enlarge the picture by
approx. 3k to 6k; when the picture is displayed in full screen, you can enlarge the
picture by approx. 3k to 10k.
0
You can also take a picture by touching [ ].
[Custom1] to [Custom3]
The shape of the AF area can be set freely in the 225 AF areas.
The set AF area can be registered using [ ] to [ ].
The AF area can also be moved while maintaining the set shape.
Register the AF Area Shape
1
Press [ ] to display the AF mode selection screen.
2
Select one of [ ] to [ ] and then
press 3.
0
When the following functions are being used, [ ] switches to [Ø]:
– Video recording/[6K/4K PHOTO]
0
You can change the display method of the magnified screen:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Pinpoint AF Setting] (l 375)
0
This is not displayed with default settings. In [Show/Hide AF Mode] in the
[Custom] ([Focus/Shutter]) menu, set [Custom1] to [Custom3] to [ON].
(l 375)
ヤヒ
ヤビ
ヤピ
ヤヒ ヤピ
ヤヒ ヤビ ヤピ
ヤヒ
ヤピ
5. Focus/Zoom
114
3
Select the AF area.
≥Touch operation
Touch the area to make the AF area.
0
To select consecutive points, drag the
screen.
0
To cancel selection of the selected AF
area, touch it again.
≥Button operation
Press 3421 to select the AF area and then set with or .
(Repeat this)
0
To cancel selection of the selected AF area, press or again.
0
To cancel all selections, press [DISP.].
4
Press [Q].
Move the Position of the AF Area
1
Press [ ] to display the AF mode selection screen.
2
Select a registered AF mode shape ([ ] to [ ]) and then press 4.
3
Press 3421 to move the position of the AF area and then press
.
0
Press [DISP.] to return the [i] position to the center.
ヤヒ
ヤピ
5. Focus/Zoom
115
In default settings, you can use the joystick to directly move and change
the size of the AF area when recording.
1
Move the position of the AF
area.
≥On the recording screen, tilt the
joystick.
0
Pressing enables switching
between the default and set AF area
positions.
In [ ]/[ ], this operation switches the
person, animal or eye to be brought into
focus.
In [ ], this operation displays the
enlarged screen.
2
Change the size of the AF
area.
≥Rotate , or .
0
Use for more detailed adjustments.
0
The first press of [DISP.] returns the AF
area position to the center. The second
press returns the size of the AF area to
the default.
AF Area Movement Operation
5. Focus/Zoom
116
3
Confirm your selection.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
≥This will return you to the recording
screen.
Moving the AF Area by Touch
You can move the AF area to a touched position on the monitor.
You can also change the size of the AF area.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Touch Settings] ¨
Select [Touch AF]
0
The default setting is [AF].
0
When [Metering Mode] is [ ], the metering target also moves together with
the AF area.
0
In [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] to [ ], the size of the AF area cannot be
changed.
0
In [ ], it is not possible to move the AF area or change its size.
0
In the [iA] mode, the [ ]/[ ] AF area cannot be moved.
0
You can set the AF area to loop when moved:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Looped Focus Frame] (l 377)
[AF]
This focuses on the touched
subject.
[AF+AE]
This focuses on and adjusts
brightness for the touched subject.
ヤヒ
ヤピ
5. Focus/Zoom
117
Focus on the Touched Position ([AF])
1
Touch the subject.
0
The AF area moves to the touched position.
2
Pinch out/pinch in to change the AF area size.
0
The first touch of [Reset] returns the AF area position to the center.
The second touch returns the size of the AF area to the default.
3
Touch [Set].
0
In [ ], touch [Exit].
0
For [ ]/[ ], the AF area setting is canceled if you touch [ ] on the
recording screen.
Focus on and Adjust Brightness for the Touched Position
([AF+AE])
1
Touch the subject to which you wish to
adjust the brightness.
0
At the touched position, an AF area that
works in the same way as [Ø] is
displayed.
This places a point to adjust brightness at
the center of the AF area.
2
Pinch out/pinch in to change the AF
area size.
0
The first touch of [Reset] returns the AF area position to the center. The second
touch returns the size of the AF area to the default.
3
Touch [Set].
0
The [AF+AE] area setting is canceled if you touch [ ] (when [ ] or [Ø] is
set: [ ]) on the recording screen.
6HW
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW
5. Focus/Zoom
118
Moving the AF Area Position with the Touch Pad
During viewfinder display, you can touch the monitor to change the position
and size of the AF area.
1
Set [Touch Pad AF].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Touch
Settings] ¨ [Touch Pad AF] ¨
[EXACT]/[OFFSET1] to [OFFSET7]
2
Move the position of the AF
area.
≥During viewfinder display, touch the
monitor.
3
Change the size of the AF
area.
≥Rotate , or .
0
Use for more detailed adjustments.
0
The first press of [DISP.] returns the AF
area position to the center. The second
press returns the size of the AF area to
the default.
4
Confirm your selection.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
5. Focus/Zoom
119
Setting Items ([Touch Pad AF])
[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]
Memorizes separate positions for AF areas
for when the camera is vertically aligned and
for when it is horizontally aligned.
Two vertical orientations, left and right, are
available.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]
[EXACT]
Moves the AF area of
the viewfinder by
touching a desired
position on the touch
pad.
[OFFSET1]
to
[OFFSET7]
Moves the AF area of
the viewfinder
according to the
distance you drag
your finger on the
touch pad.
Select the range to be detected with the drag operation.
[OFFSET1] (entire area)/[OFFSET2] (right half)/[OFFSET3] (upper
right)/[OFFSET4] (lower right)/[OFFSET5] (left half)/[OFFSET6]
(upper left)/[OFFSET7] (lower left)
[OFF] —
[ON] Memorizes separate positions for vertical and horizontal orientations.
[OFF] Sets the same position for vertical and horizontal orientations.
0
In MF, this memorizes the MF Assist position.
0
This does not work in the [ ] and [ ] to [ ] AF modes.
ヤヒ
ヤピ
5. Focus/Zoom
120
MF (Manual Focus) refers to manual focusing.
Use this function when you want to fix the focus or when the distance
between the lens and the subject is determined and you do not want to
activate AF.
1
Set the focus mode lever to
[MF].
2
Select the focus point.
≥Tilt the joystick to select the focus
point.
0
To return the point to be brought into
focus to the center, press [DISP.].
3
Confirm your selection.
≥Press .
≥This switches to the MF Assist
screen, and shows an enlarged
display.
Record Using MF
5. Focus/Zoom
121
4
Adjust the focus.
≥Rotate the focus ring.
A MF Assist (enlarged screen)
0
This will display the in-focus portion
highlighted with color. (Focus Peaking B)
0
A recording distance guideline is
displayed. (MF Guide C)
D Indicator for (infinity)
5
Close the MF Assist screen.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
≥This operation can also be
performed by pressing .
6
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
AF
∞
10(m) 5 3 2 1.5 1 0.5 0.1
5. Focus/Zoom
122
Operations on the MF Assist Screen
0
When the picture is displayed in windowed mode, you can enlarge the picture by
approx. 3k to 6k; when the picture is displayed in full screen, you can enlarge the
picture by approx. 3k to 20k.
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
3421 Drag Moves the enlarged display position.
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.
s Enlarges/reduces the screen.
Switches magnification window (windowed
mode/full screen mode).
[DISP.] [Reset]
First time: Returns the MF Assist position to the
center.
Second time: Returns the MF Assist
magnification to the default setting.
[AF ON] The AF operates.
AF
5. Focus/Zoom
123
0
On the recording screen, you can rotate the focus ring to display the MF Assist
screen. If the focus ring has been rotated to enlarge the display, the assist
screen will be exited a short time after you cease the operation.
0
You can also display the MF Assist screen by pressing the [ ].
0
During MF, pressing [AF ON] will activate AF.
0
The recording distance reference mark indicates the
position of the imaging surface. This becomes the
reference when measuring the recording distance.
0
You can change the Focus Peaking sensitivity and the display method:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Focus Peaking] (l 356)
0
You can memorize the MF Assist position separately for vertical and horizontal
orientations:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor] (l 119)
0
You can change the display method of the magnified screen:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [MF Assist] (l 374)
0
You can change the MF Guide display units:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [MF Guide] (l 374)
0
You can disable focus ring operation:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Focus Ring Lock] (l 374)
0
You can set the movement of the MF Assist position to loop:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Looped Focus Frame] (l 377)
0
The camera memorizes the focus point when you turn it off:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Lens Focus Resume] (l 394)
0
The amount of focus movement can be set:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Focus Ring Control] (l 394)
5. Focus/Zoom
124
Use the optical zoom of the lens to zoom to telephoto or wide-angle.
When taking pictures, use [Ex. Tele Conv.] to increase a telescopic effect
without image deterioration.
When recording videos, use [Image Area of Video] to obtain the same
telescopic effect as [Ex. Tele Conv.].
0
For details about [Image Area of Video], refer to page 249.
Rotate the zoom ring.
≥ Rotating the zoom ring displays the focal
length on the recording screen.
Recording with Zoom
T: Telephoto
W: Wide-angle
0
The focal length display can be hidden:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Focal Length] (l 388)
35mm
5. Focus/Zoom
125
Extended Tele Conversion
[Ex. Tele Conv.] enables you to take pictures that are further enlarged
beyond what is available with the optical zoom, without any deterioration in
image quality.
0
The [Ex. Tele Conv.] maximum magnification ratio differs depending on the [Picture
Size] set in the [Photo] ([Image Quality]) menu.
– Set to [ M]: 1.4k
– Set to [ S]: 2.0k (1.9k when using APS-C lenses)
1
Set [Picture Size] to [M] or [S].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Picture Size] ¨ [M]/[S]
2
Set [Ex. Tele Conv.].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Ex. Tele Conv.]
[ZOOM] Changes the zoom magnification.
[TELE CONV.] Fixes the zoom magnification at the maximum.
[OFF] s
5. Focus/Zoom
126
Changing the Zoom Magnification
Button operation
1
Set [Ex. Tele Conv.] to [ZOOM].
0
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Ex. Tele Conv.] ¨ [ZOOM]
2
Set the Fn button to [Zoom Control]. (l 321)
3
Press the Fn button.
4
Press the cursor buttons to operate the
zoom.
0
Press the Fn button again, or wait a
specified time to end zoom operation.
A Zoom magnification
Touch operation
1
Set [Ex. Tele Conv.] to [ZOOM].
0
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Ex. Tele Conv.] ¨ [ZOOM]
2
To uc h [ ].
3
To uc h [ ].
31: T (telephoto)
24: W (wide-angle)
0
With the default settings, the Touch Tab is not displayed.
Set [Touch Tab] to [ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation])
menu. (l 377)
EX1.8x
S
EX
AF
5. Focus/Zoom
127
4
Drag the slide bar to operate the
zoom.
0
To end Touch Zoom operations, touch
[ ] again.
T: Telephoto
W: Wide-angle
0
When displaying the [Ex. Tele Conv.] setting screen using the Fn button,
pressing [DISP.] allows you to change the [Picture Size] setting.
0
When the following functions are being used, [Ex. Tele Conv.] is not available:
– [6K/4K PHOTO]
– [65:24]/[2:1] ([Aspect Ratio])
– [RAW] ([Picture Quality])
– [HLG Photo]
– [High Resolution Mode]
– [Toy Effect]/[Toy Pop] ([Filter Settings])
– [Post-Focus]
– [Multiple Exposure]
128
6.
Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
You can switch the drive mode to Single, Burst, etc. to match the recording
conditions.
Rotating the drive mode dial.
Selecting the Drive Mode
[] Single
Takes one picture each time the shutter button is
pressed.
[]/[]
Burst
(l 129, 133)
Takes pictures continuously while the shutter
button is pressed and held.
6K/4K photo recording is also possible.
[]
Time Lapse
Shot/
Stop Motion
Animation
(l 145, 149)
Takes pictures with Time Lapse Shot or Stop
Motion Animation.
[]
Self-timer
(l 154)
Takes pictures when the set time elapses after
the shutter button is pressed.
0
The detailed setting screens for each drive mode can be called up with an Fn
button:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Fn Button Set] ¨ [Setting in REC mode] ¨ [Drive Mode]
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
129
Takes pictures continuously while the shutter button is pressed and held.
You can choose a burst setting which enables burst recording in high
image quality, [H], [M] or [L], or one which enables high-speed burst
recording, [ ] (6K/4K photo), to suit the recording conditions.
1
Set the drive mode dial to [ ]
(Burst Shot 1) or [ ] (Burst
Shot 2).
0
Configure the burst settings for each of
[ ] and [ ].
2
Select the burst rate.
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Burst Shot
1 Setting]/[Burst Shot 2 Setting]
0
With the default settings, [H] is set for
[ ] and [ ] is set for [ ].
3
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
4
Start recording.
0
Takes burst pictures while the shutter
button is pressed fully.
Taking Burst Pictures
[]
For information about 6K/4K photo recording, refer to “6K/4K Photo
Recording”. (l 133)
[H] Takes high-speed burst pictures.
[M] Takes medium-speed burst pictures.
[L] Takes low-speed burst pictures.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
130
Burst Rate
0
The burst rate may be lower depending on the settings for recording such as [Picture
Size] and focus mode.
Maximum Number of Frames Recordable
0
When recording under the test conditions specified by Panasonic. (Using a card in
card slot 1 compatible with UHS-
II
)
Recording conditions may reduce the maximum number of frames recordable.
0
The burst rate will become lower during recording but pictures can continue to be
taken until the card becomes full.
Mechanical
shutter, electronic
front curtain
Electronic shutter
Live View when
taking burst
pictures
[H]
(High speed)
7 frames/second
([AFS]/[MF])
5 frames/second
([AFC])
7 frames/second
([AFS]/[MF])
5 frames/second
([AFC])
None ([AFS]/[MF])
Available ([AFC])
[M]
(Medium speed)
5 frames/second 5 frames/second Available
[L]
(Low speed)
2 frames/second 2 frames/second Available
[Picture Quality]
[FINE]/[STD.] [RAWiFINE]/[RAWiSTD.]/[RAW]
[H]
(High speed)
999 frames or more 24 frames or more
[M]
(Medium speed)
[L]
(Low speed)
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
131
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken Continuously
When you press the shutter button halfway,
the number of pictures that can be taken
continuously will appear on the recording
screen.
Example) When 20 frames: [r20]
0
Once recording starts, the number of pictures that can be taken continuously will
decrease.
When [r0] appears, the burst rate decreases.
0
When [r99i] is displayed on the recording screen, you can take 100 or more burst
pictures.
Focus when Taking Burst Pictures
0
When the subject is dark with [AFC], the focus is fixed to that of the first frame.
0
With estimated focus, the burst rate takes priority and the focus is estimated to the
extent possible.
0
With normal focus, the burst rate may become slow.
Focus mode
[Focus/Shutter
Priority] (l 373)
[H] [M]/[L]
[AFS]
[FOCUS]
Fixed to the focus of the first frame
[BALANCE]
[RELEASE]
[AFC]
[FOCUS] Estimated focus Normal focus
[BALANCE]
Estimated focus
[RELEASE]
[MF] — Focus set with manual focus
r20
ISO
100
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
132
Exposure when Taking Burst Pictures
Focus mode [H] [M]/[L]
[AFS]
Fixed to the exposure of
the first frame
The exposure is adjusted
for each frame
[AFC]
The exposure is adjusted
for each frame
[MF]
Fixed to the exposure of
the first frame
0
It may take a while to save burst pictures.
If you continue to take burst pictures while saving is in progress, the maximum
number of frames recordable will be reduced.
When taking burst pictures, we recommend using a high-speed card.
0
Taking burst pictures does not work while you are using the following
functions:
– [High Resolution Mode]
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Miniature Effect]/[Soft Focus]/
[Star Filter]/[Sunshine] ([Filter Settings])
– [Live View Composite]
– [Post-Focus]
– [Multiple Exposure]
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
133
With 6K Photo, you can take high-speed burst pictures at 30 frames/
second and save the desired pictures, each made up of approx. 18 million
pixels, extracted from their burst file.
With 4K photo, you can take high-speed burst pictures at 60 frames/
second and save the desired pictures, each made up of approx. 8 million
pixels.
0
“6K PHOTO” is a high-speed burst picture function to extract and save the desired
pictures from images with an aspect ratio for pictures of 4:3 or 3:2 and an effective
picture size equivalent to the number of pixels (approx. 18 megapixels) for images of
6K size (around 6,000 widek3,000 high).
1
Set the drive mode dial to [ ]
(Burst Shot 1) or [ ] (Burst
Shot 2).
0
Configure the burst settings for each of
[ ] and [ ].
2
Select [6K/4K PHOTO].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Burst Shot
1 Setting]/[Burst Shot 2 Setting] ¨
[]
0
With the default settings, [ ] is set for
[].
6K/4K Photo Recording
0
Use a UHS Speed Class 3 or higher card when recording.
0
The angle of view becomes narrower (when using a full-frame lens).
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
134
3
Select [Picture Size / Burst
Speed].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [6K/4K
PHOTO] ¨ [Picture Size / Burst
Speed]
¢ Saved as 6K/4K burst files whose [Rec. File Format] is [MP4].
4
Select [Rec Method].
Picture size Burst rate [Rec Quality]
¢
[6K 18M]
[4:3]:
[3:2]:
4992k3744
5184k3456
30 frames/
second
[6K/200M/30p]
[4K H 8M]
[4:3]:
[3:2]:
[16:9]:
[1:1]:
3328k2496
3504k2336
3840k2160
2880k2880
60 frames/
second
[4K/150M/60p]
[4K 8M]
30 frames/
second
[4K/100M/30p]
[] [] []
([6K/4K Burst])
When you wish to capture the best moments of
a fast-moving subject
Takes burst pictures while the shutter button is
pressed.
Audio recording: None
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
135
¢ Audio is not played back during playback with the camera.
5
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
6
Start recording.
0
[Continuous AF] works and the focus is
adjusted continuously during recording
with AF.
[6K/4K Burst]
[] [] []
([6K/4K Burst(S/S)])
“S/S” is an abbreviation
for start/stop.
When you wish to capture an unpredictable
photo opportunity
Starts taking burst pictures when the shutter button
is pressed. Pressing the button again stops taking
burst pictures.
The start tone and stop tone are output.
Audio recording: Available
¢
[] [] []
([6K/4K Pre-Burst])
When you wish to capture at the moment of a
photo opportunity
Takes burst pictures for approx. 1 second before
and after the moment the shutter button is pressed.
The shutter sound is output once only.
Recording duration:
Approx. 2 seconds
Audio recording: None
1 Press the shutter button halfway.
2 Press the shutter button fully and keep it
pressed during recording.
A Press and hold
B Recording is performed
0
Press the shutter button fully early because
recording will take approx. 0.5 second to start after it is pressed fully.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
136
[6K/4K Burst(S/S)]
[6K/4K Pre-Burst]
0
In default settings, Auto Review operates, and a screen that lets you select
pictures from a burst file will be displayed.
To continue recording, press the shutter button halfway to return to the
recording screen.
For how to select and save pictures from a recorded 6K/4K burst file, refer to
page 139.
1 Press the shutter button fully to start
recording.
2 Press the shutter button fully again to
stop recording.
C Start (First)
D Stop (Second)
E Recording is performed
0
You can add markers by pressing [Q] during recording. (Up to 40 markers per
recording)
This allows you to skip to the positions where you added markers when
selecting pictures from a 6K/4K burst file.
Press the shutter button fully.
F Approx. 1 second
G Recording is performed
0
While the recording screen is displayed, the
AF will operate constantly to continue
focusing.
The exposure is also adjusted continuously, except in [M] mode.
0
When the subject is not at the center, use AF/AE Lock if you wish to lock the
focus and exposure. (l 198)
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
137
[Pre-Burst Recording] ([6K/4K Burst]/[6K/4K Burst(S/S)])
The camera starts recording approx. 1 second before the shutter button is
pressed fully, so you will not miss a photo opportunity.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [6K/4K PHOTO] ¨ Select [Pre-Burst Recording]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
0
When [Pre-Burst Recording] is being used, [PRE] is displayed on the recording
screen.
0
The AF behavior and functionality restrictions when using [Pre-Burst Recording] are
the same as for [6K/4K Pre-Burst].
0
Setting ranges become the following with 6K/4K photo recording:
– Shutter speed: 1/30 (1/60 when [4K H 8M] is set) to 1/8000
– [Min. Shutter Speed]: [1/500] to [1/30] ([1/60] when [4K H 8M] is set)
– Exposure compensation: n3EV
0
Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 15 minutes.
0
The file save method differs depending on the type of card.
– SDHC memory card:
A new file will be created to continue recording if the file size exceeds 4 GB.
– SDXC memory card:
Files are not divided for recording.
0
If the temperature of the camera rises, [ ] may be displayed, recording may
stop, and some functions may become unavailable temporarily. Wait until the
camera cools down.
0
When [6K/4K Pre-Burst] or [Pre-Burst Recording] is set, the battery drains
faster and the camera temperature rises. Set these settings only when
recording.
0
For 6K/4K photo, the menu items below are fixed to the following settings:
– [Shutter Type]: [ELEC.]
– [Picture Quality]: [FINE]
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
138
0
With 6K/4K photo recording, the following functions are not available:
–Flash
– [Bracketing]
– Program Shift
– AF mode ( )
– [MF Assist] ([6K/4K Pre-Burst] only)
0
When you record in an extremely bright location or under lighting such as
fluorescent or LED lighting, the coloring or brightness of the image may
change or horizontal stripes may appear on the screen.
Lowering the shutter speed may reduce the effect of horizontal stripes.
0
The following functions are restricted when recording 6K/4K photos when
connected to an external device (TV, etc.) via HDMI:
– HDMI output is not possible during recording.
– [6K/4K Pre-Burst] changes to [6K/4K Burst].
– [Pre-Burst Recording] is not available.
0
6K/4K photo recording does not work while you are using the following
functions:
– [High Resolution Mode]
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Miniature Effect]/[Soft Focus]/
[Star Filter]/[Sunshine] ([Filter Settings])
– [Live View Composite]
– [Post-Focus]
– [Multiple Exposure]
0
When using APS-C lenses, 6K photo is not available.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
139
You can select pictures from the 6K/4K burst files and save them.
0 When continuing to select pictures from the Auto Review after recording
6K/4K photos, start the operation from either Step
2
or
3
.
1
Select a 6K/4K burst file on the
playback screen. (l 300)
≥Select an image with the [ ] or
[ ] icon and then press 3.
≥You can also perform the same
operation by touching [ ] or
[].
0
If the images were recorded with [6K/4K Pre-Burst], proceed to Step
3
.
3
Select the frame to save.
≥Drag the picture selection slide view
B.
≥You can also perform the same
operation by pressing 21.
0
To continuously rewind or forward
frame-by-frame, touch and hold [ ]/
[].
Selecting Pictures from a 6K/4K Burst
File
2
Roughly select the scene.
≥Drag the slide bar A.
0
For information about how to use the
picture selection slide view screen, refer
to page 141.
0
If the images were recorded with [6K/4K
Burst] or [6K/4K Burst(S/S)], touching
[ ] allows you to select the scene in
the 6K/4K burst playback screen. (l 143)
Picture selection slide view
screen
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
140
4
Save the picture.
≥Touch [ ] or [ ].
≥A confirmation screen appears.
Correcting Pictures After Recording (Post-Recording
Refinement)
Correcting Distortion in Pictures ([Reduce Rolling
Shutter])
When saving pictures, correct any distortion caused by the electronic
shutter (rolling shutter effect).
1
On the save confirmation screen in Step
4
on page 140, touch
[Reduce Rolling Shutter].
0
If there is no effect even after using correction, after a message is displayed
advising that there is no effect, the confirmation screen returns.
2
Check the correction result and then touch [Save].
0
To check the corrected and uncorrected versions of the picture, touch [Set/
Cancel].
0
The picture is saved in JPEG format ([FINE] picture quality).
0
The recording information (Exif information), such as the shutter speed,
aperture, and ISO sensitivity, is also saved with the picture that is saved.
0
The angle of view may become narrower if correction is performed.
0
The correction may appear unnatural due to the movement of subjects.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
141
Reducing Noise Caused by High Sensitivity ([6K/4K
PHOTO Noise Reduction])
When saving pictures, reduce the noise that occurs due to high ISO
sensitivity.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [6K/4K PHOTO Noise Reduction]
Settings: [AUTO]/[OFF]
Picture Selection Operations
Picture Selection Slide View Screen Operations
A Slide bar
B Picture selection slide view
C Position of displayed frame
0
This is not applied to pictures saved with [6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving].
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
142
0
During marker operation, you can skip to set markers or the beginning or end of the
6K/4K burst file. Touch [ ] to return to the previous operation.
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
21// Drag/
Selects a frame.
0
To change the frames displayed in the picture
selection slide view, select the frame at the left/
right end and then touch [ ] or [ ].
21
Press and
hold
Touch and hold
Continuously rewinds or forwards
frame-by-frame.
s
Touch/drag
Selects the frame to display.
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges or reduces the display.
/ s
Selects a frame while maintaining the enlarged
display (during enlarged display).
3421 Drag
Moves the enlarged display position (during
enlarged display).
[] Displays the 6K/4K burst playback screen.
s Switches to marker operation.
s / Adds or deletes a marker.
s
Displays the in-focus portion highlighted with
color ([Focus Peaking]).
0
[ON]/[OFF] are switched.
/
/
Saves the picture.
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
1 Moves to the next marker.
2 Moves to the previous marker.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
143
6K/4K Burst Playback Screen Operations
While paused During continuous playback
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
3 s
Performs continuous playback or pauses (during
continuous playback).
4 s
Performs continuous rewind playback or pauses
(during continuous rewind playback).
1// s
Performs fast-forward playback or performs
frame-by-frame forwarding (while paused).
2// s
Performs fast-rewind playback or performs
frame-by-frame rewinding (while paused).
s
Touch/drag
Selects the frame to display (while paused).
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges or reduces the display (while paused).
/ s
Selects a frame while maintaining the enlarged
display (during enlarged display).
3421 Drag
Moves the enlarged display position (during
enlarged display).
[]
Displays the picture selection slide view screen
(while paused).
s Switches to marker operation.
s / Adds or deletes a marker.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
144
0
During marker operation, you can skip to set markers or the beginning or end of the
6K/4K burst file. Touch [ ] to return to the previous operation.
[6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]
You can save any 5 second period of pictures from a 6K/4K burst file all at
once.
1
Select [6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving].
0
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]
2
Press 21 to select a 6K/4K burst file and then press or .
0
If the burst time is 5 seconds or less, all frames are saved as pictures.
3
Select the first frame of the pictures to be saved all at once and then
press or .
0
The pictures are saved as a group of burst pictures in JPEG format.
s
Displays the in-focus portion highlighted with
color ([Focus Peaking]).
0
[ON]/[OFF] switches.
/ / Saves the picture (while paused).
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
1 s Moves to the next marker.
2 s Moves to the previous marker.
0
To select and save pictures from a 6K/4K burst file on a PC, use the
“PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software.
However, it is not possible to treat 6K/4K burst files as videos in
“PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.
0
To play and edit 6K burst files on a PC, you need a high-performance PC
environment.
We recommend selecting and saving pictures with the camera.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
145
Pictures are taken automatically at a set recording interval.
This feature is ideal for keeping track of changes over time in subjects such
as animals and plants.
The pictures taken will be saved as a set of group images that can also be
combined into a video.
1
Set the drive mode dial to
[].
2
Set [Mode] to [Time Lapse
Shot].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Time
Lapse/Animation] ¨ [Mode] ¨
[Time Lapse Shot]
Recording with Time Lapse Shot
0
Check that the clock is set correctly. (l 54)
0
For long recording intervals, we recommend setting [Lens Focus Resume] to
[ON] in the [Custom] ([Lens / Others]) menu.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
146
3
Set the recording settings.
4
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
5
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
0
When [Start Time Set] is set, the camera
will enter into sleep status until the start
time is reached.
0
During recording standby, the camera enters into sleep status when no
operation is performed for a certain period of time.
0
The recording will stop automatically.
[Mode]
Switches between Time Lapse Shot and Stop Motion
Animation.
[Shooting
Interval Setting]
[ON]
Sets the interval before the next
recording takes place.
[OFF]
Takes pictures without leaving
recording intervals.
[Start Time]
[Now]
Starts recording when the shutter
button is pressed fully.
[Start Time Set] Starts recording at the set time.
[Image Count]/
[Shooting
Interval]
Sets the number of pictures and the recording interval to
be taken.
0
[Shooting Interval] is not available when [Shooting
Interval Setting] is set to [OFF].
[Exposure
Leveling]
Adjusts the exposure automatically to prevent large
changes in brightness between adjacent frames.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
147
6
Create a video. (l 152)
0
After the recording has stopped, select
[Yes] on the confirmation screen to
proceed to create a video.
Even if you select [No], you can still
create a video with [Time Lapse Video] in
the [Playback] ([Process Image]) menu.
(l 410)
Operations during Time Lapse Shot Recording
Pressing the shutter button halfway during sleep status will turn on the
camera.
0
You can perform the following operations by pressing [Q] during Time Lapse Shot
recording.
[Continue] Returns to the recording. (Only during recording)
[Pause] Pauses the recording. (Only during recording)
[Resume]
Resumes the recording. (Only while paused)
0
You can also press the shutter button to resume.
[End] Stops the Time Lapse Shot recording.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
148
0
Pictures recorded to more than one card cannot be combined into a single
video.
0
Pictures taken with [HLG Photo] cannot be converted to videos.
0
The camera gives priority to achieving the standard exposure, so it may not
take pictures at the set interval or take the set number of pictures.
Furthermore, it may not end at the end time displayed on the screen.
0
Time Lapse Shot is paused in the following cases.
– When the charge on the battery runs out
– When you set the camera on/off switch to [OFF]
You can set the camera on/off switch to [OFF] and replace the battery or
card.
Set the camera on/off switch to [ON] and then press the shutter button fully
to resume recording.
(Note that the images recorded after replacing the card will be saved as a
separate set of group images.)
0
[Exposure Leveling] is not available if ISO sensitivity is set to other than
[AUTO] in [M] mode.
0
[Time Lapse Shot] is not available when using the following functions:
– [High Resolution Mode]
– [Live View Composite]
– [Post-Focus]
– [Multiple Exposure]
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
149
Take pictures while moving the subject little by little.
The pictures taken will be saved as a set of group images that can be
combined into a stop motion video.
1
Set the drive mode dial to
[].
2
Set [Mode] to [Stop Motion
Animation].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Time
Lapse/Animation] ¨ [M ode] ¨ [Stop
Motion Animation]
3
Set the recording settings.
Recording with Stop Motion Animation
[Mode]
Switches between Time Lapse Shot and Stop Motion
Animation.
[Add to Picture
Group]
Allows you to continue recording for a set of stop motion
images that have already been recorded.
0
Select an image and proceed to Step
5
.
[Auto Shooting]
[ON]
Takes pictures automatically at a set recording
interval.
[OFF]
This is for taking pictures manually, frame by
frame.
[Shooting
Interval]
Sets the recording interval for [Auto Shooting].
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
150
4
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
5
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
≥Take pictures repeatedly while
moving the subject little by little.
0
The recording screen displays up to two
pictures taken previously. Use them as
reference for the amount of movement.
0
You can play back the recorded stop
motion images by pressing [(] during
recording.
Press [ ] to delete unnecessary images.
To return to the recording screen, press [(] again.
6
Stop recording.
≥Press and then select [Time
Lapse/Animation] from the [Photo]
menu to stop recording.
7
Create a video. (l 152)
0
After the recording has stopped, select
[Yes] on the confirmation screen to
proceed to create a video.
Even if you select [No], you can still
create a video with [Stop Motion Video] in
the [Playback] ([Process Image]) menu.
(l 410)
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
151
0
Pictures taken with [HLG Photo] cannot be converted to videos.
0
Up to 9999 frames can be recorded.
0
If the camera is turned off while recording, a message for resuming the
recording is displayed when it is turned on. Selecting [Yes] allows you to
continue the recording from the interruption point.
0
The camera gives priority to achieving the standard exposure, so it may not
take pictures at the set interval when the flash, etc. is used for recording.
0
A picture cannot be selected from [Add to Picture Group] when it is the only
one that was taken.
0
[Stop Motion Animation] is not available when using the following functions:
– [High Resolution Mode]
– [Live View Composite]
– [Post-Focus]
– [Multiple Exposure]
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
152
After performing Time Lapse Shot or stop motion recording, you can
proceed to create a video.
0
Refer to the sections below about these recording functions.
– Time Lapse Shot recording: l 145
– Stop motion recording: l 149
0
You can also create videos with [Time Lapse Video] (l 410) or [Stop Motion Video]
(l 410) in the [Playback] menu.
1
Select [Yes] on the
confirmation screen that
appears after recording.
2
Set the options for creating a
video.
3
Select [OK].
≥A video will be created in the [MP4]
recording file format.
Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation
Videos
[OK] Creates a video.
[Rec Quality] Sets the video image quality.
[Frame Rate]
Sets the number of frames per second.
The larger the number is, the smoother the video will be.
[Sequence]
[NORMAL] Splices pictures together in recording order.
[REVERSE]
Splices pictures together in reverse
recording order.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
153
0
The [Rec Quality] setting returns to the default setting when the [Switch
NTSC/PAL] setting is changed.
0
Videos cannot be created if the recording time exceeds 29 minutes and
59 seconds.
0
In the following cases, videos cannot be created if the file size exceeds 4 GB:
– When an SDHC memory card is being used and a 4K [Rec Quality] is set
– When an FHD [Rec Quality] is set
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
154
1
Set the drive mode dial to [ ].
2
Decide on the composition
and then adjust the focus.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
0
The focus and exposure are fixed when
the shutter button is pressed halfway.
3
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
≥The self-timer light blinks and then
the shutter is released.
Recording Using the Self-timer
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
155
Setting the Self-timer Time
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Self Timer]
[] Takes a picture after 10 seconds.
[] Takes 3 pictures at approx. 2 second intervals after 10 seconds.
[]
Takes a picture after 2 seconds.
0
This setting is a convenient way to avoid camera shake
caused by pressing the shutter button.
0
We recommend using a tripod when recording with the self-timer.
0
When the following functions are being used, [ ] is not available:
– [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] ([Filter Settings])
– [Bracketing]
– [Live View Composite]
– [Multiple Exposure]
0
The self-timer does not work while you are using the following functions:
– [High Resolution Mode]
– [Post-Focus]
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
156
When the shutter button is pressed, the camera can record multiple
images while automatically changing the setting value for exposure,
aperture, focus or white balance (adjustment value or color temperature).
1
Set [Bracketing Type].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨
[Bracketing] ¨ [Bracketing Type]
2
Set [More Settings].
≥For information about [More
Settings], refer to page for each
bracketing method.
3
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
4
Focus on the subject and then
take pictures.
Bracket Recording
0
Aperture Bracket can be selected in the following modes:
– [A] mode
– [M] mode (when ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO])
0
White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature) can be selected when the white
balance is set to [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ].
1
2
3
4
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
157
Setting Items ([Bracketing Type])
How to Cancel Bracketing
Select [OFF] in Step
1
.
[]Exposure Bracket
When the shutter button is pressed, the camera
records while changing the exposure. (l 159)
[]Aperture Bracket
When the shutter button is pressed, the camera
records while changing the aperture value.
(l 159)
[]Focus Bracket
When the shutter button is pressed, the camera
records while changing the focus point. (l 160)
[]
White Balance
Bracket
When the shutter button is pressed once, the
camera automatically records three images with
the different white balance adjustment values.
(l 161)
[]
White Balance
Bracket (Color
Temperature)
When the shutter button is pressed once, the
camera automatically records three images with
the different white balance color temperatures.
(l 161)
[OFF] s
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
158
0
When [Aspect Ratio] is set to [65:24]/[2:1], only the Exposure Bracket can be
used.
0
White Balance Bracket and White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature) are
not available when using the following functions:
– [iA] mode
– Taking burst pictures
–[RAWiFINE]/[RAWiSTD.]/[RAW] ([Picture Quality])
– [HLG Photo]
– [Filter Settings]
0
Bracket recording is not available while you are using the following functions:
– [6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)
– [High Resolution Mode]
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Miniature Effect]/[Soft Focus]/
[Star Filter]/[Sunshine] ([Filter Settings])
– [Live View Composite]
– [Multiple Exposure]
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
159
[More Settings] (Exposure Bracket)
[More Settings] (Aperture Bracket)
Example when the initial position is set to F8.0
1 1st image, 2 2nd image, 3 3rd image ... 7 7th image
[Step]
Sets the image count and exposure compensation step.
[3•1/3] (record 3 images in 1/3 EV steps) to [7•1] (record
7 images in 1 EV steps)
[Sequence] Sets the order in which images are recorded.
[Single Shot
Setting]
[]: Takes only one image each time the shutter button is
pressed.
[]: Takes all of the set number of images when the shutter
button is pressed once.
0
The [BKT] icon blinks until all of the set number of pictures is
taken.
0
When you record images with Exposure Bracket after setting the exposure
compensation value, the images recorded are based on the selected
exposure compensation value.
[Image Count]
[3]/[5]: Records the set number of images while alternately
setting the aperture value in the sequence of one before and
then one after using the initial aperture value as the reference.
[ALL]: Records images using all aperture values.
4.02.8 5.6 8.0 11 16 22
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
160
[More Settings] (Focus Bracket)
Example when [Sequence]: [0/s/r] is set
Example when [Sequence]: [0/r] is set
A Focus: closer
B Focus: more distant
1 1st image, 2 2nd image ... 5 5th image ...
[Step]
Sets the focus adjustment step.
0
The distance that the focus point is moved becomes shorter if
the initial focus point is close, and longer if it is far away.
[Image Count]
Sets the image count.
0
This cannot be set when taking burst pictures.
Burst pictures are taken while the shutter button is pressed.
[Sequence]
[0/s/r]: Records while alternately moving the focus point in the
sequence of forward and then backward using the initial focus
point as the reference.
[0/r]: Records while moving the focus point toward the far side
using the initial focus point as the reference.
0
Pictures recorded with Focus Bracket are displayed as images of one group.
・・・ ・・・
・・・
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
161
[More Settings] (White Balance Bracket)
Rotate , or to set the
correction step and then press or .
Rotate to the right:
Horizontal direction ([A] - [B])
Rotate to the left:
Vertical direction ([G] - [M])
0
The correction step can also be set by touching
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ].
[More Settings] (White Balance Bracket (Color
Temperature))
Rotate , or to set the
correction step and then press or .
0
The correction step can also be set by touching
[ ]/[ ].
G
GGG
GGG
AAA
AAAB
BBB
BBB
MMM
MMM
±300K
5500K
5500K
5500K
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
162
Images are recorded over several times and only the parts that change to
become brighter form part of the composition.
The images composed by recording at a set exposure time (shutter speed)
are displayed, allowing the images to be confirmed as recording proceeds.
This allows you to reduce the overall brightness for recording, so it is
convenient for recording the light trails of stars or fireworks against a bright
nightscape.
1
Set the mode dial to [M].
2
Set [Live View Composite].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Live View
Composite]
3
Start Live View Composite
recording.
≥Select [Start] and then press or
.
[Live View Composite]
0
Use a tripod to minimize camera shake.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
163
4
Decide on the composition and then fix the camera in
place.
5
Set the shutter speed and ISO
sensitivity.
≥Rotate to set the shutter
speed.
≥Press [ISO], then rotate , ,
or to set the ISO sensitivity.
0
The shutter speed can be set in the range between 60 seconds and 1/1.6 of a
second.
0
The ISO sensitivity can be set in the range between [100] and [3200] ([50]
and [3200] when [Extended ISO] is set).
6
Get the image to use for noise
reduction.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
7
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
0
Recording is done according to the
settings in Step
5
, and images
processed with noise reduction are
merged a frame at a time.
A Histogram display
B Shutter speed k Number of images
merged
C Elapsed time
1
00
1
00
2
00
2
00
4
00
4
00
8
0
8
0
5”
5”
5”
LC
LC
LC
5
sec. x 1200
sec. x 1200
5 sec. x 1200
1h40m00s
1h40m00s
1h40m00s
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
164
8
Stop recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
0
A maximum of 3 hours can be recorded with one Live View Composite
recording.
(Recording automatically ends when the time exceeds 3 hours.)
9
End [Live View Composite].
≥Press [Q].
Setting Items ([Live View Composite])
[Start] Starts Live View Composite recording.
[Shutter Delay]
Sets the delay time from when the shutter button is pressed until
the shutter is released.
[8 SEC]/[4 SEC]/[2 SEC]/[1 SEC]/[OFF]
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
165
0
[Long Exposure NR] will be [ON].
0
When recording with the flash, the flash fires only in the first frame.
0
Some menus are not displayed after getting the noise reduction image.
0
The image for noise reduction is discarded when you do the following. Do
Step
6
again.
– Modify the shutter speed/ISO sensitivity
– Switch the playback mode
0
When pressing the shutter button fully to end recording, the last image may
not be merged.
0
During Live View Composite recording, audio is not output to an external
device connected by HDMI.
0
[Live View Composite] is not available when using the following functions:
– [ELEC.]/[ELEC.+NR] ([Shutter Type])
– [High Resolution Mode]
– [Filter Settings]
– [Silent Mode]
– [Multiple Exposure]
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
166
Taking burst pictures with the same image quality as 6K/4K photos while
automatically changing the focus point.
You can select the focus point for the picture to save after recording.
Also Focus Stacking lets you merge images with multiple focus points.
This function is suitable for subjects that do not move.
1
Set the image quality for
[Post-Focus].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨
[Post-Focus] ¨ [6K 18M]/[4K 8M]
Post-Focus Recording
Perform burst 6K/4K
photo recording while
automatically shifting the
focus.
Touch the desired focus
point.
A picture with the desired
focus point is made.
0
Use a UHS Speed Class 3 or higher card when recording.
0
The angle of view during recording becomes narrower. (when using a
full-frame lens)
0
If you are going to perform Focus Stacking after recording, we recommend
using a tripod during recording.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
167
2
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
3
Decide on the composition
and then adjust the focus.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
≥AF detects the focus point on the
screen. (Excluding the edges of the
screen)
0
If no areas on the screen can be brought into focus, the focus icon A blinks
and recording is not possible.
0
Maintain the same distance to the subject and the same composition until
recording finishes.
4
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
0
Recording is performed while
automatically changing the focus point.
When the icon B disappears, recording
ends automatically.
0
A video will be recorded with [Rec. File
Format] set to [MP4]. (Audio will not be
recorded.)
0
In default settings, Auto Review operates, and a screen that lets you select
the focus point will be displayed. (l 169)
ISO
10F3.560
±
0
9
m
59
s
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
168
0
Since recording is performed with the same image quality as 6K/4K photos,
limitations apply to recording functions and menus.
0
Focus settings cannot be changed during Post-Focus recording.
0
When using APS-C lenses, [6K 18M] is not available.
0
When the following functions are being used, [Post-Focus] is not available:
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation]
– [High Resolution Mode]
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Miniature Effect]/[Soft Focus]/
[Star Filter]/[Sunshine] ([Filter Settings])
– [Live View Composite]
– [Multiple Exposure]
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
169
Selecting the Focus Point for the Picture to Save
1
Select a Post-Focus image on
the playback screen. (l 300)
≥Select an image with the [ ]
icon and then press 3.
≥You can also perform the same
operation by touching the [ ]
icon.
2
Touch the focus point.
0
When the point is in focus, a green frame
appears.
0
If there is no picture with the selected
point in focus, a red frame appears.
A picture cannot be saved.
0
The edge of the screen cannot be
selected.
3
Save the picture.
≥Touch [ ].
0
The picture is saved in JPEG format.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
170
Focus Point Selection Operations
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
3421/
/
Touch
Selects a focus position.
0
Selection is not possible during enlarged
display.
Enlarges the display.
0
During enlarged display, you can fine-adjust the
focus by dragging the slide bar.
(You can also perform the same operation by
pressing 21.)
Reduces the display (during enlarged display).
[] Switches to Focus Stacking operation. (l 171)
s
Displays the in-focus portion highlighted with
color ([Focus Peaking]).
0
[ON]/[OFF] switches.
/ Saves the picture.
0
You cannot display an image on a TV screen and then select the focus point.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
171
Focus Stacking
By merging multiple focus points, you can save pictures that are focused
from the foreground through to the background.
A Focus: closer
B Focus: more distant
1
On the screen for selecting the
focus point in Step
2
on
page 169, touch [ ].
≥You can also perform the same
operation by pressing [ ].
2
Select the merging method.
[Auto
Merging]
Automatically selects
pictures suitable for
merging and then merges
them into a single picture.
[Range
Merging]
Merges pictures with
selected focus points into
a single picture.
$XWR0HUJLQJ
5DQJH0HUJLQJ
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
172
3
(When [Range Merging] is
selected)
Touch the focus points.
0
Select at least two points.
Selected points are indicated with a
green frame.
0
The in-focus range between the two
selected points is displayed in green.
0
Ranges that cannot be selected are
displayed in gray.
0
To cancel the selection, touch a point with
a green frame again.
0
To select consecutive points, drag the
screen.
4
Save the picture.
≥Touch [ ].
6HW&DQFHO
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW
6HW&DQFHO
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
173
Operations when [Range Merging] Is Selected
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
3421 /
/ /
Touch Selects a point.
[] [Set/Cancel] Sets or cancels a point.
[DISP.]
[All]
Selects all points.
(Before selecting points)
[Reset]
Cancels all selections.
(After selecting points)
/
Merges the pictures and saves the resulting
picture.
0
The picture is saved in JPEG format ([FINE] picture quality), and the recording
information (Exif information), such as the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO
sensitivity, of the picture with the closest point is also saved with the picture
that is saved.
0
Image misalignment due to camera shake will be adjusted automatically. If
adjustments are made, the angle of view will become slightly narrower when
the pictures are merged.
0
If the subject moves during recording or the distance between subjects is
great, merging may create an unnatural picture.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
174
This disables all operation sounds and light output at once.
The audio from the speaker will be muted and the flash and the AF assist
light will be set to forced off mode.
0
The following settings are fixed:
– [Flash Mode]: [Œ] (Forced Flash Off)
– [AF Assist Light]: [OFF]
– [Shutter Type]: [ELEC.]
– [Beep Volume]: [ ] (OFF)
– [AF Beep Volume]: [ ] (OFF)
– [E-Shutter Vol]: [ ] (OFF)
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Silent Mode]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
[Silent Mode]
0
Even when [ON] is set, the following functions light/blink:
– Charging light/wireless connection light
– Card access light
– Self-timer light
0
Use this function at your own responsibility sufficiently considering the privacy,
portrait, and other rights of subjects.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
175
Selects the shutter type to use for taking pictures.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Shutter Type]
¢1 This setting is available only in [M] mode.
¢2 The electronic shutter sound can be set in [E-Shutter Vol] and [E-Shutter Tone] in
[Beep] of the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu. (l 399)
[Shutter Type]
[AUTO]
Switches the shutter type automatically depending on the
recording conditions and shutter speed.
[MECH.] Records with the mechanical shutter type.
[EFC] Records with the electronic front curtain type.
[ELEC.] Records with the electronic shutter type.
[ELEC.+NR]
Records with the electronic shutter type.
When pictures are taken at slower shutter speeds, the shutter is
closed after recording to perform long shutter noise reduction.
Mechanical
shutter type
Electronic front
curtain type
Electronic shutter
type
Mechanism
This type starts and
ends exposure with
the mechanical
shutter.
This type starts
exposure
electronically and
ends it with the
mechanical shutter.
This type starts and
ends exposure
electronically.
Flash 33—
Shutter speed
(sec.)
[B] (Bulb, max.
approx.
30 minutes)
¢1
,
60 to 1/8000
[B] (Bulb, max.
approx.
30 minutes)
¢1
,
60 to 1/2000
[B] (Bulb, max.
approx.
60 seconds)
¢1
,
60 to 1/8000
Shutter sound
Mechanical shutter
sound
Mechanical shutter
sound
Electronic shutter
sound
¢2
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
176
0
The electronic front curtain type reduces blur caused by the shutter because the
amount of vibration from the shutter is small compared to the mechanical shutter
type.
0
The electronic shutter type allows you to record without vibration from the shutter.
0
To reduce shutter-induced blur, you can set the shutter to release a few
seconds after the shutter button is pressed:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Shutter Delay] (l 360)
0
When [ ] is displayed on the screen, recording will be with the electronic
shutter type.
0
When a moving subject is recorded using the electronic shutter, the subject
may appear distorted in the picture.
0
When you record using the electronic shutter under lighting such as
fluorescent or LED lighting, horizontal stripes may be recorded. In such a
case, lowering the shutter speed may reduce the effect of horizontal stripes.
0
When using APS-C lenses, the electronic front curtain is not available.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
177
This camera can use both the in-body image stabilizer and the in-lens
image stabilizer.
It is compatible with the Dual I.S.2 system that is an effective combination
of the 2 image stabilizers.
Furthermore, during video recording, you can use the 5-Axis Hybrid Image
Stabilizer that incorporates electronic stabilization.
Combinations of lenses and image stabilizers (As of September 2020)
Image stabilizers that can be used will differ depending on the attached
lens.
0
The 5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer (l 179) can be used with any lenses.
Image Stabilizer
Attached lens
Available image
stabilizer
Example of icon
Panasonic lenses with image
stabilization function
BodyrLens
(Dual I.S.2)
Other manufacturers’ lenses
with image stabilization
function
Body or Lens /
Lenses without image
stabilizer
Body
Lenses without
communication function
Body
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
178
Using the Image Stabilizer
0
When using a lens with an O.I.S. switch, set the switch on the lens to [ON].
0
When using lenses without a function for communicating with this camera, a
message asking you to check the focal length setting is displayed after you turn on
the camera.
Correctly operating the image stabilization function requires that the focal length be
set to match the attached lens.
Set the focal length in accordance as prompted by the message.
This can also be set using the menu. (l 183)
0
When the shutter button is pressed halfway, the camera shake alert icon
[ ] may be displayed on the recording screen.
If this is displayed, we recommend using a tripod, the self timer or the Shutter
Remote Control (DMW-RS2: optional).
0
We recommend turning off the image stabilizer function when using a tripod.
0
The image stabilizer may cause vibration or produce operational sound during
operation, but these are not malfunctions.
0
When the following function is being used, the image stabilizer function is not
available:
– [High Resolution Mode]
0
You can display the reference point and check the camera shake status:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [I.S. Status Scope] (l 390)
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
179
Image Stabilizer Settings
Set the image stabilizer operation to match the recording situation.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Image Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode]
Sets the stabilization movement (blur) to match the
recording method (normal, panning). (l 181)
[Body(B.I.S.) /
Lens(O.I.S.)]
[ ] ([Body])
The in-body image stabilizer corrects
for vertical, horizontal, and rotational
shake.
[ ] ([Lens +
Body (Roll)])
The in-lens image stabilizer corrects
for vertical and horizontal shake,
while the in-body image stabilizer
corrects for rotational shake.
0
This can be set when using other manufacturers’ lenses
with an image stabilization function.
[When to Activate]
[ALWAYS]
The image stabilizer is always
operating.
[HALF-SHUTTER]
The image stabilizer operates when
the shutter button is pressed halfway.
[E-Stabilization
(Video)]
Camera shake during video recording is corrected along
the vertical, horizontal, roll, pitch, and yaw axes through the
combined use of the in-lens, in-body, and electronic image
stabilizers. (5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer)
0
The [ ] on the recording screen changes to [ ]
while [E-Stabilization (Video)] is functioning.
0
The angle of view may become narrower if set to [ON].
[Boost I.S. (Video)]
Increases the effectiveness of the image stabilizer during
video recording.
This effect can help provide a stable composition when you
want to perform recording from a fixed perspective. (l 182)
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
180
[Anamorphic
(Video)]
You can switch to an image stabilizer that suits anamorphic
recording. (l 182)
[Focal Length Set]
When using lenses without a function for communicating
with this camera, manually set the focal length. (l 183)
0
When the following functions are being used, [When to Activate] is fixed to
[ALWAYS]:
– [ ] ([Body(B.I.S.) / Lens(O.I.S.)])
– [ ] mode
– [S&Q] mode
– Video recording/[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
0
When the following functions are being used, [E-Stabilization (Video)] is not
available:
– [S&Q] mode
– [Live Cropping]
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
181
[Operation Mode]
Set the stabilization movement (blur) to match the recording method
(normal, panning).
0
Operation modes that can be used will differ depending on the used lenses and on
[Body(B.I.S.) / Lens(O.I.S.)] settings.
0
[Panning (Auto)] is not displayed when using other manufacturers’ lenses with an
image stabilization function with [Body(B.I.S.) / Lens(O.I.S.)] set to [ ]. Set to
either [Panning (Left/Right)] or [Panning (Up/Down)] to suit the panning direction.
0
When using lenses with an O.I.S. switch, the camera’s operation mode cannot be
set to [OFF]. Set the switch on the lens to [OFF].
0
When the following functions are being used, [Operation Mode] switches to [ ]
([Normal]):
– [ ] mode
– [S&Q] mode
– Video recording/[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
[Normal]
Corrects vertical, horizontal, and rotational camera
shake.
This function is suitable for normal recording.
[Panning (Auto)]
Automatically detects the panning direction, and corrects
vertical and horizontal camera shake.
This function is suitable for panning.
[Panning (Left/
Right)]
Corrects vertical camera shake.
This is suitable for horizontal panning.
[Panning (Up/
Down)]
Corrects horizontal camera shake.
This is suitable for vertical panning.
[OFF] Turns the image stabilization function OFF.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
182
[Boost I.S. (Video)]
Increase the effectiveness of the image stabilizer during video recording.
This effect can help provide a stable composition when you want to
perform recording from a fixed perspective.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
0
When [Boost I.S. (Video)] is operating, [ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
0
To change composition while recording, first set this to [OFF] before moving the
camera.
To set this to [OFF] during recording, use the Fn button. (l 321)
0
Longer focal lengths will result in weaker stabilization.
[Anamorphic (Video)]
You can switch to an image stabilizer that suits anamorphic recording.
0
Make settings to suit the magnification of the anamorphic lens you are using.
0
While [Anamorphic (Video)] is functioning, the set magnification appears on the
image stabilizer icons on the recording screen, as shown by [ ] and [ ].
0
When [Body(B.I.S.) / Lens(O.I.S.)] is set to [ ], [Boost I.S. (Video)] is not
available.
Settings: [ ]([2.0k])/[ ]([1.8k])/[ ]([1.5k])/[ ]([1.33k])/
[]([1.30k])/[OFF]
0
When [Boost I.S. (Video)] is set, [Boost I.S. (Video)] is prioritized.
0
When the following function is being used, [Anamorphic (Video)] is fixed to
[OFF]:
– [ ] ([Body(B.I.S.) / Lens(O.I.S.)])
0
Image stabilizer functions on your lens may not work correctly. Turn off the
image stabilizer function on your lens if this is the case.
6. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
183
[Focal Length Set]
When using lenses without a function for communicating with this camera,
manually set the focal length inscribed on the lens.
Up to three focal length settings can be registered.
Registered focal length settings can be called.
Entering
focal length
input A
Enter the focal length.
21: Select
34: Select a numeric value.
or : Confirm
0
0.1 mm to 1000.0 mm can be
set.
Registration
and calling B
Register the entered focal length.
Call the registered focal length.
21: Select
[DISP.]: Register the entered
focal length.
or : Call the registered
focal length.
184
7.
Metering/Exposure/ISO
Sensitivity
Type of optical measurement to measure brightness can be changed.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Metering Mode]
[Metering Mode]
[](Multi-metering)
Method in which the most suitable exposure is
measured by judging the allocation of brightness on
the whole screen.
[](Center-weighted)
Method used to perform measuring which focuses
on the center of the screen.
[](Spot)
Method used to measure the
extremely small part around the
spot-metering target A.
0
When you move the AF area,
the spot metering target also
moves to match.
[](Highlight-weighted)
Method used to perform measuring which focuses
on the highlighted parts of the screen to prevent
overexposure.
This is suitable for theatre photography, etc.
0
The standard value for standard exposure can be adjusted:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Exposure Offset Adjust.] (l 371)
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity
185
In [P] mode (Program AE mode), the camera automatically sets the shutter
speed and aperture value for the brightness of the subject.
You can also use Program Shift to change combinations of shutter speed
and aperture values while keeping the same exposure.
1
Set the mode dial to [P].
2
Press the shutter button
halfway.
≥This displays the aperture value A
and shutter speed value B on the
recording screen.
0
If the correct exposure is not achieved,
the aperture value and shutter speed
blink red.
3
Start recording.
Program AE Mode
F3.560
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity
186
Program Shift
You can change the shutter speed and aperture value combination set
automatically by the camera while maintaining the same exposure.
With this, you can, for example, make the background more defocused by
decreasing the aperture value or capture a moving subject more
dynamically by slowing the shutter speed.
1
Press the shutter button halfway.
0
This displays the aperture value and shutter speed value on the recording
screen. (Approx. 10 seconds)
2
Rotate or while the values are
displayed.
0
This displays the Program Shift icon A on
the recording screen.
3
Start recording.
Canceling Program Shift
– Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
– Rotate or until the Program Shift icon disappears.
0
Program Shift is not available when using the following functions:
–Flash
– [6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
0
You can customize dial operations:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Dial Set.] ¨ [Assign Dial (F/SS)]/[Rotation (F/SS)] (l 380)
0
The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the
relationship between aperture value and shutter speed:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Expo.Meter] (l 388)
F5.630
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity
187
In [A] mode (Aperture-Priority AE mode), you can set the aperture value
before recording.
The shutter speed will be automatically set by the camera.
1
Set the mode dial to [A].
Aperture-Priority AE Mode
Smaller aperture values
It becomes easier to defocus the
background.
Larger aperture values
It becomes easier to bring everything into
focus including the background.
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity
188
2
Set the aperture value.
≥Rotate or .
3
Start recording.
0
If the correct exposure is not achieved
when the shutter button is pressed
halfway, the aperture value and the
shutter speed blink red.
Depth of Field Characteristics
Aperture value Small Large
Focal length of lens Telephoto Wide-angle
Distance to subject Near More distant
Depth of field
(area in sharp focus)
Shallow (narrow)
Example: When you
want to take a image
with a defocused
background.
Deep (wide)
Example: When you
want to take a image
with focus as far as the
background.
F8.0
F8.0
F8.0
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity
189
0
The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on
the recording screen.
To check the effects on the recording screen, use [Preview]. (l 195)
You can set the preview of the aperture effect to constantly operate in [A]
mode to check the depth of field while recording:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Constant Preview] (l 383)
0
The brightness of the recording screen and of actual recorded images may
differ.
Check the images on the playback screen.
0
When using a lens with an aperture ring, set the position of the aperture ring to
other than [A] to use the aperture value of the lens.
0
You can customize dial operations:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Dial Set.] ¨ [Assign Dial (F/SS)]/[Rotation (F/SS)] (l 380)
0
The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the
relationship between aperture value and shutter speed:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Expo.Meter] (l 388)
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity
190
In [S] mode (Shutter-Priority AE mode), you can set the shutter speed
before recording.
The aperture value will be automatically set by the camera.
1
Set the mode dial to [S].
Shutter-Priority AE Mode
Slower shutter speeds
It becomes easier to capture motion
Faster shutter speeds
It becomes easier to freeze motion
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity
191
2
Set the shutter speed.
≥Rotate or .
3
Start recording.
0
If the correct exposure is not achieved
when the shutter button is pressed
halfway, the aperture value and the
shutter speed blink red.
0
The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on
the recording screen.
To check the effects on the recording screen, use [Preview]. (l 195)
0
The brightness of the recording screen and of actual recorded images may
differ.
Check the images on the playback screen.
0
Shutter speeds faster than 1/250 of a second are not available when
recording using a flash. (l 231)
0
You can customize dial operations:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Dial Set.] ¨ [Assign Dial (F/SS)]/[Rotation (F/SS)] (l 380)
0
The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the
relationship between aperture value and shutter speed:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Expo.Meter] (l 388)
250
250
250
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity
192
In [M] mode (Manual Exposure mode), you can take pictures by manually
setting the aperture value and shutter speed.
In default settings, the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO].
As a result, the ISO sensitivity will be adjusted according to the aperture
value and shutter speed.
Exposure compensation can also be used when ISO sensitivity is set to
[AUTO].
1
Set the mode dial to [M].
2
Set the aperture value and
shutter speed.
≥Rotate to set the aperture
value A, and to set the shutter
speed B.
3
Start recording.
0
If the correct exposure is not achieved
when the shutter button is pressed
halfway, the aperture value and the
shutter speed blink red.
Manual Exposure Mode
F5.630
30
30
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity
193
Available Shutter Speeds (Sec.)
Manual Exposure Assist
When ISO sensitivity is set to other than [AUTO], Manual Exposure Assist
(example: ) will be displayed on the recording screen.
You can check the difference between the current exposure value and the
standard exposure (n0) measured by the camera.
0
Use Manual Exposure Assist as a guide.
We recommend checking the images on the playback screen when recording.
[MECH.] [B] (Bulb, max. approx. 30 minutes), 60 to 1/8000
[EFC] [B] (Bulb, max. approx. 30 minutes), 60 to 1/2000
[ELEC.] [B] (Bulb, max. approx. 60 seconds), 60 to 1/8000
0
The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on
the recording screen.
To check the effects on the recording screen, use [Preview]. (l 195)
You can set the preview of the aperture effect and the shutter speed effect to
constantly operate in [M] mode to check the depth of field and movement of
the subject while recording:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Constant Preview] (l 383)
0
The brightness of the recording screen and of actual recorded images may
differ.
Check the images on the playback screen.
0
When using a lens with an aperture ring, set the position of the aperture ring to
other than [A] to use the aperture value of the lens.
0
Shutter speeds faster than 1/250 of a second are not available when
recording using a flash. (l 231)
0
You can customize dial operations:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Dial Set.] ¨ [Assign Dial (F/SS)]/[Rotation (F/SS)] (l 380)
0
The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the
relationship between aperture value and shutter speed:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Expo.Meter] (l 388)
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity
194
[B] (Bulb)
If you set the shutter speed to [B] (Bulb), the shutter stays open while the
shutter button is pressed fully. (up to approx. 30 minutes)
The shutter closes when the shutter button is released.
Use this when you want to keep the shutter open for a long time to record
images of fireworks, night scenery or a starry sky.
0
We recommend using a tripod or the Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2:
optional) during bulb recording.
0
Bulb recording may create noticeable noise.
If you are concerned about noise, we recommend that you set [Long Exposure
NR] (l 351) to [ON] in the [Photo] ([Image Quality]) menu before recording.
0
Bulb is not available when using the following functions:
– [6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation] (when set to [Auto Shooting])
– [High Resolution Mode]
– [Bracketing]
– [Live View Composite]
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity
195
You can check the effects of aperture on the recording screen by physically
closing the aperture blades of the lens to the aperture value set for actual
recording.
In addition to the effects of aperture, you can check the effects of shutter
speed at the same time.
0
You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button registered with
[Preview].
For information about the Fn button, refer to page 321.
Press the preview button.
0
Each press of the button switches between the
effect preview screens.
Preview Mode
Aperture effect: OFF
Shutter speed effect:
OFF
Aperture effect: ON
Shutter speed effect:
OFF
Aperture effect: ON
Shutter speed effect:
ON
0
It is possible to record in preview mode.
0
Range for shutter speed effect check is 8 seconds to 1/8000 of a second.
0
Preview mode is not available when recording with [6K/4K Pre-Burst].
0
Depending on the [Constant Preview] setting, there are preview screens that
cannot be displayed.
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity
196
You can compensate the exposure when the standard exposure
determined by the camera is too bright or too dark.
You can adjust the exposure in 1/3 EV steps in a range of n5EV.
When recording videos or recording with 6K/4K photo or Post-Focus, the
range changes to n3EV.
1
Press [ ].
2
Compensate the exposure.
≥Rotate , , or .
3
Confirm your selection.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
Exposure Compensation
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
+3+3+1+1 +2+2 +3+3
-
5
-
5
-
4
-
4
-
3
-
3
-
2
-
2
-
1
-
100
+5+5+4+4
+
+
1
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity
197
0
In [M] mode, you can compensate the exposure by setting the ISO sensitivity
to [AUTO].
0
When the exposure compensation value falls below or exceeds n3 EV, the
brightness of the recording screen will no longer change.
Press the shutter button halfway or use AE Lock to reflect the value on the
recording screen.
0
The set exposure compensation value is stored even if you turn off the
camera.
0
The standard value for standard exposure can be adjusted:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Exposure Offset Adjust.] (l 371)
0
You can set the exposure compensation value to be reset when the camera is
turned off:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Exposure Comp. Reset] (l 372)
0
You can change the operation of the [ ] button:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [WB/ISO/Expo. Button] (l 379)
0
Exposure Bracket can be set and flash output can be adjusted on the
exposure compensation screen:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting] (l 379)
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity
198
Lock the focus and exposure in advance to take pictures with the same
focus and exposure settings while changing the composition.
This is useful when you want to bring an edge of the screen into focus or
there is a backlight, for example.
1
Register [AE LOCK], [AF LOCK], or [AF/AE LOCK] to the
Fn button. (l 321)
0
These cannot be registered to [Fn3] to [Fn7].
2
Lock focus and exposure.
≥Press and hold the Fn button.
≥If focus is locked, then the AF lock
icon A will be displayed.
≥If exposure is locked, then the AE
lock icon B will be displayed.
3
Hold the Fn button to decide on the composition and
then perform recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE
Lock)
[AE LOCK] The exposure is locked.
[AF LOCK] The focus is locked.
[AF/AE LOCK] Both focus and exposure are locked.
0
In the [M] mode, the AE Lock can be used when ISO sensitivity is set to
[AUTO].
0
Program Shift can be set even when AE is locked.
0
You can maintain lock even without pressing and holding the Fn button:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [AF/AE Lock Hold] (l 373)
AFLAFL
AELAEL
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity
199
You can set light sensitivity (ISO sensitivity).
With the default settings, you can set 100 to 51200 in 1/3 EV increments.
This camera supports Dual Native ISO which enables recording at high
sensitivity and with reduced noise by switching the base sensitivity.
The base sensitivity is automatically switched according to the brightness.
1
Press [ISO].
2
Select ISO sensitivity.
≥Rotate , , or .
≥Selection is also possible by
pressing [ISO].
3
Confirm your selection.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
ISO Sensitivity
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
00
1
00
2
00
2
00
4
0
4
0
AUTOAUTO
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity
200
Setting Items (ISO Sensitivity)
¢1 Default setting. The upper limit can be changed with [ISO Sensitivity (photo)].
¢2 Default setting. The upper limit can be changed with [ISO Sensitivity (video)].
Characteristics of the ISO Sensitivity
By increasing the ISO sensitivity, the shutter speed can be increased in dark
places to prevent camera shake and subject blur. However, higher ISO
sensitivities also increase the amount of noise in the recorded images.
[AUTO]
The ISO sensitivity is automatically adjusted according to the
brightness.
0
Taking picture: Maximum [6400]
¢1
0
Video recording: Maximum [6400]
¢2
[100] to [51200]
The ISO sensitivity is fixed at the selected value.
0
You can extend the ISO sensitivity range in between a lower
limit of [50] and an upper limit of [204800] by setting [Extended
ISO] (l 371) to [ON] in the [Custom] ([Image Quality]) menu.
7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity
201
0
When the following functions are being used, the ISO sensitivity that can be set is
restricted.
– [High Resolution Mode]: Up to an upper limit of [3200]
– [High Dynamic] ([Filter Settings]): Down to a lower limit of [400], up to an upper
limit of [6400]
– Other than [High Dynamic] ([Filter Settings]): Up to an upper limit of [6400]
– [Live View Composite]: [100] to [3200] (when [Extended ISO] is set: [50] to [3200])
– [Multiple Exposure]: Down to a lower limit of [100], up to an upper limit of [6400]
– [Cinelike D2]/[Cinelike V2] ([Photo Style]): Down to a lower limit of [200]
(The lower limit changes to [100] when [Extended ISO] is set.)
– [Like709] ([Photo Style]): Down to a lower limit of [100]
– [V-Log] ([Photo Style]): Down to a lower limit of [640], up to an upper limit of
[51200]
(The lower limit changes to [320] when [Extended ISO] is set.)
– [Like2100(HLG)]/[Standard(HLG)]/[Monochrome(HLG)] ([Photo Style]): Down to a
lower limit of [400]
0
You can set upper and lower limits for ISO Auto:
–[ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [ISO Sensitivity (photo)] (l 352)
–[ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [ISO Sensitivity (video)] (l 262)
0
You can change the intervals between ISO sensitivity settings values:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [ISO Increments] (l 370)
0
The setting range of ISO sensitivity can be extended:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Extended ISO] (l 371)
0
You can set the lower limit for shutter speed for ISO Auto:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Min. Shutter Speed] (l 352)
0
You can change the operation of the [ISO] button:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [WB/ISO/Expo. Button] (l 379)
0
You can set the upper limit for ISO Auto on the ISO sensitivity settings screen:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [ISO Displayed Setting] (l 379)
202
8.
White Balance/Image Quality
White balance (WB) is a function that corrects the color cast produced by
the light illuminating the subject.
It corrects the colors so that white objects appear in white to make the
overall color closer to what is seen by the eye.
Normally, you can use auto ([AWB], [AWBc] or [AWBw]) to obtain the
optimal white balance.
Set this function when the coloring of the image is different from what you
expected, or you want to change the coloring to capture the ambience.
1
Press [WB].
2
Select the white balance.
≥Rotate , or .
≥Selection is also possible by
pressing [WB].
White Balance (WB)
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
AWBc
AWBc
AWBw
AWBw
WBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWB
AWBAWB
8. White Balance/Image Quality
203
3
Confirm your selection.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
Setting Items (White Balance)
¢ It operates as [AWB] during video recording or when recording with [6K/4K PHOTO]
or [Post-Focus].
[AWB] Auto
[AWBc]
Auto (Reduces the reddish hue under an incandescent light
source)
[AWBw]
Auto (Leaves the reddish hue under an incandescent light
source)
[V] Clear sky
[Ð] Cloudy sky
[î] Shade under a clear sky
[Ñ] Incandescent light
[]
¢
Flash
[] to []Set mode 1 to 4 (l 205)
[] to []Color temperatures 1 to 4 (l 205)
1 4
1 4
8. White Balance/Image Quality
204
1 [AWB] will work within this range.
2 Blue sky
3 Cloudy sky (Rain)
4 Shade
5 Sunlight
6 White fluorescent light
7 Incandescent light bulb
8 Sunrise and sunset
9 Candlelight
KlKelvin Color Temperature
0
Under lighting such as fluorescent or LED lighting, the appropriate white
balance will vary depending on the lighting type.
Use [AWB], [AWBc], [AWBw] or [ ] to [ ].
0
The white balance is fixed to [AWB] while [Filter Settings] is being used.
0
You can change the operation of the [WB] button:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [WB/ISO/Expo. Button] (l 379)
1
4
8. White Balance/Image Quality
205
Registering the White Set ([ ] to [ ])
Take pictures of a white object under the light source of the recording
location to adjust the white balance until it appears white.
1
Press [WB] and then select any value from [ ] to [ ].
2
Press 3.
3
Aim the camera at a white object so that it appears inside the frame at
the center of the screen and then press or .
0
This will set the white balance and return you to the recording screen.
Color Temperature Setting ([ ] to [ ])
Set the numeric value for the white balance color temperature.
1
Press [WB] and then select any value from [ ] to [ ].
2
Press 3.
0
The color temperature setting screen is displayed.
3
Press 34 to select the color temperature and then press or .
0
You can set the White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature) by rotating ,
or . (l 161)
0
You can set a color temperature from [2500K] to [10000K].
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
8. White Balance/Image Quality
206
Adjusting the White Balance
You can adjust the coloring even when the coloring you want to apply is not
produced by the selected white balance.
1
Press [WB].
2
Select the white balance and
then press 4.
≥The adjustment screen is displayed.
3
Adjust the coloring.
0
You can also touch the graph to make
adjustments.
0
Press [DISP.] to return to the unadjusted state.
0
You can set the White Balance Bracket by rotating , or .
(l 161)
2: [A] (AMBER: ORANGE)
3: [G] (GREEN: GREENISH)
1: [B] (BLUE: BLUISH)
4: [M] (MAGENTA: REDDISH)
GGGGGG
MMMMMM
AAAAAABBBBBBB
8. White Balance/Image Quality
207
4
Confirm your selection.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
0
When the white balance is adjusted, the color of its recording screen icon
changes to the adjusted color.
Adjusting toward the [G] side will display [i], while adjusting toward the [M]
side will display [j].
8. White Balance/Image Quality
208
You can select the finishing settings of images to suit your subjects and
expression styles.
The image quality can be adjusted for each Photo Style.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Photo Style]
[Photo Style]
[Standard] The standard setting.
[Vivid]
A setting that produces a more vivid quality with
higher saturation and contrast.
[Natural]
A setting that produces a softer quality with lower
contrast.
[Flat]
A setting that produces a flatter image quality
with lower saturation and contrast.
[Landscape]
A setting suited for sceneries with vivid blue skies
and greens.
[Portrait]
A setting suited for portraits with a healthy and
beautiful skin tone.
[Monochrome] A monochrome setting with no color shades.
[L.Monochrome]
A black-and-white setting with rich gradation and
crisp black accents.
[L.Monochrome D]
A monochrome setting that creates a dynamic
impression with enhanced highlights and
shadows.
[Cinelike D2]
A setting that creates a film-like finishing touch
using a gamma curve and gives priority to the
dynamic range.
0
This function is suitable for video editing
processes.
[Cinelike V2]
A setting that creates a film-like finishing touch
using a gamma curve that gives priority to the
contrast.
8. White Balance/Image Quality
209
¢1 Can only be selected when in the [ ] mode and set to a 10-bit [Rec Quality].
(l 250)
¢2 Effects up to [MY PHOTO STYLE 4] are displayed with the default settings. You
can set the items to display in the menu with [Show/Hide Photo Style] in [Photo
Style Settings]. (l 370)
0
When [HLG Photo] is set, the items will be as follows.
[Like709]
A setting that minimizes overexposure by
applying a gamma curve correction equivalent to
Rec.709 to perform compression (knee
adjustment) of high-luminance areas.
0
Rec.709 is an abbreviation of “ITU-R
Recommendation BT.709”, a standard for
high-definition broadcasting.
[V-Log]
Gamma curve setting intended for
post-production processing.
0
It allows you to add rich gradation to images
during post-production editing.
[Like2100(HLG)]
¢1
A setting used to record HLG format video.
[MY PHOTO STYLE
1]
¢2
to [MY PHOTO
STYLE 10]
¢2
Adjusts the image quality of Photo Style items to
your preferred settings and registers these as My
Photo Style items. (l 214)
[Standard(HLG)] Standard [HLG Photo] setting.
[Monochrome(HLG)] Black and white setting for [HLG Photo].
8. White Balance/Image Quality
210
0
In [iA] mode, operation differs from that in other recording modes.
– [Standard] or [Monochrome] can be set.
– The setting will be reset to [Standard] when the camera is switched to
another recording mode or it is turned off.
– Image quality cannot be adjusted.
0
The range of available ISO sensitivities is different when [Photo Style] is set to
the following:
– [Cinelike D2], [Cinelike V2]: Down to a lower limit of [200]
(The lower limit changes to [100] when [Extended ISO] is set.)
0
You can set the knee mode with [Like709].
For details, refer to page 260.
0
When [Filter Settings] is being used, [Photo Style] is not available.
0
You can make detailed Photo Style settings:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Photo Style Settings] (l 370)
8. White Balance/Image Quality
211
Adjusting Image Quality
1
Press 21 to select the type of Photo Style.
2
Press 34 to select an item and then
press 21 to adjust.
0
Adjusted items are indicated with [¢].
3
Press or .
0
When the image quality is adjusted, the
Photo Style icon on the recording screen is
indicated with [¢].
Settings Items (Image Quality Adjustment)
[Contrast] Adjusts the contrast in the image.
[Highlight] Adjusts the brightness of bright areas.
[Shadow] Adjusts the brightness of dark areas.
[Saturation] Adjusts the vividness of colors.
[Color Tone] Adjusts blue and yellow tints.
[Hue]
Assuming that the reference point is red, this rotates the
hue toward violet/magenta or yellow/green to adjust the
coloring of the entire image.
[Filter Effect]
[Yellow]
Enhances the contrast. (Effect: weak)
Records the sky with a clear blue.
[Orange]
Enhances the contrast. (Effect: medium)
Records the sky with a darker blue.
[Red]
Enhances the contrast. (Effect: strong)
Records the sky with a much darker blue.
[Green]
Skin and lips of people appear in natural
tones.
Green leaves appear brighter and more
enhanced.
[Off] s
6WDQGDUG
-
5
-
500
+5+5
±0
±0
±0
±0
±0
8. White Balance/Image Quality
212
¢ Available when the following is set while [MY PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO
STYLE 10] are selected:
[]
¨
[ ]
¨
[Photo Style Settings]
¨
[My Photo Style Settings]
¨
[Add
Effects]
¨
[Sensitivity]/[White Balance]
¨
[ON]
[Grain Effect]
[Low]/
[Standard]/
[High]
Sets the grain effect level.
[Off] s
[Sharpness] Adjusts the outlines in the image.
[Noise
Reduction]
Adjusts the noise reduction effect.
0
Increasing the effect may cause a slight drop in picture
resolution.
[Sensitivity]
¢
Sets the ISO sensitivity. (l 199)
[White
Balance]
¢
Sets the white balance. (l 202)
0
While [WB] is selected, press [ ] to display the
white balance setting screen.
Press [ ] again to return to the original screen.
S
8. White Balance/Image Quality
213
0
The items that you can adjust the image quality for depend on the Photo Style type.
33ss3
33ss3
33ss3
([Saturation])
3 s 3 ss
([Color Tone])
s 3 ss3
3 s 3 ss
s 3 ss3
s 3 sss
33333
33333
0
The effects of [Grain Effect] cannot be checked on the recording screen.
0
[Grain Effect] is not available when using the following functions:
– Video recording/[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
– [High Resolution Mode]
S
8. White Balance/Image Quality
214
Registering Settings in My Photo Style
1
Press 21 to select the type of Photo Style.
2
Adjust the image quality.
0
My Photo Style displays the types of Photo Style at the top of image quality
adjustment.
Select the base Photo Style.
3
Press [DISP.].
4
(When [MY PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO STYLE 10] is selected)
Press 34 to select [Save Current Setting] and then press or
.
5
Press 34 to select the registration destination number and then
press or .
0
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
On the confirmation screen, press [DISP.] to change the My Photo Style name.
Up to 22 characters may be entered. Double-byte characters are treated as 2
characters.
How to enter characters (l 415)
Changing the Registered Contents of My Photo Style
1
Select any value from [MY PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO STYLE
10].
2
Press [DISP.] and then set the item.
0
My Photo Style cannot be registered when using [HLG Photo].
[Load Preset Setting]
[Save Current Setting]
[Edit Title]
[Restore to Default]
8. White Balance/Image Quality
215
This mode records with additional image effects (filters).
You can adjust the effect for each filter.
In addition, you can simultaneously take pictures without effects.
1
Set the [Filter Effect].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Filter
Settings] ¨ [Filter Effect] ¨ [SET]
2
Select the filter.
≥Press 34 to select, and then press
or .
≥You can also select the image effect
(filter) by touching the sample
picture.
0
Press [DISP.] to switch the screen in the order of normal display, guide
display, and list display.
The guide display shows the description of each filter.
Adjusting the Filter Effect
You can adjust the filter effect.
1
Select the filter.
2
On the recording screen, press [WB].
3
Rotate , or to set.
0
To return to the recording screen, press
[WB] again.
0
When the filter effect is adjusted, the filter
icon on the recording screen is indicated
with [¢].
[Filter Settings]
1/8
8. White Balance/Image Quality
216
Filter Items that can be adjusted
[Expressive] Vividness
[Retro] Coloring
[Old Days] Contrast
[High Key] Coloring
[Low Key] Coloring
[Sepia] Contrast
[Monochrome] Coloring
[Dynamic Monochrome] Contrast
[Rough Monochrome] Grittiness
[Silky Monochrome] Defocus level
[Impressive Art] Vividness
[High Dynamic] Vividness
[Cross Process] Coloring
[Toy Effect] Coloring
[Toy Pop] Area with reduced peripheral brightness
[Bleach Bypass] Contrast
[Miniature Effect] Vividness
[Soft Focus] Defocus level
[Fantasy] Vividness
[Star Filter]
: Short rays/Long rays
: Few rays/Many rays
: Rotate to left/Rotate to right
[One Point Color] Amount of color left
[Sunshine] Coloring
8. White Balance/Image Quality
217
Setting a Filter with Touch Operation
1
To uc h [ ].
2
Touch the item to set.
[ ]: Filter on/off
[ ]: Filter
[ ]: Filter effect adjustment
0
The default settings are for the Touch Tab to not be displayed.
Set [Touch Tab] to [ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation])
menu. (l 377)
0
White balance will be fixed to [AWB] and the flash will be fixed to [Œ] (Forced
Flash Off).
0
The upper limit to ISO sensitivity is [6400].
0
When [High Dynamic] is set, the lower limit of the ISO sensitivity is fixed to
[400] and the higher limit to [6400].
0
Depending on the filter, the recording screen may seem as if frames are
missed.
0
[Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/[Sunshine]
are not available when using the following function:
– [ ] mode
0
When using APS-C lenses, [Toy Effect]/[Toy Pop] are not available.
0
When [Image Area of Video] is [APS-C] or [PIXEL/PIXEL], recording video
with [Toy Effect]/[Toy Pop] is not possible.
0
[Filter Effect] is not available when using the following functions:
– [High Resolution Mode]
– [Live View Composite]
– [Multiple Exposure]
– [Live Cropping]
0
When displaying the [Filter Effect] setting screen using the Fn button, pressing
[DISP.] displays the filter selection screen.
EXPSEXPSEXPS
EXPSEXPSEXPS
8. White Balance/Image Quality
218
Setting the Type of Defocus ([Miniature Effect])
1
Set [Filter Effect] to [Miniature Effect].
2
Press 3 to display the setting screen.
0
The setting screen can also be displayed by touching [ ] then [ ].
3
Press 34 or 21 to move the
in-focus portion.
0
You can also move the in-focus portion by
touching the screen.
0
You can also switch the defocus orientation
by touching [ ].
4
Rotate , or to change the
size of in-focus portion.
0
The portion can also be enlarged/reduced by pinching out/pinching in the
screen.
0
To reset the in-focus portion setting to the default, press [DISP.].
5
Press or to set.
0
No audio is recorded in videos.
0
When the [Switch NTSC/PAL] is set to [NTSC], the length of the video
recorded will be approx. 1/10 of the actual recording time. The displayed video
recording time will be approx. 10 times longer than the recording time
displayed during normal video recording.
When the [Switch NTSC/PAL] is set to [PAL], the length of the video recorded
will be approx. 1/8 of the actual recording time. The displayed video recording
time will be approx. 8 times longer than the recording time displayed during
normal video recording.
0
If you end video recording after a short time, the camera may go on recording
for a certain period.
8. White Balance/Image Quality
219
Setting the Color to Be Left ([One Point Color])
1
Set [Filter Effect] to [One Point Color].
2
Press 3 to display the setting screen.
0
The setting screen can also be displayed by touching [ ] then [ ].
3
Press 3421 to move the frame and
select the color you want to leave.
0
You can also select the color you want to
leave by touching the screen.
0
To return the frame back to the center,
press [DISP.].
4
Press or to set.
Setting the Light Source Position and Size ([Sunshine])
1
Set [Filter Effect] to [Sunshine].
2
Press 3 to display the setting screen.
0
The setting screen can also be displayed by touching [ ] then [ ].
3
Press 3421 to move the center
position of the light source.
0
The position of the light source can also be
moved by touching the screen.
4
Rotate , or to adjust the
size of the light source.
0
This can also be enlarged/reduced by
pinching out/pinching in the screen.
0
To reset the light source setting to the default, press [DISP.].
5
Press or .
8. White Balance/Image Quality
220
[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]
You can simultaneously take pictures with no added filter effects.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Filter Settings] ¨ Select [Simultaneous Record w/
o Filter]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
0
[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] is not available when using the following
functions:
– Burst recording
– [6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation]
–[RAWiFINE]/[RAWiSTD.]/[RAW] ([Picture Quality])
– [Bracketing]
8. White Balance/Image Quality
221
This merges pictures with a high resolution from multiple recorded images.
This function is suitable for recording subjects that do not move.
The picture after merging can be saved in RAW or JPEG format.
1
Set [High Resolution Mode].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [High
Resolution Mode]
2
Set the recording settings.
[High Resolution Mode]
0
Use a tripod to minimize camera shake.
0
The image stabilization function is automatically turned off.
[Start] Starts High Resolution mode.
[Picture Size]
Sets the image size after merging.
When the [Aspect Ratio] is [4:3].
[XL] (85 M): 10656k8000
[LL] (42.5 M): 7552k5664
When the [Aspect Ratio] is [3:2].
[XL] (96 M): 12000k8000
[LL] (48 M): 8496k5664
When the [Aspect Ratio] is [16:9].
[XL] (81 M): 12000k6736
[LL] (40.5 M): 8496k4784
When the [Aspect Ratio] is [1:1].
[XL] (64 M): 8000k8000
[LL] (32 M): 5664k5664
0
RAW images are always recorded in the [3:2]
(12000k8000) aspect ratio.
8. White Balance/Image Quality
222
3
Start High Resolution mode.
≥Select [Start] and then press or
.
[Picture Quality]
Set the compression rate at which the pictures are to be
stored.
[COMBINED]/[FINE]/[RAWiFINE]/[RAW]
0
When set to [COMBINED], recording is with the same
settings as [Picture Quality] in the [Photo] ([Image
Quality]) menu. (However, [STD.] changes to [FINE].)
[Simul Record
Normal Shot]
Simultaneously takes pictures that are not merged when
[ON] is set. The first picture will be saved with [Picture
Size] set to [L].
[Shutter Delay]
Sets the delay time from when the shutter button is
pressed until the shutter is released.
[30 SEC]/[15 SEC]/[8 SEC]/[4 SEC]/[2 SEC]/[1 SEC]/
[1/2 SEC]/[1/4 SEC]/[1/8 SEC]/[Off]
[Motion Blur
Processing]
Sets the correction method to use when the subject
moved.
[MODE1]: This gives priority to High Resolution mode,
therefore subject blur appears as an afterimage in the
picture.
[MODE2]: This reduces afterimage from subject blur, but
cannot obtain the same High Resolution mode effect in
the corrected range.
8. White Balance/Image Quality
223
4
Decide on the composition
and then fix the camera in
place.
0
If blurring is detected, the High
Resolution mode icon A blinks.
5
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
0
With the default settings, [Shutter Delay]
is activated, so there will be a gap in time
from when the shutter button is pressed
until the shutter is released.
0
The screen goes dark during recording.
0
The recording state indication (red) B
blinks.
Do not move the camera while it is blinking.
0
You can continue recording when the merging process ends.
6
End [High Resolution Mode].
≥Press [Q].
次の撮影
8. White Balance/Image Quality
224
0
In [High Resolution Mode], recording will be performed using the following
settings:
– [Shutter Type]: [ELEC.] (When [Long Exposure NR] is set to [OFF])/
[ELEC.+NR] (When [Long Exposure NR] is set to [ON])
– Minimum aperture value: F16
– Shutter speed: 8 seconds to 1/8000 of a second
– ISO sensitivity: Upper limit to [3200]
– Focus mode: [AFS]/[MF]
0
When you record in an extremely bright location or under lighting such as
fluorescent or LED lighting, the coloring or brightness of the image may
change or horizontal stripes may appear on the screen.
Lowering the shutter speed may reduce the effect of horizontal stripes.
0
Devices other than this camera may not be able to play back images recorded
using [High Resolution Mode].
0
When the following functions are being used, [High Resolution Mode] is not
available:
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation]
– [Filter Settings]
– [Live View Composite]
– [Multiple Exposure]
0
When using APS-C lenses, recording in [High Resolution Mode] is not
possible.
8. White Balance/Image Quality
225
Records an HLG format picture with a wide dynamic range. Bright lights
that are easily overexposed, and dark areas that are easily underexposed
can be recorded showing fine quality and rich colors just as seen with the
human eyes.
Recorded pictures can be output over HDMI to devices (TV, etc.) that
support HLG format pictures for viewing.
Additionally, devices that support the HSP format can directly play back
images.
0
“HLG (Hybrid Log Gamma)” is an international standard (ITU-R BT.2100) HDR
format.
0
“HSP” is an HDR picture format using HLG format video technology. These images
are saved with a “.HSP” file extension.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [HLG Photo]
0
[Photo Style] can be selected from [Standard(HLG)] or [Monochrome(HLG)]. (l 208)
0
JPEG images and RAW images are recorded simultaneously in accordance with
[Picture Quality] (l 86) and [Picture Size] (l 85).
RAW images recorded with [HLG Photo] can be saved in the HLG format by using
[RAW Processing]. (l 312)
ISO Sensitivity When [HLG Photo] Is Set
The lower limit of available ISO sensitivities will become [400].
[HLG Photo]
Setting
items
[Aspect Ratio]
[4:3] [3:2] [16:9] [1:1] [65:24] [2:1]
[Full-Res.]
5312
k
3984 5984
k
4000 5888
k
3312 4000
k
4000
ss
[4K-Res.]
2880
k
2160 3232
k
2160 3840
k
2160 2144
k
2144
ss
[OFF] s
8. White Balance/Image Quality
226
0
The monitor and viewfinder on this camera do not support display of HLG
format images.
In the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu, you can display the images
converted for monitoring on the monitor/viewfinder of this camera with
[Monitor] in [HLG View Assist]. (l 282)
0
HLG images appear darker on devices that do not support the HLG format.
With [HDMI] in [HLG View Assist] in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)])
menu, you can set the conversion method for images displayed for
monitoring. (l 282)
0
When using APS-C lenses, [Full-Res.] cannot be used.
0
When the following functions are being used, [HLG Photo] is not available:
– [6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
– [High Resolution Mode]
– [Filter Settings]
– [Live View Composite]
– [Multiple Exposure]
227
9.
Flash
If you attach the Flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L:
optional) to the hot shoe, you can record using the flash.
Furthermore, by attaching an external flash that supports wireless flash
recording, you can wirelessly control an external flash that is in a position
separate from the camera.
Removing the Hot Shoe Cover
Before attaching the Flash (optional), remove the hot shoe cover.
Refer to the operating instructions for the Flash for details about how to
attach it.
Remove the hot shoe cover by
pulling it in the direction indicated
by arrow 2 while pressing it in the
direction indicated by arrow 1.
Using an External Flash (Optional)
0
Remove the lens hood to prevent vignetting.
0
Flash recording is not possible when the following functions are being used:
– [6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
– [ELEC.]/[Silent Mode]/[High Resolution Mode]
– [Filter Settings]
9. Flash
228
Notes on Flash Recording
0
Do not bring any object near the flash. Heat or light may cause the object to
deform or discolor.
0
If you record repeatedly, time may be needed to charge the flash.
While the flash is charging, images will be recorded without the flash firing.
0
When an external flash is attached, do not carry the camera by holding only
the external flash. It may become detached.
0
When using a commercially available external flash, do not use one with
reversed polarity or function for communicating with a camera.
It may cause the camera to malfunction, or it may not operate correctly.
0
Refer to the operating instructions for the external flash for details.
9. Flash
229
You can set the flash function to control flash firing from the camera.
[Flash Mode]
Sets the flash mode.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Flash
Mode]
Setting Flash
[‰]
(Forced Flash
On)
The flash fires every time regardless of the recording
conditions.
This is suitable for recording when there is backlighting
or under lighting such as fluorescent lighting.
[]
(Forced On/
Red-Eye)
[](Slow Sync.)
When recording images against a nightscape, this will
slow the shutter speed when the flash fires to make not
only the subject but also the nightscape appear
brighter.
0
Slower shutter speeds may result in blurry images.
To avoid this, we recommend using a tripod.
[]
(Slow Sync./
Red-Eye)
[Œ]
(Forced Flash
Off)
The flash does not fire.
9. Flash
230
Available Flash Settings by Recording Mode
The available flash settings depend on the recording mode.
(3: Available, —: Not available)
0
The flash fires twice.
The interval between the first and second firings is longer when [ ] or
[ ] is set. The subject should not move until the second firing has finished.
0
[ ] and [ ] cannot be used when the following are set:
– [Firing Mode]: [MANUAL]
– [Flash Synchro]: [2ND]
– [Wireless]: [ON]
0
Some flash modes may not be available depending on the settings on the
external flash.
0
The effectiveness of red-eye reduction varies from person to person.
The effect, which is influenced by factors such as distance to the subject and
whether the subject is looking at the camera when the preliminary flash is
fired, may not be very noticeable in some cases.
Recording
mode
[‰] [] [] [] [Œ]
[P]/[A] 33333
[S]/[M] 33—— 3
0
[ ] and [Œ] can be set in [iA] mode. In [ ], the flash mode switches to
one suited to the recording situation.
9. Flash
231
Shutter Speeds for Flash Modes
¢1 In [S] mode, this will be 60 seconds and in [M] mode it will be [B] (Bulb).
¢2 The maximum setting changes to 1/200 of a second in [P]/[A] modes.
0
The guide number decreases when the shutter speed is set to 1/250 of a second.
[Red-Eye Removal]
When [Flash Mode] is set to [ ] or [ ], the camera automatically
detects red-eye and corrects image data.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Red-Eye Removal]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
[Flash Mode] Shutter speed (sec.)
[‰]
1/60
¢1
to 1/250
¢2
[]
[]
1 to 1/200
[]
0
When [ON] is set, [ ] is displayed on the flash icon.
0
Red-eye cannot be corrected depending on its appearance.
0
When [HLG Photo] is being used, [Red-Eye Removal] is not available.
9. Flash
232
[Firing Mode]/[Manual Flash Adjust.]
You can select whether to set the flash output automatically or manually.
1
Set the [Firing Mode].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨
[Firing Mode]
2
(When set to [MANUAL])
Select [Manual Flash Adjust.]
and then press or .
0
The settings made here are enabled when some flashes from other
manufacturers are attached.
Set on the flash when a Flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L:
optional) is attached.
[TTL] Sets flash output to be set automatically by the camera.
[MANUAL]
Sets the flash output manually.
0
With [TTL], you can record the images you want even
when recording dark scenes where the flash output
tends to become greater.
0
The flash output ([1/1], etc.) is displayed on the flash
icon of the recording screen.
9. Flash
233
3
Press 21 to set the flash
output and then press or
.
0
It can be set within the range of [1/1] (full
flash output) to [1/128] in 1/3 steps.
[Flash Adjust.]
You can adjust the flash output when taking pictures with the flash in TTL
output mode.
1
Select [Flash Adjust.].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨
[Flash Adjust.]
2
Press 21 to adjust the flash
output and then press or
.
0
It can be adjusted within the range of [j3
EV] to [i3 EV] in 1/3 EV steps.
0
[ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
0
For information about adjusting the flash output when recording using a
wireless flash, refer to page 238.
0
[Flash Adjust.] cannot be used when the following are set:
– [Firing Mode]: [MANUAL]
– [Wireless]: [ON]
9. Flash
234
[Flash Synchro]
When a moving subject is recorded at night using a slow shutter and flash,
a trail of light may appear in front of the subject.
If you set [Flash Synchro] to [2ND], you can take a dynamic picture with a
trail of light appearing behind the subject by firing the flash immediately
before the shutter closes.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Flash
Synchro]
[1ST]
This is the normal method for recording
with the Flash.
[2ND]
The light source appears behind the
subject and the picture becomes
dynamic.
0
When [2ND] is set, [2nd] is displayed on the flash icon of the recording screen.
0
When the following functions are being used, the setting is fixed to [1ST]:
– [Wireless]
– [Live View Composite]
0
The effect may not be adequately achieved at faster shutter speeds.
9. Flash
235
[Auto Exposure Comp.]
Automatically adjust the flash output in conjunction with the exposure
compensation value. (l 196)
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Auto Exposure Comp.]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
9. Flash
236
You can use a Flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L:
optional) to record using a wireless flash.
You can separately control the firing of three flash groups and the flash
attached to the hot shoe of the camera.
Placing a Wireless Flash
Place the wireless flash with its wireless sensor facing the camera.
Recording Using a Wireless Flash
Placement example
When C is placed to erase the
shadow in the background of the
subject that the flash groups A and
B will create
Placement range
When DMW-FL360L is attached
D 5.0 m (16 feet)
E 7.0 m (23 feet)
0
The placement range serves as a guide for when recording with the camera
held horizontally. The range differs depending on the surrounding
environment.
0
We recommend using a maximum of three wireless flashes in each group.
0
If the subject is too close, communication light may affect the exposure.
You can reduce the effect by setting [Communication Light] to [LOW] or
lowering the output with a diffuser or similar device. (l 239)
50°
50°
50°
50°
30°
30°
30°
30°
9. Flash
237
1
Attach an external flash to the
camera. (l 227)
2
Set the wireless flashes to
[RC] mode and then place
them.
0
Set the channel and group for the
wireless flashes.
3
Enable the wireless flash
function of the camera.
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Wireless]
¨ [ON]
4
Set [Wireless Channel].
0
Select the same channel as on the
wireless flash side.
5
Set [Wireless Setup].
0
Set the firing mode and flash output.
9. Flash
238
Setting Items ([Wireless Setup])
0
To fire a test flash, press [DISP.].
¢1 This cannot be selected when [Wireless FP] is set.
¢2 This cannot be set when using the Flash (DMW-FL200L: optional).
[External
Flash]
¢1
[Firing
Mode]
[TTL]: The camera automatically sets the flash output.
[AUTO]
¢2
: Sets the flash output on the external flash
side.
[MANUAL]: Sets the flash output of the external flash
manually.
[OFF]: The external flash outputs only communication
light.
[Flash
Adjust.]
Adjusts the flash output of the external flash manually
when [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL].
[Manual
Flash
Adjust.]
Sets the flash output of the external flash when [Firing
Mode] is set to [MANUAL].
0
It can be set within the range of [1/1] (full flash output)
to [1/128] in 1/3 steps.
[A Group]/
[B Group]/
[C Group]
[Firing
Mode]
[TTL]: The camera automatically sets the flash output.
[AUTO]
¢1
: Sets the flash output on the wireless flash
side.
[MANUAL]: Sets the flash output of the wireless flash
manually.
[OFF]: The wireless flashes of the specified group will
not fire.
[Flash
Adjust.]
Adjusts the flash output of the wireless flash manually
when [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL].
[Manual
Flash
Adjust.]
Sets the flash output of the wireless flash when [Firing
Mode] is set to [MANUAL].
0
It can be set within the range of [1/1] (full flash output)
to [1/128] in 1/3 steps.
9. Flash
239
[Wireless FP]
The external flash performs FP firing (repeated high-speed firing of the
flash) during wireless recording, enabling recording using the Flash even
at fast shutter speeds.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Wireless FP]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
[Communication Light]
Set the strength of communication light.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Communication Light]
Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]
240
10.
Recording Videos
It is possible with this camera to record video in 2 recording file formats,
MP4 and MOV, to a maximum resolution of 4K.
It is also compatible with both the NTSC and PAL TV broadcast systems.
[ ] mode (Creative Video mode) and [S&Q] mode (Slow & Quick mode)
are recording modes specifically for video.
In the [S&Q] mode, you can record smooth slow motion video and quick
motion video by changing the frame rate.
1
Start recording.
≥Press the video rec. button.
0
Release the video rec. button right after
you press it.
2
Stop recording.
≥Press the video rec. button again.
Recording Videos
10. Recording Videos
241
Screen Displays While Video Recording
The live view angle of view changes to the
angle of view for video recording, and video
recording time A and elapsed recording
time B are displayed.
0
“h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for minute
and “s” for second.
0
The recording state indication
C
and card
access indication
D
turn red while videos are
being recorded.
Exposure Control While Video Recording
Videos will be recorded using the aperture, shutter speed, and ISO
sensitivity settings below.
0
If maintaining focus on the subject is difficult during video recording with AF,
press the shutter button halfway to re-adjust the focus.
Recording
mode
Aperture value/shutter speed/ISO sensitivity
[iA]
The camera automatically makes the settings to suit the scene.
(l 78)
[P]/[A]/[S]/[M]
The settings vary depending on the [Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M]
in the [Custom] ([Image Quality]) menu. The default setting is
[ON]. (l 372)
[ON]: Records with values set automatically by the camera.
[OFF]: Records with manually set values.
[]/[S&Q]Records with manually set values.
24
m
59
s
24
m
59
s
24
m
59
s
3
s
3
s
3
s
10. Recording Videos
242
Size Interval for Dividing Files
[Rec. File Format] [Rec Quality] Size interval for dividing files
[MP4]
[FHD]
A new file will be created to continue
recording if the continuous recording
time exceeds 30 minutes or the file size
exceeds 4 GB.
[4K]
When using an SDHC memory card:
A new file will be created to continue
recording if the continuous recording
time exceeds 30 minutes or the file size
exceeds 4 GB.
[MOV] All
When using an SDXC memory card:
A new file will be created to continue
recording if the continuous recording
time exceeds 3 hours and 4 minutes or
the file size exceeds 96 GB.
10. Recording Videos
243
0
If an operation such as a zoom or button operation is performed during video
recording, that operation sound may be recorded.
0
The lens operation sound (AF and image stabilizer) may be recorded to video.
0
If the operation sound of pressing the video rec. button to end recording
bothers you, try the following:
– Record the video about 3 seconds longer, and then divide the last part of the
video using [Video Divide] in the [Playback] ([Edit Image]) menu.
– Use the Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2: optional) for recording.
0
Depending on the type of card, the card access indication may appear for a
while after video recording. This is not a malfunction.
0
Even when playback is performed on a supported device, situations may
occur where image or sound quality is poor, recording information is not
displayed correctly, or playback is not possible, for example.
If you experience any of these, play them back on the camera.
0
If the temperature of the camera rises, [ ] may be displayed, recording may
stop, and some functions may become unavailable temporarily. Wait until the
camera cools down.
0
Video recording is not possible while you are using the following functions:
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation]
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/
[Sunshine] ([Filter Settings])
– [HLG Photo]
– [Post-Focus]
0
The available recording time can be displayed during recording standby:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Photos/Videos Remaining] (l 389)
0
You can switch the live view angle of view to the angle of view for video
recording:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Photo/Video Preview] (l 388)
0
You can display a red frame on the recording screen that indicates that video
is being recorded:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Red REC Frame Indicator] (l 393)
10. Recording Videos
244
[ ] mode (Creative Video mode) and [S&Q] mode (Slow & Quick mode)
are recording modes specifically for video.
In the [S&Q] mode, you can record smooth slow motion video and quick
motion video by changing the frame rate.
In the recording modes specifically for video, you can start and stop video
recording with the shutter button.
Change the exposure and audio settings with touch operation to prevent
operation sounds from being recorded.
Settings such as exposure and white balance can be changed
independent of picture taking settings.
Recording Modes Specifically for Video
(Creative Video/S&Q)
10. Recording Videos
245
Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos
1
Set the mode dial to [ ] or
[S&Q].
2
Set the exposure mode.
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Exposure
Mode] ¨ [P]/[A]/[S]/[M]
0
You can perform the same exposure
operations as the [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes.
3
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
4
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button A or video
rec. button B.
5
Stop recording.
≥Press the shutter button or video
rec. button again.
0
Refer to “Slow & Quick Video” on page 269 for information about slow motion
video and quick motion video recording.
10. Recording Videos
246
Operations During Video Recording
You can change the exposure and other settings with touch operations to
prevent operation sounds from being recorded.
1
Touch [ ] or [ ].
2
Touch an icon.
¢1 This setting is available only in [ ] mode.
¢2 This setting is available only in [S&Q] mode. (The setting cannot be changed
during recording)
3
Drag the slide bar to set the item.
0
If you touch icon A, the screen of Step
2
is redisplayed.
0
With the default settings, the Touch Tab is not displayed.
Set [Touch Tab] to [ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation])
menu. (l 377)
Aperture value ISO sensitivity
Shutter speed
¢1
Sound recording level
adjustment
Exposure
compensation
¢2
Slow & Quick setting
[ ]/[ ]: Changes the setting slowly.
[ ]/[ ]: Changes the setting quickly.
F
ISO
SS
10. Recording Videos
247
Separating Settings for Recording Video and Pictures
In default settings, settings such as exposure and white balance changed
in [ ]/[S&Q] mode are also reflected in picture recording in [P]/[A]/[S]/
[M] modes.
From the [CreativeVideo Combined Set.] menu, you can separate settings
for video recording and for picture recording.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [CreativeVideo Combined Set.]
[F/SS/ISO/Exposure
Comp.]
[]:
The recording settings are
linked across recording modes.
[White Balance]
[Photo Style]
[]:
Recording settings can be
separated by the [ ]/[S&Q]
mode and the [P]/[A]/[S]/[M]
mode.
[Metering Mode]
[AF Mode]
0
The [iA] mode uses the optimum recording settings for the camera
automatically, so the recording settings will be independent, irrespective of the
settings made with this function.
10. Recording Videos
248
This section describes the settings used when video recording.
[Switch NTSC/PAL]
The image qualities you can select in [Rec Quality] are switched to the
image qualities with the frame rate to suit the NTSC/PAL TV broadcast
system.
The default setting is for the frame rate to be set to suit the TV broadcast
system for the region where the camera was purchased.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Switch NTSC/PAL]
Video Recording Settings
0
In “4. Image Recording”, the functions described work with both pictures and
video.
Please also refer to that section.
– [Double Card Slot Function]: l 88
– [Folder / File Settings]: l 89
– [File Number Reset]: l 91
[NTSC] The image qualities for NTSC can be selected in [Rec Quality].
[PAL] The image qualities for PAL can be selected in [Rec Quality].
0
If you record using the setting that differs from the broadcasting system of
your region, it may not be possible for you to properly play back videos on
your TV.
We recommend using the setting as it was at the time of purchase if you are
unsure about broadcasting systems.
10. Recording Videos
249
[Rec. File Format]
Sets the recording file format of videos to be recorded.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Rec. File Format]
[Image Area of Video]
Set the image area during video recording. The angle of view differs
depending on the image area. Narrowing the image area allows you to
achieve a telescopic effect without image deterioration.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Image Area of Video]
[MP4] This file format is suitable for playback on PCs.
[MOV] This file format is suitable for image editing.
Item Settings details
Angle of
view
Telescopic
effect
[FULL]
Recording is within the area suited to
the image circle of a full-frame lens.
Wide
Narrow
None
High
[APS-C]
Records using a range corresponding
to the APS-C lens image circle.
[PIXEL/PIXEL]
Records with one pixel on the sensor,
which is equal to one pixel of the
video.
Records a range corresponding to the
resolution range in [Rec Quality].
(l 250)
10. Recording Videos
250
0
To check the image area in recording modes other than [ ]/[S&Q] mode, set
[Photo/Video Preview] to [ ]. (l 388)
0
It is not possible to set to [FULL] in the following cases.
– When a 4K/60p or 4K/50p [Rec Quality] is set
– When set to [Anamorphic(4:3)]
– When using APS-C lenses
0
When set to [Live Cropping], the setting is fixed to [FULL]. However, the setting is
fixed to [APS-C] in the following case:
– When a 60p or 50p [Rec Quality] is set
Image area (Ex.: FHD video)
[Rec Quality]
Sets the image quality of videos to be recorded.
The image qualities you can select depend on the [Switch NTSC/PAL] and
[Rec. File Format] settings.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Rec Quality]
0
To record video with a bit rate of 72 Mbps or more, you require a card with the
corresponding Speed Class.
For information about the cards that can be used, refer to page 25.
0
You can set the recording quality for anamorphic recordings made with an aspect
ratio of 4:3 in the [Anamorphic(4:3)] menu. (l 284)
FULL
APS-C
PIXEL/PIXEL
10. Recording Videos
251
[Rec. File Format]: [MP4]
0
Audio format: AAC (2ch)
A Recording frame rate
B Bit rate (Mbps)
C Video compression format (HEVC: H.265/HEVC, AVC: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC)
¢ Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 30 minutes.
[Switch NTSC/PAL]: [NTSC]
[Rec Quality] Resolution
YUV/bit A B C
[4K/10bit/100M/60p]
¢
3840k2160 4:2:0/10 bit 59.94p 100 HEVC
[4K/8bit/100M/30p] 3840k2160 4:2:0/8 bit 29.97p 100 AVC
[4K/10bit/72M/30p]
¢
3840k2160 4:2:0/10 bit 29.97p 72 HEVC
[4K/8bit/100M/24p] 3840k2160 4:2:0/8 bit 23.98p 100 AVC
[4K/10bit/72M/24p]
¢
3840k2160 4:2:0/10 bit 23.98p 72 HEVC
[FHD/8bit/28M/60p] 1920k1080 4:2:0/8 bit 59.94p 28 AVC
[FHD/8bit/20M/30p] 1920k1080 4:2:0/8 bit 29.97p 20 AVC
[FHD/8bit/24M/24p] 1920k1080 4:2:0/8 bit 23.98p 24 AVC
[Switch NTSC/PAL]: [PAL]
[Rec Quality] Resolution
YUV/bit A B C
[4K/10bit/100M/50p]
¢
3840k2160 4:2:0/10 bit 50.00p 100 HEVC
[4K/8bit/100M/25p] 3840k2160 4:2:0/8 bit 25.00p 100 AVC
[4K/10bit/72M/25p]
¢
3840k2160 4:2:0/10 bit 25.00p 72 HEVC
[FHD/8bit/28M/50p] 1920k1080 4:2:0/8 bit 50.00p 28 AVC
[FHD/8bit/20M/25p] 1920k1080 4:2:0/8 bit 25.00p 20 AVC
10. Recording Videos
252
[Rec. File Format]: [MOV]
0
Audio format: LPCM (2ch)
A Recording frame rate
B Bit rate (Mbps)
C Video compression format (HEVC: H.265/HEVC, AVC: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC)
¢ Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 30 minutes.
[Switch NTSC/PAL]: [NTSC]
[Rec Quality] Resolution
YUV/bit A B C
[4K/60p/420/10-L]
¢
3840k2160 4:2:0/10 bit 59.94p
200 HEVC
[4K/60p/420/8-L]
¢
3840k2160 4:2:0/8 bit 59.94p
150 AVC
[4K/30p/422/10-L]
¢
3840k2160 4:2:2/10 bit 29.97p
150 AVC
[4K/30p/420/8-L] 3840k2160 4:2:0/8 bit 29.97p
100 AVC
[4K/24p/422/10-L]
¢
3840k2160 4:2:2/10 bit 23.98p
150 AVC
[4K/24p/420/8-L] 3840k2160 4:2:0/8 bit 23.98p
100 AVC
[FHD/60p/422/10-L] 1920k1080 4:2:2/10 bit 59.94p
100 AVC
[FHD/60p/420/8-L] 1920k1080 4:2:0/8 bit 59.94p
100 AVC
[FHD/30p/422/10-L] 1920k1080 4:2:2/10 bit 29.97p
100 AVC
[FHD/30p/420/8-L] 1920k1080 4:2:0/8 bit 29.97p
100 AVC
[FHD/24p/422/10-L] 1920k1080 4:2:2/10 bit 23.98p
100 AVC
[FHD/24p/420/8-L] 1920k1080 4:2:0/8 bit 23.98p
100 AVC
[Switch NTSC/PAL]: [PAL]
[Rec Quality] Resolution
YUV/bit A B C
[4K/50p/420/10-L]
¢
3840k2160 4:2:0/10 bit 50.00p
200 HEVC
[4K/50p/420/8-L]
¢
3840k2160 4:2:0/8 bit 50.00p
150 AVC
[4K/25p/422/10-L]
¢
3840k2160 4:2:2/10 bit 25.00p
150 AVC
[4K/25p/420/8-L] 3840k2160 4:2:0/8 bit 25.00p
100 AVC
[FHD/50p/422/10-L] 1920k1080 4:2:2/10 bit 50.00p
100 AVC
[FHD/50p/420/8-L] 1920k1080 4:2:0/8 bit 50.00p
100 AVC
[FHD/25p/422/10-L] 1920k1080 4:2:2/10 bit 25.00p
100 AVC
[FHD/25p/420/8-L] 1920k1080 4:2:0/8 bit 25.00p
100 AVC
10. Recording Videos
253
0
In this document, videos are indicated as follows according to their resolution:
– 4K (3840k2160) video: 4K video
– Full High Definition (1920k1080) video: FHD video
0
All videos will be recorded using Long GOP to compress the images.
0
Since the camera employs the VBR recording format, the bit rate is changed
automatically depending on the subject to record. As a result, video recording
time is shortened when a fast-moving subject is recorded.
0
When using the following function, you can only select 8-bit FHD video:
– [Miniature Effect] ([Filter Settings])
10. Recording Videos
254
When video is recorded in the MOV format, the hour, minute, seconds, and
number of frames information (time code) is recorded automatically.
The time code is used to synchronize multiple image and audio sources.
0
The time code is not recorded with video in the MP4 format.
Setting the Time Code
Sets the recording, display, and output of the time code.
1
Set [Rec. File Format] to
[MOV].
≥
¨
[ ]
¨
[ ]
¨
[Rec. File
Format]
¨
[MOV]
2
Select [Time Code].
≥
¨
[ ]
¨
[ ]
¨
[Time Code]
Time Code
[Time Code
Display]
Displays the time code on the recording screen/playback screen.
[Count Up]
[REC RUN]
Counts the time code only when recording
videos.
[FREE RUN]
Counts the time code also when video
recording is stopped and when the camera is
turned off.
10. Recording Videos
255
[Time Code
Value]
[Reset]
Sets to 00:00:00:00 (hour: minute: second:
frame)
[Manual Input]
Manually input hour, minute, second and
frame.
[Current Time]
Sets hour, minute and second to current time
and sets frame to 00.
[Time Code
Mode]
[DF]
Drop Frame. The camera modifies the
difference between recorded time and time
code.
0
Seconds and frames are separated by “.”.
(Example: 00:00:00.00)
[NDF]
Non-Drop Frame. Records the time code
without drop frame.
0
Seconds and frames are separated by “:”.
(Example: 00:00:00:00)
0
When the following functions are being used, [Time Code Mode]
is fixed to [NDF]:
– [PAL] ([Switch NTSC/PAL])
– 24p [Rec Quality]
[HDMI Time
Code Output]
Time code information is added to images output via HDMI when
recording with the [ ] mode.
0
The time code can also be output via HDMI by setting the mode
dial to [ ] during playback. In the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu,
set [HDMI Mode (Playback)] in [TV Connection] to [AUTO].
(l 401)
0
The device screen may go dark depending on the connected
device.
10. Recording Videos
256
This section describes the use of AF when video recording.
[Continuous AF]
You can select how to set the focus in AF when recording videos.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Continuous AF]
Using AF (Video)
0
In “5. Focus/Zoom”, the functions described work with both pictures and video.
Please also refer to that section.
– Selecting the Focus Mode: l 93
– Selecting the AF Mode: l 100
– AF Area Movement Operation: l 115
– Record Using MF: l 120
– Recording with Zoom: l 124
[MODE1]
The camera continues to automatically focus only during
recording.
[MODE2]
The camera automatically keeps focusing on subjects during
recording standby and during recording.
0
The camera can keep focusing during recording standby when
any of the following are set:
– [ ] mode
– [S&Q] mode
– [Photo/Video Preview] in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display])
menu is set to [ ]
[OFF] The camera maintains the focus point at the start of recording.
10. Recording Videos
257
0
In the [iA] mode, the camera automatically keeps focusing during recording
standby, irrespective of the [Continuous AF] setting.
0
Depending on the recording conditions or lens used, the AF operation sound
may be recorded during video recording.
If the operation sound bothers you, we recommend recording with
[Continuous AF] set to [OFF].
0
If the zoom is operated while recording videos, the subject may take a while to
come into focus.
0
When the following function is being used, [MODE1] switches to [MODE2]:
– HDMI output
0
[MODE2] does not work during recording standby in the following cases:
– In preview mode
– In low light situations
10. Recording Videos
258
[AF Custom Setting(Video)]
You can fine-adjust the focusing method for video recording using
[Continuous AF].
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [AF Custom Setting(Video)]
[ON] Enables the following settings.
[OFF] Disables the following settings.
[SET]
[AF Speed]
[r] side: Focus moves at a faster speed.
[s] side: Focus moves at a slower speed.
[AF Sensitivity]
[r] side: When the distance to the subject changes
significantly, the camera immediately readjusts the
focus.
[s] side: When the distance to the subject changes
significantly, the camera waits for a little before
readjusting the focus.
10. Recording Videos
259
This section describes the brightness and coloring settings used during
video recording.
[Luminance Level]
You can set the luminance range to suit the purpose of video recording.
You can set to [16-235] or [16-255], the standard for video, or to [0-255],
which covers the entire range of luminance, the same as pictures.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Luminance Level]
Settings: [0-255]/[16-235]/[16-255]
Video Brightness and Coloring
0
In “7. Metering/Exposure/ISO Sensitivity” and “8. White Balance/Image
Quality”, the functions described work with both pictures and video.
Please also refer to those sections.
– [Metering Mode]: l 184
– Exposure Compensation: l 196
– Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): l 198
– ISO Sensitivity: l 199
– White Balance (WB): l 202
– [Photo Style]: l 208
– [Filter Settings]: l 215
0
When set to a 10-bit [Rec Quality], the setting items change to [0-1023],
[64-940], and [64-1023].
0
When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log], this is fixed to [0-255] ([0-1023]).
0
When [Photo Style] is set to [Like2100(HLG)], this is fixed to [64-940].
10. Recording Videos
260
Recording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee)
When [Photo Style] is set to [Like709], you can adjust the knee so that
recording can be performed with minimal overexposure.
1
Set [Photo Style] to [Like709].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Photo
Style] ¨ [Like709]
2
Press [Q].
±0
±0
/LNH
10. Recording Videos
261
3
Select a knee setting.
≥Press 21 to select a setting item.
4
Confirm your selection.
≥Press or .
[AUTO]
Adjusts the compression levels of high-luminance areas
automatically.
[MANUAL]
You can set the luminance where compression starts
(knee master point) and the intensity of compression
(knee master slope).
Press 34 to select an item and then press 21 to
adjust.
[POINT]: Knee master point
[SLOPE]: Knee master slope
0
Rotate to adjust the knee master point, and
to adjust the knee master slope.
0
Values within the following ranges can be set:
– Knee master point: 80.0 to 107.0
– Knee master slope: 0 to 99
[Off] —
$872
10. Recording Videos
262
[ISO Sensitivity (video)]
Sets the lower and upper limits for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is
set to [AUTO].
1
Set the mode dial to [ ] or
[S&Q].
2
Set [ISO Sensitivity (video)].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨
[ISO Sensitivity (video)]
Setting Items ([ISO Sensitivity (video)])
[ISO Auto Lower Limit
Setting]
Sets the lower limit for ISO sensitivity when ISO
sensitivity is [AUTO].
0
Set in the range between [100] and [25600].
[ISO Auto Upper Limit
Setting]
Sets the upper limit for ISO sensitivity when ISO
sensitivity is [AUTO].
0
Set to [AUTO] or in the range between [200] and
[51200].
10. Recording Videos
263
This section describes the audio settings used when video recording.
Displaying the [Audio] menu.
≥ ¨ [ ] [Video] menu ¨ [ ] [Audio]
Audio Settings
[Sound Rec
Level Disp.]
The sound recording level is displayed on the recording screen.
0
When [Sound Rec Level Limiter] is set to [OFF], [Sound Rec
Level Disp.] is fixed to [ON].
[Sound Rec
Level Adj.]
Manually adjust the sound recording level.
Press 21 to adjust the sound recording level and then press
or .
[MUTE]/[j12dB] to [i6dB]
0
You can adjust by 1 dB increments.
0
Displayed dB values are approximate.
0
When set to [MUTE], [ ] is displayed in the recording screen.
[Sound Rec
Level Limiter]
The sound recording level is adjusted automatically to minimize
sound distortion (crackling noise).
[Wind Noise
Canceller]
This reduces the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone
while maintaining sound quality.
[HIGH]: This effectively reduces the wind noise by reducing the
low-pitched sound when a strong wind is detected.
[STANDARD]: This reduces wind noise without loss of sound
quality by filtering out only wind noise.
[OFF]: Turns the function off.
0
You may not see the full effect depending on the recording
conditions.
0
This function works only with the built-in microphone.
When an external microphone is connected, [Wind Cut] is
displayed. (l 295)
10. Recording Videos
264
This section describes the main assist functions that are convenient when
recording.
[Waveform Monitor]
You can display in the recording screen a waveform.
You can check detailed information about the brightness.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ] or
[S&Q].
2
Set [Waveform Monitor].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Waveform
Monitor] ¨ [ON]
Main Assist Functions
0
The [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu has display assist functions
such as the center marker.
For details, refer to page 392.
10. Recording Videos
265
3
Select the position to display.
≥Press 3421 to select and then
press or .
0
You can also move using touch
operations.
0
To return the waveform or vector scope
position back to the center, press [DISP.].
Screen Displays
The range between 0 and 100 shows dotted lines at intervals of 10.
¢ Dotted line
Display example)
0
The waveform displayed on the camera indicates the luminance as values based on
the conversions below:
0 % (IRE): Luminance value 16 (8-bit)
100 % (IRE): Luminance value 235 (8-bit)
0
You can also change the position by dragging on the recording screen.
0
Waveforms cannot be output over HDMI.
(%, IRE (Institute of Radio Engineers))
109
100
50
0
4
10. Recording Videos
266
[Luminance Spot Meter]
Specify any spot on the subject to measure the luminance over a small
area.
1
Set [Luminance Spot Meter].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Luminance
Spot Meter] ¨ [ON]
2
Select the position where you
want to measure the
luminance.
≥Press 3421 to select and then
press or .
A Luminance value
0
You can also change the position by
dragging the frame on the recording
screen.
0
To return the position back to the center, press [DISP.].
Measurement Range
Measuring is possible in the range j7 % to 109 % (IRE).
0
When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log], this can be measured with “Stop” units.
(Calculated as “0 Stop”=42 % (IRE))
65%
65%
65%
10. Recording Videos
267
[Zebra Pattern]
Parts that are brighter than the base value are displayed with stripes.
You can also set the base value and the breadth of the range so that the
stripes are displayed on parts that are within the range of brightness you
specify.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Zebra Pattern]
[ZEBRA1] [ZEBRA2] [ZEBRA1+2]
[ZEBRA1]
Parts that are brighter than the base value are displayed with
[ZEBRA1] stripes.
[ZEBRA2]
Parts that are brighter than the base value are displayed with
[ZEBRA2] stripes.
[ZEBRA1+2] Both [ZEBRA1] and [ZEBRA2] are displayed.
[OFF] —
[SET]
[Zebra 1]
[50%] to [105%]/
[BASE/RANGE]
Sets the base brightness.
[Zebra 2]
[50%] to [105%]/
[BASE/RANGE]
10. Recording Videos
268
When [BASE/RANGE] Was Selected with [SET]
Centerd on the brightness set with [Base Level], parts with the brightness
in the range set in [Range] are displayed with the stripes.
≥ [Base Level] can be set in the range between 0 % and 109 % (IRE).
≥ [Range] can be set in the range between n1 % and n10 % (IRE).
0
When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log], these are set at “Stop” units.
(Calculated as “0 Stop”=42 % (IRE))
[Frame Marker]
A frame with the set aspect ratio is displayed on the recording screen.
This allows you to see during recording the angle of view that will be
achieved with trimming (cropping) in post-processing.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Frame Marker]
0
[ZEBRA1+2] cannot be selected while you are setting [BASE/RANGE].
[ON]
Displays the Frame Marker on the recording
screen.
[OFF] —
[SET]
[Frame Aspect]
Sets the aspect ratio of the Frame Marker.
[2.39:1]/[2.35:1]/[2.00:1]/[1.85:1]/[16:9]/[4:3]/
[5:4]/[1:1]/[4:5]/[9:16]
[Frame Color] Sets the color of the Frame Marker.
[Frame Mask]
Sets the opacity of the outside of the Frame
Marker.
[100%]/[75%]/[50%]/[25%]/[OFF]
10. Recording Videos
269
In the [S&Q] mode, the camera records at a different frame rate to the
recording frame rate, enabling the creation of slow motion video and quick
motion video in the MP4 format.
1
Set the mode dial to [S&Q].
0
[Rec. File Format] changes to [MP4].
2
Select a recording quality with
which you can record Slow &
Quick video.
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Rec
Quality]
0
Items available for recording with Slow &
Quick video are indicated as [S&Q available].
0
Recording qualities with which you can record Slow & Quick video: l 287
Slow & Quick Video
Slow Motion Video
(Overcrank Recording)
Set a number of frames that is higher than the
recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality].
For example: When recording at 60 fps when set to a
30p [Rec Quality], the speed is halved.
Quick Motion Video
(Undercrank Recording)
Set a number of frames that is lower than the
recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality].
For example: When recording at 15 fps when set to a
30p [Rec Quality], the speed is doubled.
10. Recording Videos
270
3
Set the frame rate.
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Slow &
Quick Setting]
≥Rotate , or to select a
numeric value, then press or
.
0
You can set a frame rate in the following ranges:
– 4K video: 1 fps to 60 fps
– FHD video: 1 fps to 180 fps
Frame Rate Combinations and Playback Speeds
Frame
rate
[Switch NTSC/PAL]: [NTSC]
4K/30p 4K/24p FHD/60p FHD/30p FHD/24p
180 fps ss3k Slow 6k Slow 7.5k Slow
150 fps ss2.5k Slow 5k Slow 6.25k Slow
120 fps ss2k Slow 4k Slow 5k Slow
100 fps ss1.67k Slow 3.33k Slow 4.17k Slow
60 fps 2k Slow 2.5k Slow 1k Normal 2k Slow 2.5k Slow
30 fps 1k Normal 1.25k Slow 2k Quick 1k Normal 1.25k Slow
15 fps 2k Quick 1.6k Quick 4k Quick 2k Quick 1.6k Quick
10 fps 3k Quick 2.4k Quick 6k Quick 3k Quick 2.4k Quick
5fps 6k Quick 4.8k Quick 12k Quick 6k Quick 4.8k Quick
2fps 15k Quick 12k Quick 30k Quick 15k Quick 12k Quick
1fps 30k Quick 24k Quick 60k Quick 30k Quick 24k Quick
10. Recording Videos
271
Frame
rate
[Switch NTSC/PAL]: [PAL]
4K/25p FHD/50p FHD/25p
180 fps s 3.6k Slow 7.2k Slow
150 fps s 3k Slow 6k Slow
120 fps s 2.4k Slow 4.8k Slow
100 fps s 2k Slow 4k Slow
60 fps 2.4k Slow 1.2k Slow 2.4k Slow
30 fps 1.2k Slow 1.67k Quick 1.2k Slow
15 fps 1.67k Quick 3.33k Quick 1.67k Quick
10 fps 2.5k Quick 5k Quick 2.5k Quick
5fps 5k Quick 10k Quick 5k Quick
2fps 12.5k Quick 25k Quick 12.5k Quick
1fps 25k Quick 50k Quick 25k Quick
0
Audio will not be recorded during Slow & Quick recording.
0
When [Rec Quality] is set to [4K], [Image Area of Video] is fixed to [APS-C].
0
When [Rec Quality] is set to [FHD], [Image Area of Video] is fixed to [FULL].
0
The mode switches to MF when you set to a frame rate of 150 fps or more.
0
The angle of view is reduced when you set the frame rate to 180 fps.
0
Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 30 minutes.
10. Recording Videos
272
By cropping a part of the image from the image displayed in the live view, it
is possible to record FHD video that incorporates panning and zooming
with the camera staying in a fixed position.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set [Rec. File Format] to [MP4]
or [MOV].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Rec. File
Format] ¨ [MP4]/[MOV]
[Live Cropping]
Pan Zoom in
0
Use a tripod to minimize camera shake.
10. Recording Videos
273
3
Select a recording quality with
which you can record [Live
Cropping] video.
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Rec
Quality]
0
A recording quality with which you can
record [Live Cropping] video: l 287
4
Set the time for panning or
zooming.
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Live
Cropping] ¨ [40SEC]/[20SEC]
0
If you have selected a recording quality
where Live Cropping recording is not
available, the camera switches to an FHD video recording quality where
recording is possible. (l 287)
5
Set the cropping start frame
A.
≥Select the range to be cropped and
press or .
6
Set the cropping end frame B.
≥Select the range to be cropped and
press or .
0
To redo the settings for the position and size of the start frame and the end
frame, press 2.
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW
6HW
10. Recording Videos
274
7
Start Live Cropping recording.
≥Press the video rec. button.
C Elapsed recording time
D Set operating time
0
When the set operating time has elapsed,
recording automatically ends.
To end recording midway, press the video
rec. button again.
7
s
7
s
7
s
20
s
20
s
20
s
10. Recording Videos
275
Operations for Setting the Cropping Frame
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
3421 Touch Moves the frame.
/
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges/reduces the frame in small steps.
s Enlarges/reduces the frame.
[DISP.] [Reset]
Start frame: Returns the frame position and size
to the default settings.
End frame: Cancels the settings for the position
and size of the frame.
/ [Set] Confirms the frame position and size.
0
AF mode switches to [ ] (face detection). (Human bodies cannot be
detected. It is not possible to specify the person to bring into focus.)
0
Brightness measurements and focusing are performed within the cropping
frame. To lock the focus point, set [Continuous AF] to [OFF], or set the focus
mode to [MF].
0
[Metering Mode] will be [ ] (multi-metering).
10. Recording Videos
276
Setting [Photo Style] to [V-Log] enables Log recording.
Images finished with rich gradation can be created through post-production
processing.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Photo Style] ¨ Select [V-Log]
ISO Sensitivity When [V-Log] Is Set
The lower limit of available ISO sensitivity is [640] (when [Extended ISO] is
set: [320]), and the upper limit is [51200].
Log Recording
0
Post-production processing is enabled by utilizing LUT (Look-Up Table).
You can download LUT data from the following support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/download/index3.html
(English only)
10. Recording Videos
277
Exposure When [V-Log] Is Set
The [V-Log] curve characteristics comply with “V-Log/V-Gamut
REFERENCE MANUAL Rev.1.0”. When set to [V-Log], the standard
exposure when gray with a reflectance ratio of 18 % is imaged is IRE 42 %.
0
When luminance is to be displayed by “Stop” units, this camera calculates IRE 42 %
to “0 Stop”.
When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log]
Reflectance ratio
(%)
IRE (%) Stop
10 bit code
value
12 bit code
value
0 7.3 — 128 512
1 18 42 0.0 433 1732
2 90 61 2.3 602 2408
0
Luminance can be checked by “Stop” units:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Luminance Spot Meter] (l 266)
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Zebra Pattern] (l 267)
-
8
-
8
-
7
-
7
-
6
-
6
-
5
-
5
-
4
-
4
-
3
-
3
-
2
-
2
-
1
-
10011223344556677 88
（Stop）（Stop）
00
6464
128128
192192
256256
320320
448448
512512
576576
640640
704704
384384
（10 bit code value）（10 bit code value）
768768
832832
896896
960960
10241024
10. Recording Videos
278
[V-Log View Assist]
When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log], the recording screen and images
output via HDMI will darken. Using [V-Log View Assist] means you can
show images with LUT data applied on the monitor/viewfinder and output
them via HDMI.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [V-Log View Assist]
[Read LUT File] Reads LUT data from the card.
[LUT Select]
Selects the LUT data to be applied from among
the preset ([Vlog_709]) and registered LUT data.
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)]
Displays the images with LUT data applied on the
monitor/viewfinder of the camera.
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] Applies LUT data to images output over HDMI.
0
When applying the LUT data, [LUT] is displayed on the recording screen.
0
Up to 4 LUT data files can be registered.
10. Recording Videos
279
Reading LUT Files
1
Insert a card on which LUT data is saved into the camera.
2
Select [Read LUT File].
0
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [V-Log View Assist] ¨ [Read LUT File] ¨ [Card Slot
1]/[Card Slot 2]
3
Press 34 to select the LUT data to read and then press or .
4
Press 34 to select the location to register the data, and then press
or .
0
When registered items are selected, they will be overwritten.
0
The following LUT data can be used:
– The “.vlt” format, which meets the requirements specified in the “VARICAM
3DLUT REFERENCE MANUAL Rev.1.0”
– File names consisting of up to 8 alphanumeric characters (excluding
extension)
0
Save the LUT data with a file extension of “.vlt” in the root directory of the card
(the folder opened when the card is opened on a PC).
10. Recording Videos
280
Record videos with the wide dynamic range of the HLG format. You can
record in very bright light where overexposure can occur or in dark areas
where underexposure can occur, maintaining the rich yet subtle colors you
can see with your naked eye.
You can view the video that you record by outputting via HDMI to devices
(TVs, etc.) that support the HLG format, or playing back directly on
supporting devices.
0
“HLG (Hybrid Log Gamma)” is an international standard (ITU-R BT.2100) HDR
format.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set [Rec. File Format] to [MP4]
or [MOV].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Rec. File
Format] ¨ [MP4]/[MOV]
HLG Videos
10. Recording Videos
281
3
Select a recording quality with
which you can record HLG
video.
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Rec
Quality]
0
Items available for recording with HLG
video are indicated as [HLG available].
0
Recording qualities with which you can record HLG video: l 287
4
Set [Photo Style] to
[Like2100(HLG)].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Photo
Style] ¨ [Like2100(HLG)]
ISO Sensitivity When [Like2100(HLG)] Is Set
The lower limit of available ISO sensitivities will become [400].
0
The monitor and viewfinder on this camera do not support display of HLG
format images.
With [Monitor] in [HLG View Assist] in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display
(Video)]) menu, you can display the images converted for monitoring on the
monitor/viewfinder of this camera. (l 282)
0
HLG images are shown dark on devices that do not support the HLG format.
With [HDMI] in [HLG View Assist] in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)])
menu, you can set the conversion method for images displayed for
monitoring. (l 282)
±0
±0
/LNH+/*
10. Recording Videos
282
[HLG View Assist]
At recording or playback of [HLG Photo] and HLG video, this displays
images with converted color gamut and brightness on the camera monitor/
viewfinder, or outputs these over HDMI.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [HLG View Assist] ¨ [Monitor] or [HDMI]
¢ Can only be set while [HDMI] is selected.
[AUTO]
¢
Converts images before outputting them via HDMI while
applying the effect of [MODE2]. This conversion setting works
only when the camera is connected to a device that does not
support HDR (HLG format).
[MODE1]
Converts with an emphasis on bright areas such as sky.
0
[MODE1] is displayed on the recording screen.
[MODE2]
Converts with an emphasis on the brightness of a main subject.
0
[MODE2] is displayed on the recording screen.
[OFF]
Displays without converting color gamut and brightness.
0
HLG images appear darker on devices that do not support the
HLG format.
10. Recording Videos
283
This camera can record video with a resolution of 4K-A (anamorphic (4:3)
video) that is compatible with anamorphic recording with an aspect ratio of
4:3.
Along with the normal 16:9 video aspect ratio, you can select the recording
quality suited to anamorphic recording.
0
The above shows some of the recording qualities available when a full-frame lens is
attached.
Refer to page 250 for details about 16:9 recording quality.
During anamorphic recording, it is also possible to display desqueezed
images and the angle of view when cropping after desqueeze editing. It is
also possible to switch to an image stabilizer that suits anamorphic
recording.
Anamorphic Recording
0
This camera is not compatible with desqueeze editing of video recorded with
anamorphic recording. Use compatible software.
0
Refer to page 182 for information about image stabilizers suited to
anamorphic recording.
4K/FHD (16:9)/APS-C
4K-A
(4:3)/APS-C
4K30p/25p/24p, FHD (16:9)/Full
10. Recording Videos
284
[Anamorphic(4:3)]
You can record video with an aspect ratio of 4:3 and 4K-A resolution
compatible with anamorphic recording.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the image quality for
[Anamorphic(4:3)].
≥
¨
[ ]
¨
[ ]
¨
[Anamorphic(4:3)]
0
[Rec. File Format] changes to [MOV].
10. Recording Videos
285
Setting Items ([Anamorphic(4:3)])
0
Audio format: LPCM (2ch)
A Recording frame rate
B Bit rate (Mbps)
C Video compression format (HEVC: H.265/HEVC, AVC: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC)
¢ Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 30 minutes.
[Switch NTSC/PAL]: [NTSC]
[Rec Quality] Resolution
YUV/bit A B C
[4K-A/30p/422/10-L]
¢
3328k2496 4:2:2/10 bit
29.97p 150 AVC
[4K-A/30p/420/8-L] 3328k2496 4:2:0/8 bit
29.97p 100 AVC
[4K-A/24p/422/10-L]
¢
3328k2496 4:2:2/10 bit
23.98p 150 AVC
[4K-A/24p/420/8-L] 3328k2496 4:2:0/8 bit
23.98p 100 AVC
[OFF] s
[Switch NTSC/PAL]: [PAL]
[Rec Quality] Resolution
YUV/bit A B C
[4K-A/50p/420/10-L]
¢
3328k2496 4:2:0/10 bit
50.00p 200 HEVC
[4K-A/50p/420/8-L]
¢
3328k2496 4:2:0/8 bit
50.00p 150 AVC
[4K-A/25p/422/10-L]
¢
3328k2496 4:2:2/10 bit
25.00p 150 AVC
[4K-A/25p/420/8-L] 3328k2496 4:2:0/8 bit
25.00p 100 AVC
[OFF] s
0
All videos will be recorded using Long GOP to compress the images.
0
Use a UHS Speed Class 3 or higher card when recording.
10. Recording Videos
286
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]
Display the desqueezed images suited to the magnification of the
anamorphic lens on this camera.
Using the [Frame Marker], it is also possible to superimpose on display the
frame of the angle of view when cropping after desqueeze editing.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ] or [S&Q].
2
Set [Anamorphic Desqueeze
Display].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]
0
Make settings to suit the magnification of
the anamorphic lens you are using.
3
Set [Frame Marker].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Frame
Marker]
0
For details, refer to page 268.
Settings: [ ]([2.0k])/
[]([1.8k])/
[]([1.5k])/
[ ]([1.33k])/
[ ]([1.30k])/[OFF]
0
Images output via HDMI are not desqueezed.
10. Recording Videos
287
[Rec. File Format]: [MP4]
List of Recording Qualities That Enable
Special Videos to be Recorded
: Recording qualities with which you can record Slow & Quick video
: Recording qualities that enable use of [Live Cropping]
: Recording qualities with which you can record HLG video
[Switch NTSC/PAL] [Rec Quality]
[NTSC]
[4K/10bit/100M/60p] 3
[4K/8bit/100M/30p] 3
[4K/10bit/72M/30p] 3
[4K/8bit/100M/24p] 3
[4K/10bit/72M/24p] 3
[FHD/8bit/28M/60p] 33
[FHD/8bit/20M/30p] 33
[FHD/8bit/24M/24p] 3
[PAL]
[4K/10bit/100M/50p] 3
[4K/8bit/100M/25p] 3
[4K/10bit/72M/25p] 3
[FHD/8bit/28M/50p] 33
[FHD/8bit/20M/25p] 33
S&Q
Live Crop
HLG
S&Q
Live Crop
HLG
10. Recording Videos
288
[Rec. File Format]: [MOV]
[Switch NTSC/PAL] [Rec Quality]
[NTSC]
[4K/60p/420/10-L] 3
[4K/60p/420/8-L]
[4K/30p/422/10-L] 3
[4K/30p/420/8-L]
[4K/24p/422/10-L] 3
[4K/24p/420/8-L]
[FHD/60p/422/10-L] 33
[FHD/60p/420/8-L] 3
[FHD/30p/422/10-L] 33
[FHD/30p/420/8-L] 3
[FHD/24p/422/10-L] 3
[FHD/24p/420/8-L]
[PAL]
[4K/50p/420/10-L] 3
[4K/50p/420/8-L]
[4K/25p/422/10-L] 3
[4K/25p/420/8-L]
[FHD/50p/422/10-L] 33
[FHD/50p/420/8-L] 3
[FHD/25p/422/10-L] 33
[FHD/25p/420/8-L] 3
S&Q
Live Crop
HLG
289
11.
Connections with External
Devices (Video)
You can record while outputting the camera images to an external monitor
or external recorder connected with an HDMI micro cable.
0
HDMI output control differs between during recording and during playback.
Refer to page 401 for HDMI output settings during playback.
Getting started:
0
Turn off the camera and the external monitor/external recorder.
Connect the camera and an external monitor or external
recorder with a commercially available HDMI micro cable.
0
Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.
(Inserting at an angle can deform the terminal and cause malfunction.)
0
Do not connect the cable to the wrong terminals. This may cause a malfunction.
HDMI Devices (HDMI Output)
A [HDMI] socket (Type D)
B External monitor
C External recorder
11. Connections with External Devices (Video)
290
Images Output via HDMI
The images output via HDMI differ depending on the recording mode.
[ ]/[S&Q] Mode
Resolution and frame rate output is according to the [Rec Quality] settings
in the [Video] ([Image Format]) menu.
0
Use a “High Speed HDMI micro cable” with the HDMI logo.
Cables that do not comply with the HDMI standards will not work.
“High Speed HDMI micro cable” (Type D–Type A plug, up to 2 m (6.6 feet)
long)
The YUV and bit value are output with
YUV changed to 4:2:2 as shown at
right.
If the connected device is not
compatible with the output system,
output changes to match the
connected device.
Recording to
card
HDMI output
4:2:2 10-bit 4:2:2 10-bit
4:2:0 10-bit 4:2:2 10-bit
4:2:0 8-bit 4:2:2 8-bit
0
Anamorphic (4:3) video is output with a 16:9 aspect ratio with bands added to
the images.
11. Connections with External Devices (Video)
291
[iA]/[P]/[A]/[S]/[M] Mode
While recording video or when [Photo/Video Preview] is set to [ ], output
is the same as [ ]/[S&Q] mode.
Output is with a 16:9 aspect ratio during recording standby. Resolution,
frame rate, YUV, and bit value output matches the connected device.
Notice Regarding HDMI Output
0
It may take some time for the output method to change.
0
When you use the HDMI output during recording, the image may be displayed with a
time lag.
0
Beep sounds, AF beep, and electronic shutter sounds are muted during HDMI
output.
0
When you check the image and audio from the TV connected to the camera, the
microphone of the camera may pick up the sound from the speakers of the TV,
producing an abnormal sound (audio feedback).
If this occurs, move the camera away from the TV or lower the volume on the TV.
0
Certain setting screens are not output via HDMI.
0
There is no output via HDMI while you are recording with the following functions:
– [6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
0
If the temperature of the camera rises, [ ] may be displayed, recording may stop,
and some functions may become unavailable temporarily. Wait until the camera
cools down.
0
When set to any [Aspect Ratio] other than 16:9, bands are added to the
images and they are output with a 16:9 aspect ratio.
11. Connections with External Devices (Video)
292
Sets HDMI output during recording.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [HDMI Rec Output]
[HDMI Rec Output]
[Info Display]
Output the camera information display to an external device
connected by HDMI.
[HDMI
Recording
Control]
Recording start and stop control information is output to an
external recorder connected by HDMI.
0
[HDMI Recording Control] can be set when [HDMI Time Code
Output] is set to [ON] in [ ] mode.
0
Control information is output when pressing the video rec.
button or shutter button, even if the video cannot be recorded
(such as when there is no card inserted into the camera).
0
Only compatible external devices can be controlled.
[4K/60p Bit
Mode]/
[4K/50p Bit
Mode]
In the [ ] mode, setting of output bit value for images output
over HDMI is possible for 4K/60p or 4K/50p video.
[4:2:2 10bit]/[4:2:0 8bit]
0
The menu name changes according to the [Switch NTSC/PAL]
setting.
0
This works in the [ ] mode, when set to [Rec Quality] of
4K/60p or 4K/50p, and outputting over HDMI.
0
When using HDMI output for 4K/60p/4:2:2 10-bit or 4K/50p/
4:2:2 10-bit images, video cannot be recorded to a card.
0
When using HDMI output for HLG video, during HDMI output
of 4K/60p/4:2:2 10-bit or 4K/50p/4:2:2 10-bit images, from the
[Video] ([Image Quality]) menu, set [Photo Style] to
[Like2100(HLG)].
[Sound Output
(HDMI)]
Output audio to an external device connected by HDMI.
11. Connections with External Devices (Video)
293
With a Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional) or Stereo
Microphone (VW-VMS10: optional), you can record higher-quality audio
compared to the built-in microphone.
1
Set the [Mic Socket] that suits the device to be
connected.
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Mic Socket]
0
The setting will be fixed to [ ] when a Stereo Shotgun Microphone
(DMW-MS2: optional) is connected.
0
When using [ ], if you connect an external microphone that does not
require power supply, the connected external microphone may malfunction.
Check the device before connecting.
2
Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
External Microphones (Optional)
[Mic Input
(Plug-in Power)]
When connecting an external microphone
that requires a power supply from the camera
[MIC] socket.
[Mic Input]
When connecting an external microphone
that does not require a power supply from the
camera [MIC] socket.
[Line Input]
When connecting an external audio device
for line output.
11. Connections with External Devices (Video)
294
3
Connect the camera and external microphone.
0
If mounting the external microphone on the camera hot shoe A, remove the
hot shoe cover. (l 227)
Setting the Sound Pickup Range (DMW-MS2: Optional)
When using the Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional), you
can set the microphone sound pickup range.
1
Select [Special Mic.].
0
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Special Mic.]
2
(When [MANUAL] is selected)
Press 21 to adjust the sound pickup range and then press or
.
0
Do not use the stereo microphone cables with the length of 3 m (9.8 feet) or
more.
[STEREO] Picks up sound over a wide area.
[LENS AUTO]
Picks up sound from a range automatically set by the lens
angle of view.
[SHOTGUN]
Helps prevent picking up background noise, and records
sound from a specific direction.
[S.SHOTGUN]
Narrows the sound pickup range more than with
[SHOTGUN].
[MANUAL] Sets the range manually for sound pickup.
11. Connections with External Devices (Video)
295
Reduction of Wind Noise
This reduces wind noise when an external microphone is connected.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Wind Cut]
Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]
0
While the external microphone is connected, [ ] is displayed on the screen.
0
When an external microphone is connected, [Sound Rec Level Disp.]
automatically turns [ON], and the recording level is displayed on the screen.
0
When the external microphone is attached, do not carry the camera by holding
the external microphone. It may become detached.
0
If noises are recorded when using the AC adaptor, use the battery.
0
Setting [Wind Cut] may alter the usual sound quality.
0
For details, refer to the operating instructions for the external microphone.
11. Connections with External Devices (Video)
296
By attaching an XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional) to the
camera, you can use a commercially available XLR microphone to enable
the recording of superior-quality stereo audio.
A Hot shoe
B Commercially available XLR microphone
Getting started:
0
Turn off the camera, and remove the hot shoe cover. (l 227)
Attach the XLR Microphone Adaptor to the hot shoe, and then turn on the
camera.
0
When the XLR Microphone Adaptor is attached, [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting]
automatically turns [ON].
XLR Microphone Adaptor (Optional)
[ON] Records audio using the XLR microphone.
[OFF] Records audio using the built-in microphone of the camera.
11. Connections with External Devices (Video)
297
0
While an XLR Microphone Adaptor is attached, [ ] is displayed on the
screen.
0
When [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] is set to [ON], the following settings are fixed:
– [Sound Rec Level Limiter]: [OFF]
– [Wind Noise Canceller]: [OFF]
– [Sound Output]: [REC SOUND]
0
[Sound Rec Level Adj.] cannot be used when [XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] is set
to [ON].
0
When the XLR Microphone Adaptor is attached, [Sound Rec Level Disp.]
automatically turns [ON], and the recording level is displayed on the screen.
0
When the XLR Microphone Adaptor is attached, do not carry the camera by
holding the XLR Microphone Adaptor. It may become detached.
0
If noises are recorded when using the AC adaptor, use the battery.
0
For details, refer to the operating instructions for the XLR Microphone
Adaptor.
11. Connections with External Devices (Video)
298
You can record videos while monitoring their sound by connecting
commercially available headphones to the camera.
0
Do not use the headphone cables with the length of 3 m (9.8 feet) or more.
0
When headphones are connected, beep sounds, AF beep, and electronic shutter
sounds are muted.
Switching the Sound Output Method
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Sound Output]
Headphones
[REALTIME]
Audio without time lag.
It may differ from the sound recorded in videos.
[REC SOUND]
Audio to be recorded in videos.
Output sound may be delayed from actual sound.
0
The setting is fixed to [REC SOUND] in the following cases:
– During output of audio via HDMI
– When [Special Mic.] is set to [LENS AUTO], [SHOTGUN], [S.SHOTGUN], or
[MANUAL]
– When using an XLR Microphone Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional)
11. Connections with External Devices (Video)
299
Adjusting the Headphone Volume
Connect the headphones and rotate .
0
You can also adjust the volume by touching [ ]/[ ] on the playback screen.
To adjust the volume using the menu:
1
Select [Headphone Volume].
0
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Headphone Volume]
2
Press 34 to adjust the headphone volume and then press or
.
0
It can be adjusted in a range of [0] to [LEVEL15].
: Reduces the volume.
: Increases the volume.
300
12.
Playing Back and Editing of
Images
This chapter explains how to play back and delete pictures and videos.
It also explains editing using [RAW Processing] (l 312) and [Video Divide]
(l 318).
1
Display the playback screen.
≥Press [(].
0
Images recorded on devices other than this one may not be played back or
edited correctly on this camera.
0
For [Playback] menus other than [RAW Processing] and [Video Divide], refer
to “[Playback] Menu” beginning on page 406.
Playing Back Pictures
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images
301
2
Select a picture.
≥Select the pictures by pressing
21.
≥You can move continuously through
images by pressing and holding
21.
≥You can also select by rotating
or .
≥You can also move through images by dragging the screen
horizontally. By leaving your finger touching the left or right edge of
the screen after dragging to change the image, you can
continuously move through images.
A Card slot
3
Stop playback.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
≥You can also stop playback by
pressing [(].
1/999
1/999
1/999
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images
302
Switching the Card to Display
You can switch the card displayed just by pressing [ ] during playback.
0
You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button assigned with
[Card Slot Change].
For information about the Fn button, refer to page 321.
1
Press [ ].
2
Press 34 to select [Card Slot 1] or
[Card Slot 2] and then press or
.
0
This camera complies with the “Design rule for Camera File system” (DCF)
and “Exchangeable Image File Format” (Exif) standards established by “Japan
Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association” (JEITA).
The camera cannot play back files that do not comply with the DCF standard.
Exif is a file format for pictures which allows recording information, etc. to be
added.
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images
303
1
Display the playback screen.
≥Press [(].
2
Select a video.
0
For information about how to select
images, refer to page 301.
0
The [ ] video icon is displayed for a
video.
0
The video recording time A is displayed
on the screen.
Example) When 8 minutes 30 seconds:
8m30s
0
h: hour, m: minute, s: second
3
Play back the video.
≥Press 3.
≥You can also start playback by
touching [ ] at the center of the
screen.
B Elapsed playback time
C Playback bar
4
Stop playback.
≥Press 4.
Playing Back Videos
8m30s
8m30s
8m30s
00:05:5000:05:5000:05:50
00:08:3000:08:3000:08:30
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images
304
Operations During Video Playback
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
3 / Plays/pauses.
4 —Stops.
2 —
Performs fast-rewind playback.
0
If you press 2 again, the fast-rewind speed
increases.
Performs frame-by-frame rewinding (while
paused).
1 —
Performs fast-forward playback.
0
If you press 1 again, the fast-forward speed
increases.
Performs frame-by-frame forwarding (while
paused).
— Selects the frame to display.
/ Extracts a picture (while paused). (l 305)
Reduces the volume.
Increases the volume.
0
The camera can play back videos in MP4 and MOV formats.
0
To play back videos on a PC, use the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software.
6DYH
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images
305
Extracting a Picture
Extract one frame of a video and save it as a JPEG image.
1
Pause playback at the position
you wish to extract a picture.
≥Press 3.
0
To fine-adjust the position, press 21
(rewind frame-by-frame or forward
frame-by-frame).
2
Save the picture.
≥Press or .
≥You can also save the picture by
touching [Save].
0
The picture created from the video is saved with a [FINE] picture quality.
The picture is saved with a size according to the resolution of the [Rec
Quality].
0
The image quality of a picture created from a video may be coarser than
normal.
0
[ ] is displayed on the detailed information display screen for a picture
created from a video.
00:06:10
00:06:10
00:06:10 00:08:30
00:08:30
00:08:30
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images
306
You can use features to do things like enlarge recorded images for display
and switch to thumbnail display to display multiple images at once
(multi-playback).
You can also switch to calendar display to show images of a selected
recording date.
Enlarged Display
Playback images can be displayed enlarged (Playback Zoom).
Enlarging the playback screen.
≥ Rotate to the right.
≥ The playback screen is enlarged in the
order of 2k 4k 8k 16k.
0
Rotating to the left returns to the previous
display size.
0
Pictures taken with [Picture Quality] set to [RAW] cannot be displayed enlarged at
16k. (Excluding pictures recorded with the [Picture Quality] in [High Resolution
Mode] set to [RAW])
Switching the Display Mode
2.0X2.0X
2.0X
2.0X
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images
307
Operations During Enlarged Display
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
s Enlarges/reduces the screen.
s
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.
3421 Drag Moves the enlarged display position.
/ s
Forwards or rewinds images while maintaining
the same zoom magnification and zoom position.
0
You can display the point focused with AF. You can enlarge the display from
that point:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Magnify from AF Point] (l 408)
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images
308
Thumbnail Screen
1
Switch to thumbnail display.
≥Rotate to the left.
≥The display is switched in the order
of 12-image screen 30-image
screen.
A Card
0
Rotating to the left during 30-image
screen display switches to calendar display. (l 309)
0
Rotating to the right returns to the previous display.
0
You can also switch the display by touching an icon.
[ ]: 1-image screen
[ ]: 12-image screen
[ ]: 30-image screen
[ ]: Calendar (l 309)
2
Select an image.
≥Press 3421 to select an image and then press or .
0
When you press [ ] while a thumbnail is being displayed, you can switch
to the card being displayed.
0
You can scroll the screen by dragging the thumbnail display up or down.
0
Images indicated with [ ] cannot be played back.
1/999
CAL
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images
309
Calendar Playback
1
Switch to calendar playback.
≥Rotate to the left.
≥The display is switched in the order
of thumbnail screen (12 images)
Thumbnail screen (30 images)
Calendar playback.
0
Rotating to the right returns to the previous display.
2
Select the recording date.
≥Press 3421 to select a date and then press or .
3
Select an image.
≥Press 3421 to select an image
and then press or .
0
Rotating to the left returns to
calendar playback.
0
The card to display cannot be switched during calendar display.
0
The range that the calendar can be displayed is January 2000 to December
2099.
54321
1211109876
19181716151413
2625242322
29
2120
SUN SATFRITHUWEDTUEMON
2827
2020
12
3130
1/999
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images
310
Images recorded with Time Lapse Shot or Stop Motion Shooting are
handled as group images in the camera, and can be deleted and edited on
a group basis.
(For example, if you delete a group image, all images in the group are
deleted.)
You can also delete and edit each image in a group individually.
Images Handled as Group Images by the Camera
Playing and Editing the Images in a Group One by One
Operations such as displaying thumbnails and deleting images are
available with images in groups just as with normal playback.
1
Select the group image in the playback state. (l 301)
2
Press 4 to display the images in the group.
0
You can also perform the same operation by touching the group image icon.
3
Press 21 to select an image.
0
To return to the normal playback screen, press
4
or touch [ ] again.
Group Images
Group images saved with [6K/4K
PHOTO Bulk Saving].
Group images recorded with Focus
Bracket.
Group images recorded with Time
Lapse Shot.
Group images recorded with Stop
Motion Shooting.
1/9991/9991/999
SLFSLFSLF
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images
311
1
Press [ ] in playback state.
2
Press 34 to select the
deletion method and then
press or .
Deleting Images
0
Images cannot be restored once they have been deleted. Carefully confirm
the images before deletion.
0
You can only delete the images in the card of the selected card slot.
0
If you delete a group image, all images in the group are deleted.
[Delete Single] Deletes the selected image.
[Delete Multi]
Selecting and deleting multiple images.
1 Press 3421 to select the image to delete and
then press or .
0
[‚] is displayed for the selected image.
0
If you press or again, the selection is
canceled.
0
Up to 100 images can be selected.
2 Press [DISP.] to delete the selected image.
0
To switch the card selected for deleting images, press [ ] and then select
the card slot.
0
Depending on the number of images to be deleted, it may take some time to
delete them.
0
You can set which of [Yes] and [No] is selected initially in the confirmation
screen when deleting:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Delete Confirmation] (l 414)
0
All images on the card can be deleted:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Delete All Images] (l 414)
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images
312
This processes pictures taken in RAW format on the camera and saves
them in JPEG format.
You can also save images recorded with [HLG Photo] in the RAW format
as HLG format.
1
Select [RAW Processing].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [RAW
Processing]
2
Select the RAW image.
≥Press 21 to select an image and
then press or .
0
When group images are selected, press
4 and then select an image in the group.
Press 4 again to return to the normal
selection screen.
0
The settings from the time of recording are reflected in displayed images.
3
Select a setting item.
≥Press 34 to select an item and
then press or .
[RAW Processing]
6HW
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images
313
4
Change the setting.
≥Rotate , , or .
0
The image can be enlarged/reduced by
pinching out/pinching in the screen.
5
Confirm the setting.
≥Press or .
≥The screen of Step
3
reappears.
To set another item, repeat Steps
3
to
5
.
6
Save the image.
≥Press 34 to select [Begin
Processing] and then press or
.
+1+1 +2+2
-
2
-
2
-
1
-
100
DISP.
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images
314
Setting Items ([RAW Processing])
[Begin
Processing]
Saves the image.
[White Balance]
Selects and adjusts the white balance.
Selecting the item with [ ] enables processing with
the same setting as at the time of recording.
0
If you press 4 in the [White Balance] selection
screen, the white balance adjustment screen
appears.
0
If you press 3 while [ ] to [ ] is selected, the
color temperature setting screen appears.
[Brightness
correction]
Corrects the brightness.
0
The [Brightness correction] effect differs from the
effect of exposure compensation during recording.
[Photo Style]
Selects a Photo Style. (l 208)
0
If you press [Q] while [Like709] is selected, the knee
setting screen appears. (l 260)
0
You cannot select a Photo Style for images recorded
with [V-Log]. You cannot select [V-Log] for images not
recorded with [V-Log].
0
You cannot select a Photo Style other than [Cinelike
D2] or [Cinelike V2] for images recorded with [Cinelike
D2] or [Cinelike V2]. You cannot select [Cinelike D2]
or [Cinelike V2] for images not recorded with Photo
Style [Cinelike D2] or [Cinelike V2].
0
When you have selected [HLG] in [File Format] in
[More Settings], only [Standard(HLG)] and
[Monochrome(HLG)] are available for selection.
[i.Dynamic
Range]
Selects the setting of [i.Dynamic Range].
[Contrast] Adjusts the contrast.
[Highlight] Adjusts the brightness of bright portions.
[Shadow] Adjusts the brightness of dark portions.
1
4
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images
315
[Saturation]/
[Color Tone]
Adjusts the saturation or color tone.
[Hue] Adjusts the hue.
[Filter Effect] Selects filter effects.
[Grain Effect]
Selects a grain effect setting.
0
You cannot set this for images recorded in [High
Resolution Mode].
[Noise
Reduction]
Sets noise reduction.
[Sharpness] Adjusts the sharpness.
[More Settings]
[Revert To Original]: Returns the settings to the ones
from the time of recording.
[File Format]: Selects a file format from [JPG] or [HLG].
When you select [HLG], both JPEG format and HSP
format pictures are saved. (Only images recorded with
[HLG Photo])
[Color Space]: Selects a Color Space setting from
[sRGB] or [AdobeRGB]. (Only when [JPG] is selected in
[File Format])
[Picture Size]: Selects the size for storing images.
[HLG View Assist (Monitor)]/[HLG View Assist
(HDMI)]: The color gamut and brightness of images
recorded with [HLG Photo] can be converted for display
on the monitor/viewfinder of this camera, or displayed
on an HDMI device. Refer to [HLG View Assist] in the
[Custom] menu for details. (l 282)
0
[HLG View Assist (Monitor)] and [HLG View Assist
(HDMI)] can only be selected when [HLG] is selected
in [File Format].
[Destination Card Slot]: You can select the card slot to
which to save images processed with RAW. When
[AUTO] is selected, the image is saved to the same
card slot as the RAW format image to be processed.
S
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images
316
0
The items that can be adjusted depend on the selected [Photo Style].
3 33333
3 33333
333s 33
33ssss
33ss33
33ss33
33ss33
([Saturation])
3 s 3 s 3 s
([Color Tone])
s 3 sss3
3 s 3 s 3 s
s 3 sss3
s 3 ssss
3 33333
3 33333
S
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images
317
Displaying a Comparison Screen
You can change a setting while checking the effect by displaying images
with the applied setting value side by side.
1
Press [DISP.] in the screen of Step
4
.
0
The image with the current setting A is
displayed at the center.
0
Touching the image with the current setting
enlarges it.
Touching [ ] returns to the original
display.
0
A comparison screen cannot be displayed
while [Noise Reduction] or [Sharpness] is
selected.
2
Rotate , , or to change the setting.
3
Press or to confirm the setting.
0
RAW images recorded with the camera are recorded in the [L] size of [3:2].
(However, RAW images recorded with [High Resolution Mode] are recorded in
the [XL] size of [3:2])
With this function, images are processed with the aspect ratio and the angle of
view of [Ex. Tele Conv.] from the time of recording.
0
The [White Balance] item is fixed to the setting from the time of recording for
pictures recorded with multiple exposures.
0
The results of RAW processing with this function and with the “SILKYPIX
Developer Studio” software do not completely match.
DISP.
0
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images
318
Divide a recorded video or 6K/4K burst file into two.
1
Select [Video Divide].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Video
Divide]
2
Select and play the image.
≥Press 21 to select an image and
then press or .
3
Pause playback at the position
you wish to divide.
≥Press 3.
0
To fine-adjust the position, press 21
(frame-by-frame rewind or
frame-by-frame forward).
[Video Divide]
0
Images cannot be returned to their original state once they have been divided.
Carefully confirm the images before performing the divide operation.
0
Do not remove the card or battery from the camera during the divide process.
The images may be lost.
6HW
00:06:1000:06:1000:06:10 00:08:3000:08:3000:08:30
12. Playing Back and Editing of Images
319
4
Divide the video.
≥Press or .
≥You can also divide the video by touching [Divide].
0
Dividing the video at a point close to the start or end may not be possible.
0
Videos with a short recording time cannot be divided.
320
13.
Camera Customization
This chapter describes the customization function with which you can
configure the camera to your preferred settings.
Change how buttons, dials, etc. on the camera are to be operated.
[Fn Button Set] l 321
[Dial Operation Switch Setup] l 330
Register the currently set information of the camera.
Custom mode l 337
Change menu display items.
Quick menu l 332
My Menu l 341
Import camera settings information onto another camera.
[Save/Restore Camera Setting] l 343
0
Detailed settings for camera operations and screen display are available in
the [Custom] menu. (l 370)
13. Camera Customization
321
You can register functions to the Fn (Function) buttons. Additionally, you
can register other functions to specialized buttons such as [WB] button, in
the same way as with the Fn buttons.
Different functions can be set for both during recording and playback.
Fn Button Default Settings
Fn Buttons
Fn buttons [Setting in REC mode] [Setting in PLAY mode]
1
[Fn2] [Preview] [No Setting]
2
[WB] [White Balance] [No Setting]
3
[ISO] [Sensitivity] [No Setting]
4
[] [Exposure Comp.] [No Setting]
5
Video rec.
button
[Video Record] [Video Record]
6
[LVF] [LVF/Monitor Switch] [LVF/Monitor Switch]
7
[] [AF Mode] [Card Slot Change]
8
[AF ON] [AF-ON]
[Rating¿
3]
9
[Q] [Q.MENU] [Send Image (Smartphone)]
10
[Fn1]/[ ]/[ ] [Level Gauge]
0
Cannot be used as Fn
buttons during playback.
1 2 3 4 6 85 7
109
13. Camera Customization
322
Fn buttons [Setting in REC mode] [Setting in PLAY mode]
11
[Fn3] [Wi-Fi]
0
Cannot be used as Fn
buttons during playback.
[Fn4] [Histogram]
[Fn5] [Boost I.S. (Video)]
[Fn6]
[Off (Disable Press and
Hold)]
[Fn7]
[Off (Disable Press and
Hold)]
12
[No Setting]
13
[No Setting]
Fn4
Fn4
Fn4
Fn3
Fn3
Fn3
Fn7
Fn7
Fn7
OFF
OFF
OFF
Fn6
Fn6
Fn6
OFF
OFF
OFF
Fn5
Fn5
Fn5
11 1312
[Fn9]
[Fn8]
[Fn10]
[Fn11]
[Fn12]
[Fn14]
[Fn13]
[Fn15]
[Fn16]
13. Camera Customization
323
Register Functions to the Fn Buttons
1
Select [Fn Button Set].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Fn Button
Set] ¨ [Setting in REC mode]/
[Setting in PLAY mode]
2
Select the button.
≥Press 34 to select the button and
then press or .
≥Selection is also possible by
rotating or .
0
Press [DISP.] to change the page.
3
Find the function to register.
≥Rotate to select the sub tab
where the function to register is
categorized (l 325, 328) and then
press or .
≥You can also select by pressing 2
to select the sub tab, pressing 34
or rotating , and then pressing 1.
≥Switch the [1] to [3] tabs by pressing [Q].
0
With default settings, [Fn8] to [Fn12] on the joystick cannot be used.
When using functions, set the [Joystick Setting] in the [Custom] ([Operation])
menu to [Fn]. (l 381)
13. Camera Customization
324
4
Register the function.
≥Press 34 to select a function and
then press or .
≥Selection is also possible by
rotating or .
0
Select items with [N] by selecting the
item again.
0
Depending on the button, some functions cannot be registered.
0
You can also touch [ ] on the control panel (l 67) to display the screen in
Step
2
.
0
You can also press and hold the Fn button (2 sec.) to display the screen in
Step
4
.
(This may not be displayed depending on the registered function and on the
button type.)
Fn
13. Camera Customization
325
Setting Items ([Fn Button Set]/[Setting in REC mode])
[1] tab
[Image Quality]
[Exposure Comp.]
l
196
[Sensitivity]
l
199
[White Balance]
l
202
[Photo Style]
l
208
[Metering Mode]
l
184
[Aspect Ratio]
l
83
[Picture Quality]
l
86
[Picture Size]
l
85
[HLG Photo]
l
225
[High Resolution Mode]
l
221
[1 Shot Spot Metering]
0
Records with the metering mode set to
[ ] (Spot metering) once only.
[Long Exposure NR]
l
351
[Min. Shutter Speed]
l
352
[1 Shot RAW+JPG]
0
Records a RAW image and a JPEG
image simultaneously once only.
[i.Dynamic Range]
l
353
[Filter Effect]
l
215
[One Push AE]
0
Adjusts the aperture value and shutter
speed to the settings suited for the
standard exposure determined by the
camera.
[Touch AE]
l
81
[Exposure Mode]
l
245
[Focus/Shutter]
[AF Mode]
l
100
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)]
l
98
[AF Custom Setting(Video)]
l
258
[Focus Peaking]
l
356
[Focus Peaking Sensitivity]
l
356
[1-Area AF Moving Speed]
l
356
[Focus Ring Lock]
l
374
[AE LOCK]
l
198
[AF LOCK]
l
198
[AF/AE LOCK]
l
198
[AF-ON] l 95
[AF-ON : Near Shift]
0
AF operates giving priority to close-up
subjects.
[AF-ON : Far Shift]
0
AF operates giving priority to distant
subjects.
[AF-Point Scope]
l
97
[Focus Area Set]
0
Displays the AF area/MF Assist transition
screen.
[Flash]
[Flash Mode]
l
229
[Flash Adjust.]
l
233
[Wireless Flash Setup]
l
236
13. Camera Customization
326
[Others (Photo)]
[Drive Mode]
l
128
[1 Shot "6K/4K PHOTO"]
0
Performs 6K/4K photo recording only
once.
[Bracketing]
l
156
[Silent Mode]
l
174
[Image Stabilizer]
l
177
[Shutter Type]
l
175
[Ex. Tele Conv.]
l
125
[Live View Composite]
l
162
[Post-Focus]
l
166
[2] tab
[Image Format]
[Rec. File Format]
l
249
[Rec Quality]
l
250
[Slow & Quick Setting] l 270
[Time Code Display] l 254
[Audio]
[Sound Rec Level Disp.]
l
263
[Sound Rec Level Adj.]
l
263
[Sound Rec Level Limiter] l 263
[Special Mic. Directivity Adjust]
0
Sets the sound pickup range for
[MANUAL] in [Special Mic.]. (l 294)
[Others (Video)]
[Image Stabilizer]
l
179
[E-Stabilization (Video)]
l
179
[Boost I.S. (Video)]
l
179
[Image Area of Video] l 249
[Live Cropping] l 272
[Operation]
[Q.MENU]
l
69
[Rec / Playback Switch]
0
Switches to the playback screen.
[Video Record]
l
240
[LVF/Monitor Switch]
l
66
[Operation Lock]
0
A certain type of operation is disabled.
Set the type of operation to be disabled in
[Operation Lock Setup] (l 378).
[Dial Operation Switch]
l
331
[Monitor / Display]
[Preview]
l
195
[Preview Aperture Effect]
0
The aperture effect can be previewed
while the Fn button is being pressed.
[Constant Preview]
l
383
[Level Gauge]
l
391
[Histogram]
l
384
[Luminance Spot Meter] l 266
[Frame Marker] l 268
[Photo Grid Line]
l
385
[Live View Boost]
l
386
[Monochrome Live View]
l
392
[Night Mode]
l
387
13. Camera Customization
327
[LVF/Monitor Disp. Style]
0
Switches the displayed monitor or
viewfinder display style.
[Photo/Video Preview] l 388
[Zebra Pattern] l 393
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)] l 278
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] l 278
[LUT Select] l 278
[HLG View Assist (Monitor)] l 282
[HLG View Assist (HDMI)] l 282
[Sheer Overlay] l 390
[I.S. Status Scope] l 390
[Waveform Monitor] l 264
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] l 286
[Lens / Others]
[Focus Ring Control]
l
394
[Zoom Control]
l
126
[3] tab
[Card/File]
[Destination Card Slot]
0
Changes the priority of cards for
recording. This can be used if [Double
Card Slot Function] (l 88) is set to
[Relay Rec].
[IN/OUT]
[Wi-Fi]
l
416
[Others]
[No Setting]
0
The button does not work as an Fn
button.
[Off (Disable Press and Hold)]
0
The button does not work as an Fn
button. The function registering screen is
not displayed when you press and hold
(2 seconds) the Fn button.
[Restore to Default]
0
Restore the default settings for the Fn
button.
(
l 321)
13. Camera Customization
328
Setting Items ([Fn Button Set]/[Setting in PLAY mode])
[1] tab
[Playback Mode]
[Magnify from AF Point] l 408
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)] l 278
[HLG View Assist (Monitor)] l 392
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] l 286
[Process Image]
[RAW Processing] l 312
[6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving] l 144
[Add/Delete Info.]
[Delete Single] l 311
[Protect] l 411
[Rating¿1] l 411
[Rating¿2] l 411
[Rating¿3] l 411
[Rating¿4] l 411
[Rating¿5] l 411
[Edit Image]
[Copy] l 413
[Operation]
[Rec / Playback Switch]
0
Switches to the recording screen.
[LVF/Monitor Switch] l 66
[Video Record] l 240
[Monitor / Display]
[Night Mode] l 387
[Card/File]
[Card Slot Change] l 302
[IN/OUT]
[Wi-Fi] l 416
[Send Image (Smartphone)] l 449
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] l 278
[HLG View Assist (HDMI)] l 392
[2] tab
[Others]
[6K/4K Photo Play]
0
Displays the screen to select pictures to save from a 6K/4K burst file.
[No Setting]
0
The button does not work as an Fn button.
[Off (Disable Press and Hold)]
0
The button does not work as an Fn button. The function registering screen is not
displayed when you press and hold (2 seconds) the Fn button.
[Restore to Default]
0
Restore the default settings for the Fn button. (l 321)
13. Camera Customization
329
Use the Fn Buttons
During recording, pressing the Fn buttons enables usage of the functions
registered in [Setting in REC mode], and during playback, usage of the
functions registered in [Setting in PLAY mode].
1
Press the Fn button.
2
Select a setting item.
≥Press 21 to select a setting item
and then press or .
≥Selection is also possible by
rotating , or .
0
Display and selection methods of a
setting item differ depending on the menu item.
Use [Fn3] to [Fn7] (Touch Icons)
During recording, you can use the Fn buttons within the Touch Tab.
1
To uc h [ ].
2
Touch one of [Fn3] to [Fn7].
0
With the default settings, the Touch Tab is not displayed. Set [Touch Tab] to
[ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu. (l 377)
Fn4
Fn4
Fn4
Fn3
Fn3
Fn3
Fn7
Fn7
Fn7
OFF
OFF
OFF
Fn6
Fn6
Fn6
OFF
OFF
OFF
Fn5
Fn5
Fn5
13. Camera Customization
330
This temporarily changes the functions operated with (front dial) and
(rear dial).
Register Functions to the Dials
1
Select [Dial Operation Switch
Setup].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Dial Set.]
¨ [Dial Operation Switch Setup] ¨
[]/[]
2
Register the function.
≥Press 34 to select a function and
then press or .
Functions That Can Be Registered
¢1 default setting
¢2 default setting
[Dial Operation Switch]
[Exposure Comp.] l 196
[Sensitivity]
¢1
l 199
[White Balance]
¢2
l 202
[Photo Style] l 208
[Aspect Ratio] l 83
[i.Dynamic Range] l 353
[Filter Effect] l 215
[AF Mode] l 100
[Flash Mode] l 229
[Flash Adjust.] l 233
[6K/4K PHOTO] l 133
13. Camera Customization
331
Temporarily Change Dial Operation
1
Set [Dial Operation Switch] to the Fn button. (l 321)
2
Switch dial operation.
≥Press the Fn button set in Step
1
.
≥A guide will display the functions
registered to and .
0
If no operations are performed, then
several seconds later, the guide
disappears.
3
Set the registered function.
≥Rotate or while the guide
is displayed.
4
Confirm your selection.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
ISOISOISOISO
WBWBWBWB
AWBc
AWBc
AWBw
AWBw
WB
WBWBWB
WBWBWBWBWBWBWB
AWB
AWB
ISOISOISOISO
13. Camera Customization
332
You can change Quick menu items depending on the recording mode.
Additionally, you can change the items to display on the Quick menu and
their order to suit your preferences.
For information about Quick menu operation methods, refer to page 69.
Register to the Quick Menu
Change the menus to be displayed in the Quick menu.
These can be set separately for [ ]/[S&Q] mode (Video) and for other
recording modes (Photo).
1
Select [Q.MENU Settings].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Q.MENU
Settings] ¨ [Item Customize
(Photo)]/[Item Customize (Video)]
2
Select the item position (1 to
<).
≥Press 3421 to select the
position and then press or
.
≥Selection is also possible by
rotating .
Quick Menu Customization
13. Camera Customization
333
3
Find the function to register.
≥Rotate to select the sub tab
where the function to register is
categorized (l 334) and then press
or .
≥You can also select by pressing 2
to select the sub tab, pressing 34
or rotating , and then pressing 1.
≥Each press of [Q] switches between tabs [1] and [2].
4
Register menu items.
≥Press 34 to select an item and
then press or .
≥Selection is also possible by
rotating or .
0
Select items with [N] by selecting the
item again.
13. Camera Customization
334
Menu Items That Can Be Registered
[1] tab
[Image Quality]
[Exposure Comp.] l 196
[Sensitivity] l 199
[White Balance] l 202
[Photo Style] l 208
[Metering Mode] l 184
[Aspect Ratio] l 83
[Picture Quality] l 86
[Picture Size] l 85
[HLG Photo] l 225
[Long Exposure NR] l 351
[Min. Shutter Speed] l 352
[i.Dynamic Range] l 353
[Filter Effect] l 215
[Exposure Mode] l 245
[Focus/Shutter]
[AF Mode] l 100
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)] l 98
[AF Custom Setting(Video)] l 258
[Focus Peaking] l 356
[Focus Peaking Sensitivity] l 356
[1-Area AF Moving Speed] l 356
[Flash]
[Flash Mode] l 229
[Flash Adjust.] l 233
[Wireless Flash Setup] l 236
[Others (Photo)]
[Drive Mode] l 128
[Bracketing] l 156
[Silent Mode] l 174
[Image Stabilizer] l 177
[Shutter Type] l 175
[Ex. Tele Conv.] l 125
[Post-Focus] l 166
[Image Format]
[Rec. File Format] l 249
[Rec Quality] l 250
[Slow & Quick Setting] l 270
[Time Code Display] l 254
[Audio]
[Sound Rec Level Disp.] l 263
[Sound Rec Level Adj.] l 263
[Sound Rec Level Limiter]
l
263
[Special Mic. Directivity Adjust]
0
Sets the sound pickup range for
[MANUAL] in [Special Mic.]. (l 294)
[Others (Video)]
[Image Stabilizer] l 179
[E-Stabilization (Video)] l 179
[Boost I.S. (Video)] l 179
[Image Area of Video]
l
249
[Live Cropping]
l
272
13. Camera Customization
335
[2] tab
[Monitor / Display]
[Constant Preview] l 383
[Level Gauge] l 391
[Histogram] l 384
[Luminance Spot Meter]
l
266
[Frame Marker]
l
268
[Photo Grid Line] l 385
[Live View Boost] l 386
[Monochrome Live View] l 392
[Night Mode] l 387
[LVF/Monitor Disp. Style] l 387
[Photo/Video Preview] l 388
[Zebra Pattern] l 393
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)] l 278
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] l 401
[HLG View Assist (Monitor)] l 392
[HLG View Assist (HDMI)] l 392
[Sheer Overlay] l 390
[I.S. Status Scope] l 390
[Waveform Monitor]
l
264
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]
l
286
[Lens / Others]
[Focus Ring Control] l 394
[Card/File]
[Destination Card Slot] l 88
[IN/OUT]
[Wi-Fi] l 416
[Others]
[No Setting]
0
Set when not using.
13. Camera Customization
336
Quick Menu Detailed Settings
Change the appearance of the Quick menu and the operation of
during menu display.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Q.MENU Settings]
[Layout Style]
Changes the appearance of the Quick menu.
[MODE1]: Displays the live view and the menu
simultaneously.
[MODE2]: Displays the menu in full screen.
[Front Dial
Assignment]
Changes the operation of in the Quick menu.
[Item]: Selects menu items.
[Value]: Selects setting values.
[Item Customize
(Photo)]
Customizes the Quick menu to display when the mode dial
is set to [iA]/[P]/[A]/[S]/[M].
[Item Customize
(Video)]
Customizes the Quick menu to display when the mode dial
is set to [ ]/[S&Q].
13. Camera Customization
337
Recording modes and menu settings that match your preferences can be
registered in Custom mode. You can use registered settings by switching
the mode dial to [C1] to [C3] modes.
Register in Custom Mode
You can register the currently set information of the camera.
At the time of purchase, the default settings of the [P] mode menus are
registered with all Custom modes.
1
Set to recording mode and menu settings of the state
you wish to save.
2
Select [Save to Custom Mode].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Save to
Custom Mode]
3
Register.
≥Select the save-to number and then
press or .
0
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
Press [DISP.] to change the Custom
mode name.
How to enter characters (l 415)
Custom Mode
0
You cannot register [iA] mode in Custom mode.
0
List of settings that can be registered in Custom mode (l 531)
13. Camera Customization
338
Custom Mode Detailed Settings
You can create additional Custom mode sets, and how long to retain
temporarily changed settings details.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Custom Mode Settings]
[Limit No. of Custom
Mode]
Sets the number of Custom modes that can be registered in
[C3].
A maximum of 10 sets can be registered; 3 sets are
available as default settings.
[Edit Title]
Changes the Custom mode name.
A maximum of 22 characters can be entered. A two-byte
character is treated as two characters.
0
How to enter characters (l 415)
[How to Reload
Custom Mode]
Sets the timing at which to return the settings that were
changed temporarily while the Custom mode was being
used to their registered settings.
[Change Recording Mode]/[Return from Sleep Mode]/
[Turn the Power ON]
[Select Loading
Details]
Sets the types of settings to call up with [Load Custom
Mode].
[F / SS / ISO Sensitivity]: Enables calling up of aperture
value, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity settings.
[White Balance]: Enables calling up of white balance
settings.
13. Camera Customization
339
Using Custom Mode
Set the mode dial to one of [C1] to
[C3].
≥ If [C3], the last-used Custom mode will be
called up.
[C3] Custom Mode Selection
1
Set the mode dial to [C3].
2
Press .
0
The Custom mode selection menu appears.
3
Press 34 to select the Custom mode
and then press or .
0
The selected Custom mode icon will be
displayed on the recording screen.
Changing Registered Details
Registered settings do not change even if you change the camera settings
temporarily with the mode dial set to [C1] to [C3].
To change the registered details, overwrite them by using [Save to Custom
Mode] in the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu.
13. Camera Customization
340
Calling Up Settings
Call up registered Custom mode settings to the selected recording mode
and overwrite the current settings with these.
1
Set to the mode dial to use.
2
Select [Load Custom Mode].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Load
Custom Mode]
3
Select the Custom mode to
call up.
≥Select the Custom mode and then
press or .
0
Calling up of Custom modes is not possible between those created from [P]/
[A]/[S]/[M] modes and those created from [ ]/[S&Q] modes.
13. Camera Customization
341
Register frequently-used menus in My Menu.
A maximum of 23 items can be registered.
Registered menus can be called up from [ ] to [ ].
Registration in My Menu
1
Select [Add].
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Add]
2
Register.
≥Select the menu to register and
then press or .
Calling up My Menu
Call up the menus registered in My Menu.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ]/[ ]/[ ] ¨ Registered menus
My Menu
13. Camera Customization
342
Edit My Menu
You can reorder the display order of My Menu, and delete unnecessary
menus.
¨ [ ] ¨ Select [ ]
[Add]
Selects and registers the menus to be displayed in My
Menu.
[Sorting]
Changes the order of My Menu.
Select the menu to change, then set the destination.
[Delete]
Deletes menus that are registered to My Menu.
[Delete Item]: Selects the menu, then deletes.
[Delete All]: Deletes all menus registered in My Menu.
[Display from My
Menu]
Displays My Menu first when displaying a menu.
[ON]: Displays My Menu.
[OFF]: Displays the last-used menu.
13. Camera Customization
343
Saves the camera’s settings information to the card.
Saved settings information can be loaded to the camera, letting you set the
same settings on multiple cameras.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Save/Restore Camera Setting]
[Save/Restore Camera Setting]
[Save]
Saves the camera’s settings information to the card.
0
If saving new data, then select [New File], and if overwriting an
existing file, select that existing file.
0
When [New File] is selected, a screen to select the file name
to save as is displayed.
[OK] Saves using the file name on the screen.
[Change the file
name]
Changes the file name and saves the file.
0
Available characters: alphabetic
characters (upper-case), numerals, up
to 8 characters
0
How to enter characters (l 415)
[Load]
Loads the settings information on the card and copies it to the
camera.
[Delete] Deletes settings information on the card.
[Keep Settings
While Format]
When formatting the card, formats the card while keeping
camera settings information stored on the card.
0
Only settings information from the same model can be loaded.
0
Up to 10 instances of settings information can be saved on one card.
0
List of functions for which saving of settings information is possible (l 531)
344
14.
Menu Guide
Camera customization and many function settings are performed with
menus on this camera. This chapter provides a list of menus and describes
them in detail.
Menus explained in detail in other chapters are indicated with page
numbers.
0
For information about menu operation methods, refer to page 73.
Search the Menus
List of Menu l 345
Learn About the Menu Functions and Default Settings
[Photo] Menu l 350
[Video] Menu l 364
[Custom] Menu l 370
[Setup] Menu l 395
[My Menu] l 341
[Playback] Menu l 406
Enter Characters
Entering Characters l 415
0
Refer to the “17. Materials” chapter for the following lists:
– List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying:
l 531
– List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode: l 545
14. Menu Guide
345
[Photo] menu
List of Menu
: Menu items common to the [Photo] menu and [Video] menu.
Their settings are synchronized.
[Image Quality] l 350
[Photo Style] l 350
[Metering Mode] l 350
[Aspect Ratio] l 350
[Picture Quality] l 350
[Picture Size] l 350
[HLG Photo] l 350
[High Resolution Mode] l 351
[Long Exposure NR] l 351
[ISO Sensitivity (photo)] l 352
[Min. Shutter Speed] l 352
[i.Dynamic Range] l 353
[Vignetting Comp.] l 354
[Diffraction
Compensation]
l 354
[Filter Settings] l 355
[Focus] l 355
[AF Custom
Setting(Photo)]
l
355
[AF Assist Light] l 355
[Focus Peaking] l 356
[1-Area AF Moving
Speed]
l 356
[Flash] l 357
[Flash Mode] l 357
[Firing Mode] l 357
[Flash Adjust.] l 357
[Flash Synchro] l 357
[Manual Flash Adjust.] l 357
[Auto Exposure Comp.] l 357
[Red-Eye Removal] l 357
[Wireless] l 357
[Wireless Channel] l 357
[Wireless FP] l 358
[Communication Light] l 358
[Wireless Setup] l 358
[Others (Photo)] l 358
[Bracketing] l 358
[Silent Mode] l 358
[Image Stabilizer] l 359
[Burst Shot 1 Setting] l 359
[Burst Shot 2 Setting] l 359
[Shutter Type] l 360
[Shutter Delay] l 360
[Ex. Tele Conv.] l 360
[Time Lapse/Animation] l 360
[Live View Composite] l 361
[Self Timer] l 361
[6K/4K PHOTO] l 361
[Post-Focus] l 362
[Multiple Exposure] l 362
14. Menu Guide
346
[Video] menu
[Image Quality] l 364
[Exposure Mode] l 364
[Photo Style] l 364
[Metering Mode] l 364
[ISO Sensitivity (video)] l 364
[Flicker Decrease
(Video)]
l 365
[i.Dynamic Range] l 365
[Vignetting Comp.] l 354
[Diffraction
Compensation]
l 354
[Filter Settings] l 355
[Image Format] l 366
[Image Area of Video] l 366
[Rec Quality] l 366
[Slow & Quick Setting] l 366
[Switch NTSC/PAL] l 366
[Rec. File Format] l 366
[Time Code] l 366
[Luminance Level] l 366
[Anamorphic(4:3)] l 366
[Focus] l 367
[AF Custom
Setting(Video)]
l 367
[Continuous AF] l 367
[AF Assist Light] l 367
[Focus Peaking] l 367
[1-Area AF Moving
Speed]
l 367
[Audio] l 368
[Sound Rec Level Disp.] l 368
[Sound Rec Level Adj.] l 368
[Sound Rec Level
Limiter]
l 368
[Wind Noise Canceller]/ l 368
[Wind Cut] l 368
[Mic Socket] l 368
[Special Mic.] l 368
[XLR Mic Adaptor
Setting]
l 368
[Sound Output] l 368
[Headphone Volume] l 369
[Others (Video)] l 369
[Silent Mode] l 369
[Image Stabilizer] l 369
[Live Cropping] l 369
14. Menu Guide
347
[Custom] menu
[Image Quality] l 370
[Photo Style Settings] l 370
[ISO Increments] l 370
[Extended ISO] l 371
[Exposure Offset Adjust.] l 371
[Color Space] l 371
[Exposure Comp. Reset] l 372
[Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M] l 372
[CreativeVideo Combined Set.] l 372
[Focus/Shutter] l 373
[Focus/Shutter Priority] l 373
[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor] l 373
[AF/AE Lock Hold] l 373
[AF+MF] l 373
[MF Assist] l 374
[MF Guide] l 374
[Focus Ring Lock] l 374
[Show/Hide AF Mode] l 375
[Pinpoint AF Setting] l 375
[AF-Point Scope Setting] l 376
[Shutter AF] l 376
[Half-Press Shutter] l 376
[Quick AF] l 376
[Eye Sensor AF] l 376
[Looped Focus Frame] l 377
[AFC Start Point (225-Area)] l 377
[Operation] l 377
[Q.MENU Settings] l 377
[Touch Settings] l 377
[Operation Lock Setup] l 378
[Fn Button Set] l 378
[WB/ISO/Expo. Button] l 379
[ISO Displayed Setting] l 379
[Exposure Comp. Disp.
Setting]
l 379
[Dial Set.] l 380
[Joystick Setting] l 381
[Video Rec. Button (Remote)] l 381
[Monitor / Display
(Photo)]
l 382
[Auto Review] l 382
[Constant Preview] l 383
[Histogram] l 384
[Photo Grid Line] l 385
[Frame Marker] l 385
[AF Area Display] l 385
[Live View Boost] l 386
[Night Mode] l 387
[LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] l 387
[Expo.Meter] l 388
[Focal Length] l 388
[Photo/Video Preview] l 388
[Photos/Videos Remaining] l 389
[Blinking Highlights] l 389
[Sheer Overlay] l 390
[I.S. Status Scope] l 390
[Level Gauge] l 391
[Luminance Spot Meter] l 391
[Framing Outline] l 391
[Show/Hide Monitor Layout] l 391
14. Menu Guide
348
[Custom] menu (Continued)
[Setup] menu
[Monitor / Display
(Video)]
l 392
[V-Log View Assist] l 392
[HLG View Assist] l 392
[Anamorphic Desqueeze
Display]
l 392
[Monochrome Live View] l 392
[Center Marker] l 393
[Zebra Pattern] l 393
[Waveform Monitor] l 393
[Red REC Frame Indicator] l 393
[IN/OUT] l 393
[HDMI Rec Output] l 393
[Lens / Others] l 394
[Lens Focus Resume] l 394
[Lens Fn Button Setting] l 394
[Focus Ring Control] l 394
[Card/File] l 395
[Card Format] l 395
[Double Card Slot Function] l 395
[Folder / File Settings] l 395
[File Number Reset] l 395
[Copyright Information] l 395
[Monitor / Display] l 396
[Power Save Mode] l 396
[Monitor Frame Rate] l 396
[LVF Frame Rate] l 397
[Monitor Settings]/[Viewfinder] l 397
[Monitor Backlight]/
[LVF Luminance]
l 398
[Eye Sensor] l 398
[Level Gauge Adjust.] l 398
[IN/OUT] l 399
[Beep] l 399
[Headphone Volume] l 399
[Wi-Fi] l 399
[Bluetooth] l 400
[USB] l 400
[Battery Use Priority] l 401
[TV Connection] l 401
[Wireless Connection Light] l 402
[Setting] l 403
[Save to Custom Mode] l 403
[Load Custom Mode] l 403
[Custom Mode Settings] l 403
[Save/Restore Camera Setting] l 403
[Reset] l 403
14. Menu Guide
349
[Setup] menu (Continued)
[My Menu]
[Playback] menu
[Others] l 404
[Clock Set] l 404
[Time Zone] l 404
[Pixel Refresh] l 404
[Sensor Cleaning] l 404
[Language] l 405
[Firmware Version] l 405
[Online Manual] l 405
[Page 1] l 341
[Page 2] l 341
[Page 3] l 341
[Edit My Menu] l 342
[Add] l 342
[Sorting] l 342
[Delete] l 342
[Display from My Menu] l 342
[Playback Mode] l 407
[Playback Mode] l 407
[Slide Show] l 407
[Rotate Disp.] l 407
[Picture Sort] l 408
[Magnify from AF Point] l 408
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)] l 408
[HLG View Assist (Monitor)] l 409
[Anamorphic Desqueeze
Display]
l 409
[Process Image] l 410
[RAW Processing] l 410
[6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving] l 410
[6K/4K PHOTO Noise
Reduction]
l 410
[Time Lapse Video] l 410
[Stop Motion Video] l 410
[Add/Delete Info.] l 411
[Protect] l 411
[Rating] l 411
[Edit Image] l 412
[Resize] l 412
[Rotate] l 412
[Video Divide] l 412
[Copy] l 413
[Others] l 414
[Delete Confirmation] l 414
[Delete All Images] l 414
14. Menu Guide
350
[Photo] Menu
: Menu items common to the [Photo] menu and [Video] menu.
Their settings are synchronized.
`: Default settings
[Photo] menu ¨ [Image Quality]
[Photo Style]
`[Standard]/[Vivid]/[Natural]/[Flat]/[Landscape]/
[Portrait]/[Monochrome]/[L.Monochrome]/
[L.Monochrome D]/[Cinelike D2]/[Cinelike V2]/
[Like709]/[V-Log]/[Standard(HLG)]/
[Monochrome(HLG)]/[MY PHOTO STYLE 1] to
[MY PHOTO STYLE 10]
l 208
You can select the finishing settings of images to
suit your subjects and expression styles.
[Metering Mode]
`[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]
l 184
Type of optical measurement to measure
brightness can be changed.
[Aspect Ratio]
[4:3]/`[3:2]/[16:9]/[1:1]/[65:24]/[2:1]
l 83
You can select the image aspect ratio.
[Picture Quality]
`[FINE]/[STD.]/[RAWiFINE]/[RAWiSTD.]/[RAW]
l 86
Set the compression rate used for storing pictures.
[Picture Size]
`[L]/[M]/[S]
l 85
Sets the picture’s image size.
[HLG Photo]
[Full-Res.]/[4K-Res.]/`[OFF]
l 225
Records an HLG format picture with a wide
dynamic range.
14. Menu Guide
351
[Photo] menu ¨ [Image Quality]
[High Resolution
Mode]
[Start]
l 221
[Picture Size] `[XL]/[LL]
[Picture Quality] `[COMBINED]/[FINE]/
[RAWiFINE]/[RAW]
[Simul Record
Normal Shot]
`[ON]/[OFF]
[Shutter Delay] [30 SEC] to [1/8 SEC] (`[2
SEC])/[Off]
[Motion Blur
Processing]
`[MODE1]/[MODE2]
Merges pictures with a high resolution from
multiple recorded images.
[Long Exposure
NR]
`[ON]/[OFF]
—
The camera automatically removes noise
generated when recording images with a slow
shutter speed.
0
Recording is not possible during noise
reduction.
0
When the following functions are being used,
[Long Exposure NR] is not available:
– Video recording/[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
– [ELEC.] (Excluding [ELEC.+NR])/[Silent
Mode]
14. Menu Guide
352
[Photo] menu ¨ [Image Quality]
[ISO Sensitivity
(photo)]
[ISO Auto Lower
Limit Setting]
`[100] to [25600]
—
[ISO Auto Upper
Limit Setting]
`[AUTO]/[200] to [51200]
Sets the lower and upper limits for ISO sensitivity
when ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO].
0
When the following function is being used, [ISO
Sensitivity (photo)] is not available:
– [Live View Composite]
[Min. Shutter
Speed]
`[AUTO]/[1/8000] to [1/1]
—
Sets the minimum shutter speed when the ISO
sensitivity is set to [AUTO].
0
The shutter speed may become slower than the
set value in recording situations where correct
exposure cannot be achieved.
14. Menu Guide
353
[Photo] menu ¨ [Image Quality]
[i.Dynamic Range]
[AUTO]/[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/`[OFF]
—
Contrast and exposure are compensated when
the brightness difference between the background
and subject is great.
0
Compensation effect may not be achieved
depending on the recording conditions.
0
When the following functions are being used,
[i.Dynamic Range] is not available:
– [Like709]/[V-Log]/[Standard(HLG)]/
[Monochrome(HLG)]/[Like2100(HLG)] ([Photo
Style])
– [Filter Settings]
– [Live View Composite]
14. Menu Guide
354
[Photo] menu ¨ [Image Quality]
[Vignetting Comp.]
`[ON]/[OFF]
—
When the screen periphery darkens as a result of
the lens characteristics, you can record pictures
with the brightness of the screen periphery
corrected.
0
Compensation effect may not be achieved
depending on the recording conditions.
0
Noise in the periphery of the picture may stand
out with higher ISO sensitivity.
0
When the following function is being used,
[Vignetting Comp.] in the [Photo] ([Image
Quality]) menu is not available:
– [Ex. Tele Conv.]
0
When the following functions are being used,
[Vignetting Comp.] in the [Video] ([Image
Quality]) menu is not available:
– [APS-C]
¢
/[PIXEL/PIXEL] ([Image Area of
Video])
¢ Only when using a full-frame lens
[Diffraction
Compensation]
[AUTO]/`[OFF]
—
The camera raises the image resolution by
correcting the blurriness caused by diffraction
when the aperture is closed.
0
Compensation effect may not be achieved
depending on the recording conditions.
0
Noise may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity.
14. Menu Guide
355
[Photo] menu ¨ [Image Quality]
[Filter Settings]
[Filter Effect] [ON]/`[OFF]/[SET]
l 215
[Simultaneous
Record w/o Filter]
[ON]/`[OFF]
This mode records with additional image effects
(filters).
[Photo] menu ¨ [Focus]
[AF Custom
Setting(Photo)]
`[Set 1]/[Set 2]/[Set 3]/[Set 4]
l 98
Select features of AF operation when recording
using [AFC] that are appropriate for the subject
and scene.
[AF Assist Light]
`[ON]/[OFF]
—
When recording in low light conditions, the AF
assist light turns on when you press the shutter
button halfway, making it easier for the camera to
focus.
0
The effective range of the AF assist light is
different depending on the lens used.
– When the interchangeable lens (S-R2060) is
attached and at wide-angle end:
Approx. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.0 m (9.8 feet)
0
Remove the lens hood.
0
The AF assist light may be greatly blocked, and
it may become harder to focus when a lens with
large diameter is used.
14. Menu Guide
356
[Photo] menu ¨ [Focus]
[Focus Peaking]
`[ON]/[OFF]
—
[SET] [Focus Peaking
Sensitivity]
[Display Color]
[Display While AFS]
During MF operation, in-focus portions (portions
on the screen with clear outlines) are highlighted
with color.
0
If the [Focus Peaking Sensitivity] is adjusted to
the negative direction, portions to be highlighted
are reduced, allowing you to achieve a more
precise focus.
0
With [Display Color], you can set the display
color of the in-focus portion.
0
When [Display While AFS] is set to [ON], the
Focus Peaking display is also possible when the
shutter button is pressed halfway in the [AFS]
focus mode.
0
You can display the Touch Tab (l 377) and then
touch [ ] in [ ] to switch [ON]/[OFF].
0
When [Rough Monochrome] of [Filter Settings]
is being used, [Focus Peaking] is not available.
0
When [Live View Boost] is being used, [Focus
Peaking] is not available.
[1-Area AF Moving
Speed]
`[FAST]/[NORMAL]
—
Sets the speed when moving a single AF area.
14. Menu Guide
357
[Photo] menu ¨ [Flash]
[Flash Mode]
`[‰]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[Œ]
l 229
Sets the flash mode.
[Firing Mode]
`[TTL]/[MANUAL]
l 232
You can select whether to set the flash output
automatically or manually.
[Flash Adjust.]
[j3 EV] to [i3 EV] (`[±0 EV])
l 233
When [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL], you can adjust
the flash output.
[Flash Synchro]
`[1ST]/[2ND]
l 234
Sets the flash mode to Second Curtain Synchro.
[Manual Flash
Adjust.]
[1/128] to `[1/1]
l 232
When [Firing Mode] is set to [MANUAL], you can
set the flash output.
[Auto Exposure
Comp.]
[ON]/`[OFF]
l 235
Automatically adjust the flash output in conjunction
with the exposure compensation value.
[Red-Eye Removal]
[ON]/`[OFF]
l 231
When [Flash Mode] is set to [ ] or [ ], the
camera automatically detects red-eye and corrects
image data.
[Wireless]
[ON]/`[OFF]
l 237
Enables recording using a wireless flash.
[Wireless Channel]
`[1CH]/[2CH]/[3CH]/[4CH]
l 237
Sets the channel to use when recording with a
wireless flash.
14. Menu Guide
358
[Photo] menu ¨ [Flash]
[Wireless FP]
[ON]/`[OFF]
l 239
Uses FP firing for an external flash when recording
with a wireless flash.
[Communication
Light]
`[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]
l 239
Set the strength of communication light.
[Wireless Setup]
[External Flash] [Firing Mode]/[Flash
Adjust.]/[Manual Flash
Adjust.]
l 238
[A Group]/[B Group]/
[C Group]
[Firing Mode]/[Flash
Adjust.]/[Manual Flash
Adjust.]
Sets details for wireless flash recording.
[Photo] menu ¨ [Others (Photo)]
[Bracketing]
[Bracketing Type]
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/
[]/`[OFF]
l 156
[More Settings]
You can take multiple pictures while automatically
adjusting a setting.
[Silent Mode]
[ON]/`[OFF]
l 174
Disables all operation sounds and light output at
once.
14. Menu Guide
359
[Photo] menu ¨ [Others (Photo)]
[Image Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode] `[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/
[ ]/[OFF]
l 177
[Body(B.I.S.) /
Lens(O.I.S.)]
[]/`[]
[When to Activate] [ALWAYS]/
`[HALF-SHUTTER]
[E-Stabilization
(Video)]
[ON]/`[OFF]
[Boost I.S. (Video)] [ON]/`[OFF]
[Anamorphic (Video)] [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/
[ ]/[ ]/`[OFF]
[Focal Length Set] [0.1 mm] to [1000.0 mm]
(`[35.0 mm])
Configures image stabilizer settings.
[Burst Shot 1
Setting]
[]/`[H]/[M]/[L]
l 129
l 133
Sets the burst recording operation of the drive
mode [ ].
[Burst Shot 2
Setting]
`[ ]/[H]/[M]/[L]
l 129
l 133
Sets the burst recording operation of the drive
mode [ ].
14. Menu Guide
360
[Photo] menu ¨ [Others (Photo)]
[Shutter Type]
[AUTO]/`[MECH.]/[EFC]/[ELEC.]/[ELEC.+NR]
l 175
Selects the shutter type to use for taking pictures.
[Shutter Delay]
[8SEC]/[4SEC]/[2SEC]/[1SEC]/`[OFF]
—
To reduce camera shake and shutter-induced blur,
the shutter is released after the specified time has
passed since the shutter button was pressed.
0
When the following functions are being used,
[Shutter Delay] is not available:
– Video recording/[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
– [High Resolution Mode]
– [Live View Composite]
[Ex. Tele Conv.]
[ZOOM]/[TELE CONV.]/`[OFF]
l 125
You can take pictures that are further enlarged
beyond what is available with the optical zoom,
without any deterioration in image quality.
[Time Lapse/
Animation]
[Mode] `[Time Lapse Shot]
l 145
l 149
[Stop Motion Animation]
Time Lapse Shot automatically starts/stops
recording at a set recording interval.
Stop Motion Animation enables you to take
pictures while moving the subject little by little.
14. Menu Guide
361
[Photo] menu ¨ [Others (Photo)]
[Live View
Composite]
[Start]
l 162
[Shutter Delay] [8 SEC]/[4 SEC]/[2 SEC]/
[1 SEC]/`[OFF]
Images are recorded over several times and only
the parts that change to become brighter form part
of the composition.
[Self Timer]
`[ ]/[ ]/[ ]
l 154
Sets the self-timer duration.
[6K/4K PHOTO]
[Picture Size / Burst
Speed]
`[6K 18M]/[4K H 8M]/[4K
8M]
l 133
[Rec Method] `[6K/4K Burst]/[6K/4K
Burst(S/S)]/[6K/4K
Pre-Burst]
[Pre-Burst
Recording]
[ON]/`[OFF]
Sets 6K/4K photos.
You can save pictures extracted from a burst file
taken using high-speed burst.
14. Menu Guide
362
[Photo] menu ¨ [Others (Photo)]
[Post-Focus]
[6K 18M]/[4K 8M]/`[OFF]
l 166
Taking burst pictures with the same image quality
as 6K/4K photos while automatically changing the
focus point.
You can select the focus point for the picture to
save after recording.
[Multiple Exposure]
[Start]
—
[Auto Gain] `[ON]/[OFF]
[Overlay] [ON]/`[OFF]
You can apply an effect equivalent to four
exposures on a single image.
[Start]: Starts exposure for multiple exposures.
[Auto Gain]: Automatically adjusts brightness in
accordance with image count.
[Overlay]: Allows multiple exposure for recorded
RAW images. After selecting [Start], a selection
screen for images to stack is displayed.
0
After selecting [Start], pressing the shutter
button fully starts multiple exposure.
0
Preview is displayed for each recording, and the
following operations are available:
– [Next] (You can also
perform the same
operation by pressing
the shutter button
halfway.)
–[Retake]
– [Exit]: Records the picture, and finishes
multiple exposure recording.
([LW
5HWDNH
1H[W
14. Menu Guide
363
[Photo] menu ¨ [Others (Photo)]
[Multiple Exposure]
(Continued)
0
To finish multiple exposure recording before
starting the recording, press [Q] on the recording
screen.
0
Recording information for the last-recorded
image will be saved as recording information for
images recorded with multiple exposures.
0
[Overlay] can be set only for RAW images
recorded with the camera.
0
For RAW images recorded using the following
functions, [Overlay] cannot be set:
– [65:24]/[2:1] ([Aspect Ratio])
– [HLG Photo]
– [High Resolution Mode]
0
When the following functions are being used,
[Multiple Exposure] is not available:
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation]
– [High Resolution Mode]
– [Filter Settings]
– [Live View Composite]
– HDMI output
0
When using APS-C lenses, [Multiple Exposure]
is not available.
—
14. Menu Guide
364
[Video] Menu
: Menu items common to the [Photo] menu and [Video] menu.
Their settings are synchronized.
`: Default settings
[Video] menu ¨ [Image Quality]
[Exposure Mode]
`[P]/[A]/[S]/[M]
l 245
Sets the exposure mode to use in [ ]/[S&Q]
mode.
[Photo Style]
`[Standard]/[Vivid]/[Natural]/[Flat]/[Landscape]/
[Portrait]/[Monochrome]/[L.Monochrome]/
[L.Monochrome D]/[Cinelike D2]/[Cinelike V2]/
[Like709]/[V-Log]/[Standard(HLG)]/
[Monochrome(HLG)]/[Like2100(HLG)]/[MY
PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO STYLE 10]
l 208
You can select the finishing settings of images to
suit your subjects and expression styles.
[Metering Mode]
`[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]
l 184
Type of optical measurement to measure
brightness can be changed.
[ISO Sensitivity
(video)]
[ISO Auto Lower
Limit Setting]
`[100] to [25600]
l 262
[ISO Auto Upper
Limit Setting]
`[AUTO]/[200] to [51200]
Sets the lower and upper limits for ISO sensitivity
when ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO].
14. Menu Guide
365
[Video] menu ¨ [Image Quality]
[Flicker Decrease
(Video)]
[1/50]/[1/60]/[1/100]/[1/120]/`[OFF]
—
The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the
flicker or striping in the video.
0
This can be set when [Auto Exposure in P/A/S/
M] is [ON].
[i.Dynamic Range]
[AUTO]/[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/`[OFF]
l 353
Contrast and exposure are compensated when
the brightness difference between the background
and subject is great.
[Vignetting Comp.]
`[ON]/[OFF]
l 354
When the screen periphery darkens as a result of
the lens characteristics, you can record pictures
with the brightness of the screen periphery
corrected.
[Diffraction
Compensation]
[AUTO]/`[OFF]
l 354
The camera raises the image resolution by
correcting the blurriness caused by diffraction
when the aperture is closed.
[Filter Settings]
[Filter Effect] [ON]/`[OFF]/[SET]
l 215
[Simultaneous
Record w/o Filter]
[ON]/`[OFF]
This mode records with additional image effects
(filters).
14. Menu Guide
366
[Video] menu ¨ [Image Format]
[Image Area of
Video]
`[FULL]/[APS-C]/[PIXEL/PIXEL]
l 249
Sets the image area during video recording.
[Rec Quality] Sets the video recording image quality. l 250
[Slow & Quick
Setting]
[1fps] to [180fps] (`[30fps])
l 270
Varies the recording frame rate to record slow
motion video and quick motion video.
[Switch NTSC/PAL]
[NTSC]/`[PAL]
l 248
The image qualities you can select in [Rec Quality]
are switched to the image qualities with the frame
rate to suit the NTSC/PAL TV broadcast system.
[Rec. File Format]
`[MP4]/[MOV]
l 249
Sets the video recording file format.
[Time Code]
[Time Code Display] [ON]/`[OFF]
l 254
[Count Up] `[REC RUN]/[FREE RUN]
[Time Code Value] [Reset]
[Manual Input]
[Current Time]
[Time Code Mode] `[DF]/[NDF]
[HDMI Time Code
Output]
[ON]/`[OFF]
Sets the recording, display, and output of the time
code.
[Luminance Level]
[0-255]/[16-235]/`[16-255]
l 259
You can set the luminance range to suit the
purpose of video recording.
[Anamorphic(4:3)] Sets the image quality of anamorphic (4:3) videos. l 284
14. Menu Guide
367
[Video] menu ¨ [Focus]
[AF Custom
Setting(Video)]
[ON]/`[OFF]
l 258
[SET] [AF Speed]
[AF Sensitivity]
You can fine-adjust the focusing method for video
recording using [Continuous AF].
[Continuous AF]
`[MODE1]/[MODE2]/[OFF]
l 256
You can select how to set the focus in AF when
recording videos.
[AF Assist Light]
`[ON]/[OFF]
l 355
When recording in low light conditions, the AF
assist light turns on when you press the shutter
button halfway, making it easier for the camera to
focus.
[Focus Peaking]
`[ON]/[OFF]
l 356
[SET] [Focus Peaking
Sensitivity]
[Display Color]
[Display While AFS]
During MF operation, in-focus portions (portions
on the screen with clear outlines) are highlighted
with color.
[1-Area AF Moving
Speed]
`[FAST]/[NORMAL]
l 356
Sets the speed when moving a single AF area.
14. Menu Guide
368
[Video] menu ¨ [Audio]
[Sound Rec Level
Disp.]
[ON]/`[OFF]
l 263
The sound recording level is displayed on the
recording screen.
[Sound Rec Level
Adj.]
[MUTE]/[j12dB] to [i6dB] (`[0dB])
l 263
Manually adjust the sound recording level.
[Sound Rec Level
Limiter]
`[ON]/[OFF]
l 263
The sound recording level is adjusted
automatically to minimize sound distortion
(crackling noise).
[Wind Noise
Canceller]
[HIGH]/`[STANDARD]/[OFF]
l 263
This reduces the wind noise coming into the
built-in microphone while maintaining sound
quality.
[Wind Cut]
[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/`[OFF]
l 295
This reduces wind noise when an external
microphone is connected.
[Mic Socket]
`[ ]/[ ]/[ ]
l 293
Sets the [MIC] socket input method that suits the
device to be connected.
[Special Mic.]
`[STEREO]/[LENS AUTO]/[SHOTGUN]/
[S.SHOTGUN]/[MANUAL]
l 294
Sets the sound pickup range when using the
Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2:
optional).
[XLR Mic Adaptor
Setting]
`[ON]/[OFF]
l 296
Enables recording from the XLR Microphone
Adaptor (DMW-XLR1: optional).
[Sound Output]
`[REALTIME]/[REC SOUND]
l 298
Sets the audio output method when headphones
are connected.
14. Menu Guide
369
[Video] menu ¨ [Audio]
[Headphone
Volume]
[0] to [LEVEL15] (`[LEVEL3])
l 299
Adjusts the volume when headphones are
connected.
[Video] menu ¨ [Others (Video)]
[Silent Mode]
[ON]/`[OFF]
l 174
Disables all operation sounds and light output at
once.
[Image Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode] `[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/
[ ]/[OFF]
l 177
[Body(B.I.S.) /
Lens(O.I.S.)]
[]/`[]
[When to Activate] [ALWAYS]/
`[HALF-SHUTTER]
[E-Stabilization
(Video)]
[ON]/`[OFF]
[Boost I.S. (Video)] [ON]/`[OFF]
[Anamorphic (Video)] [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/
[ ]/[ ]/`[OFF]
[Focal Length Set] [0.1 mm] to [1000.0 mm]
(`[35.0 mm])
Configures image stabilizer settings.
[Live Cropping]
[40SEC]/[20SEC]/`[OFF]
l 272
By cropping a part of the range displayed in the
live view, it is possible to record FHD video that
incorporates panning and zooming with the
camera staying in a fixed position.
14. Menu Guide
370
[Custom] Menu
`: Default settings
[Custom] menu ¨ [Image Quality]
[Photo Style
Settings]
[Show/Hide Photo
Style]
[Vivid]/[Natural]/[Flat]/[Landscape]/
[Portrait]/[L.Monochrome]/
[L.Monochrome D]/[Cinelike D2]/
[Cinelike V2]/[Like709]/[V-Log]/
[Like2100(HLG)]/[MY PHOTO
STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO STYLE
10]
Sets Photo Style items to be displayed on the menu.
[My Photo Style
Settings]
[Add Effects]
[Load Preset Setting]
Enables detailed image quality adjustment settings for My
Photo Style.
[Add Effects]: Enables [Sensitivity] and [White Balance]
settings in image quality adjustment.
[Load Preset Setting]: Sets the timing at which image
quality adjustment values changed in My Photo Style are
returned to their registered state.
[Reset Photo Style]
Returns details changed in [Photo Style] and [Photo Style
Settings] to their default settings.
[ISO Increments]
`[1/3 EV]/[1 EV]
Changes the intervals between ISO sensitivity adjustment
values.
14. Menu Guide
371
[Custom] menu ¨ [Image Quality]
[Extended ISO]
[ON]/`[OFF]
Setting of ISO sensitivity to a minimum of [ISO50] and a
maximum of [ISO204800] is possible.
[Exposure Offset
Adjust.]
[Multi Metering] [j1EV] to [i1EV] (`[n0EV])
[Center Weighted] [j1EV] to [i1EV] (`[n0EV])
[Spot] [j1EV] to [i1EV] (`[n0EV])
[Highlight Weighted] [j1EV] to [i1EV] (`[n0EV])
Adjusts the exposure level that is the standard exposure for
each setting item of [Metering Mode].
Adds the adjustment value from this function to the exposure
compensation value (l 196) when recording.
0
For video recording, [6K/4K PHOTO], and [Post-Focus], it
is not possible to add an adjustment value of a range that
exceeds n3EV.
[Color Space]
`[sRGB]/[AdobeRGB]
This sets the method for correcting the color reproduction of
the recorded images on the screens of a PC or on a device
such as a printer.
[sRGB]: This is widely used in PCs and similar devices.
[AdobeRGB]: AdobeRGB is mainly used for business
purposes such as professional printing because it has a
greater range of reproducible colors than sRGB.
0
Set to [sRGB] if you are not very familiar with AdobeRGB.
0
When the following functions are being used, the setting is
fixed to [sRGB]:
– Video recording/[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
– [Like709]/[V-Log] ([Photo Style])
– [Filter Settings]
14. Menu Guide
372
[Custom] menu ¨ [Image Quality]
[Exposure Comp.
Reset]
[ON]/`[OFF]
This resets the exposure value when you change the
recording mode or turn off the camera.
[Auto Exposure in
P/A/S/M]
`[ON]/[OFF]
Selects the setting method for aperture value, shutter speed,
and ISO sensitivity for the video being recorded in the [P]/
[A]/[S]/[M] modes.
[ON]: Records with values set automatically by the camera.
[OFF]: Records with manually set values.
[CreativeVideo
Combined Set.]
[F/SS/ISO/Exposure
Comp.]
`[ ]/[ ]
[White Balance] `[ ]/[ ]
[Photo Style] `[ ]/[ ]
[Metering Mode] `[ ]/[ ]
[AF Mode] `[ ]/[ ]
Content set in [ ]/[S&Q] mode can be separated from
when taking pictures.
0
For details, refer to page 247.
14. Menu Guide
373
[Custom] menu ¨ [Focus/Shutter]
[Focus/Shutter
Priority]
[AFS] `[FOCUS]/[BALANCE]/[RELEASE]
[AFC] [FOCUS]/`[BALANCE]/[RELEASE]
This sets whether to give priority to focus or shutter release
during AF.
[FOCUS]: Disables recording when focus is not achieved.
[BALANCE]: Performs recording while controlling the
balance between focusing and shutter release timing.
[RELEASE]: Enables recording even when focus is not
achieved.
[Focus Switching
for Vert / Hor]
[ON]/`[OFF]
This stores separate AF area positions (MF positions for MF
Assist) for when the camera is held vertically and when it is
held horizontally.
0
For details, refer to page 119.
[AF/AE Lock Hold]
[ON]/`[OFF]
This sets button operations for AF/AE Lock.
Turning this [ON] maintains the lock after releasing the
button until it is pressed again.
[AF+MF]
[ON]/`[OFF]
You can fine-adjust the focus manually during AF Lock by
rotating the focus ring.
– When focus mode is [AFS]/[AFC], and the shutter button is
pressed halfway
– When [AF ON] is pressed
– When locked using the Fn button [AF LOCK] or [AF/AE
LOCK]
14. Menu Guide
374
[Custom] menu ¨ [Focus/Shutter]
[MF Assist]
[Focus Ring] `[ON]/[OFF]
[AF Mode] `[ON]/[OFF]
[Press Joystick] [ON]/`[OFF]
[MF Assist Display] [FULL]/`[PIP]
This sets the display method of MF Assist (enlarged screen).
[Focus Ring]: The screen is enlarged by focusing with the
lens.
[AF Mode]: The screen is enlarged by pressing [ ].
[Press Joystick]: Press the joystick to enlarge the display.
(if [Joystick Setting] is set to [D.FOCUS Movement]) (l 381)
[MF Assist Display]: Sets the display method (full screen
mode/windowed mode) of MF Assist (enlarged screen).
0
While you are using the following functions, MF Assist will
not be displayed:
– Video recording
– [6K/4K Pre-Burst]
[MF Guide]
`[ ]/[ ]/[OFF]
During MF, MF Guide, which acts as a guide to recording
distance, is displayed on the screen. You can select from
meters or feet for the display unit.
[Focus Ring Lock]
[ON]/`[OFF]
This disables the focus ring operation during MF to lock the
focus.
0
[MFL] is displayed on the recording screen while the focus
ring is locked.
14. Menu Guide
375
[Custom] menu ¨ [Focus/Shutter]
[Show/Hide AF
Mode]
[Face/Eye/Body/
Animal Detect.]
`[ON]/[OFF]
[Tracking] `[ON]/[OFF]
[225-Area] `[ON]/[OFF]
[Zone (Vert./ Horz.)] `[ON]/[OFF]
[Zone (Square)] [ON]/`[OFF]
[Zone (Oval)] `[ON]/[OFF]
[1-Area+] `[ON]/[OFF]
[Pinpoint] `[ON]/[OFF]
[Custom1] [ON]/`[OFF]
[Custom2] [ON]/`[OFF]
[Custom3] [ON]/`[OFF]
Sets the AF mode items to be displayed on the AF mode
selection screen.
[Pinpoint AF
Setting]
[Pinpoint AF Time] [LONG]/`[MID]/[SHORT]
[Pinpoint AF Display] [FULL]/`[PIP]
Changes enlarged screen settings displayed when AF mode
is [ ].
[Pinpoint AF Time]: Sets the time for which the screen is
enlarged when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
[Pinpoint AF Display]: Sets the display method (full screen
mode/windowed mode) of the enlarged screen.
14. Menu Guide
376
[Custom] menu ¨ [Focus/Shutter]
[AF-Point Scope
Setting]
[Keep Enlarged
Display]
[ON]/`[OFF]
[PIP Display] [FULL]/`[PIP]
Changes the enlarged screen settings of AF-Point Scope
(l 97).
[Keep Enlarged Display]: Setting this to [ON] maintains the
enlarged screen after pressing the Fn button until it is
pressed again.
[PIP Display]: Sets the display method (full screen mode/
windowed mode) of the enlarged screen.
[Shutter AF]
`[ON]/[OFF]
This adjusts focus automatically when you press the shutter
button halfway.
[Half-Press Shutter]
[ON]/`[OFF]
You can release the shutter quickly by pressing the shutter
button halfway.
[Quick AF]
[ON]/`[OFF]
When the amount of camera shake becomes small, the
camera will automatically adjust the focus and focus
adjustment will then be quicker when the shutter button is
pressed.
0
The battery will drain faster than usual.
0
This function is not available in the following cases:
– In preview mode
– In low light situations
[Eye Sensor AF]
[ON]/`[OFF]
When looking through the viewfinder, if the eye sensor
operates, then AF will function.
0
[Eye Sensor AF] may not work in low light situations.
14. Menu Guide
377
[Custom] menu ¨ [Focus/Shutter]
[Looped Focus
Frame]
[ON]/`[OFF]
When moving the AF area or MF Assist, this enables its
position to loop from one edge to the other edge of the
screen.
[AFC Start Point
(225-Area)]
[ON]/`[OFF]
When the focus mode is set to [AFC] in the [ ] AF mode,
you can specify which area to start [AFC].
0
For details, refer to page 107.
[Custom] menu ¨ [Operation]
[Q.MENU Settings]
[Layout Style] `[MODE1]/[MODE2]
[Front Dial
Assignment]
[Item]/`[Value]
[Item Customize (Photo)]
[Item Customize (Video)]
Customizes the Quick menu.
0
For details, refer to page 332.
[Touch Settings]
[Touch Screen] `[ON]/[OFF]
[Touch Tab] [ON]/`[OFF]
[Touch AF] `[AF]/[AF+AE]
[Touch Pad AF] [EXACT]/[OFFSET1] to [OFFSET7]/
`[OFF]
Enables touch operation on the monitor display.
[Touch Screen]: All touch operations.
[Touch Tab]: Operations of tabs, such as [ ] on the right
side of the screen.
[Touch AF]: Operation to optimize the focus ([AF]) for a
touched subject. Alternatively, operation to optimize both the
focus and brightness ([AF+AE]). (l 116)
[Touch Pad AF]: Touch pad operation during viewfinder
display. (l 118)
14. Menu Guide
378
[Custom] menu ¨ [Operation]
[Operation Lock
Setup]
[Cursor] `[ ]/[ ]
[Joystick] `[ ]/[ ]
[Touch Screen] `[ ]/[ ]
[Dial] `[ ]/[ ]
[DISP. Button] `[ ]/[ ]
This sets the control functions to be disabled with the Fn
button [Operation Lock]. (Only for recording screen)
[Cursor]: Cursor buttons, [MENU/SET] button, and
[Joystick]: Joystick
[Touch Screen]: Touch screen
[Dial]: , , and
[DISP. Button]: [DISP.] button
[Fn Button Set]
[Setting in REC mode]
[Setting in PLAY mode]
Registers a function to the Fn button.
0
For details, refer to page 323.
14. Menu Guide
379
[Custom] menu ¨ [Operation]
[WB/ISO/Expo.
Button]
[WHILE PRESSING]/[AFTER PRESSING1]/`[AFTER
PRESSING2]
This sets the operation to be performed when [WB] (White
balance), [ISO] (ISO sensitivity) or [ ] (Exposure
compensation) is pressed.
[WHILE PRESSING]: Allows you to change the setting
while pressing and holding the button.
Release the button to confirm the settings value, and to
return to the recording screen.
[AFTER PRESSING1]: Press the button to change settings.
Press the button again to confirm the settings value, and to
return to the recording screen.
[AFTER PRESSING2]: Press the button to change settings.
Each press of the button switches the settings value.
(Except that of exposure compensation) To confirm your
selection and return to the recording screen, press the
shutter button halfway.
[ISO Displayed
Setting]
[Front/Rear Dials] `[ / ] / [ / ] /
[OFF/ ] / [ / ] / [ /OFF]
This sets the operations of the dials in the setting screen for
ISO sensitivity.
Assigning [ ] lets you change [ISO Auto Upper Limit
Setting].
[Exposure Comp.
Disp. Setting]
[Cursor Buttons (Up/
Down)]
[]/`[OFF]
This sets the operations of the 34 buttons in the exposure
compensation screen.
Assigning [ ] lets you set exposure bracketing.
[Front/Rear Dials] `[ / ] / [ / ] / [OFF/ ] /
[ / ] / [ /OFF]
This sets the operations of the dials in the exposure
compensation screen.
Assigning [ ] lets you adjust flash output.
14. Menu Guide
380
[Custom] menu ¨ [Operation]
[Dial Set.]
[Assign Dial (F/SS)] `[SET1]/[SET2]/[SET3]/[SET4]/
[SET5]
Sets the operations to be assigned to the dials in [P]/[A]/[S]/
[M] modes.
: Program Shift, F: Aperture value, SS: Shutter speed
[P] [A] [S] [M]
[SET1]
FSSF
FSSSS
[SET2]
s F s F
s SS SS
[SET3]
ssSS SS
F s F
[SET4]
sss F
FSSSS
[SET5]
FSSF
sssSS
[Rotation (F/SS)] `[ ]/[ ]
Changes the rotational directions of the dials for aperture
value and shutter speed adjustment.
[Control Dial
Assignment]
`[ ] ([Headphone Volume])/
[ / ] ([Exposure / Aperture])/
[ ] ([Exposure Comp.])/
[ ] ([Sensitivity])/
[ ] ([Focus Frame Size])
Sets the function to be assigned to on the recording
screen.
[/]: In [M] mode, this assigns the operation to adjust
the aperture value. In other than [M] mode, this assigns the
operation of exposure compensation.
14. Menu Guide
381
[Custom] menu ¨ [Operation]
[Dial Set.]
(Continued)
[Exposure Comp.] [ ]/[ ]/`[OFF]
Assigns exposure compensation to or . (Except in
[M] mode)
0
The [Assign Dial (F/SS)] setting takes priority.
[Dial Operation
Switch Setup]
[]
[]
In the Fn button [Dial Operation Switch], this sets the
functions to be registerd temporarily to or .
(l 330)
[Rotation (Menu
Operation)]
`[ ]/[ ]/
[ ]/[ ]
Changes the rotational direction of the dials when operating
menus.
[Joystick Setting]
`[D.FOCUS Movement]/[Fn]/[MENU]/[OFF]
Sets the joystick movement on the recording screen.
[D.FOCUS Movement]: Moves the AF area and MF Assist.
(l 115 , 120)
[Fn]: Operates as Fn buttons.
[MENU]: Operates as . Operations that can be
performed by moving the joystick are disabled.
[OFF]: Disables the joystick.
[Video Rec. Button
(Remote)]
You can register a favorite function to the video rec. button
on a Shutter Remote Control (optional).
0
[Video Record] is registered in the default setting.
0
For details, refer to page 491.
14. Menu Guide
382
[Custom] menu ¨ [Monitor / Display (Photo)]
[Auto Review]
[Duration Time
(photo)]
[HOLD]/[5SEC] to [0.5SEC]/`[OFF]
[Duration Time (6K/
4K PHOTO)]
`[HOLD]/[OFF]
[Duration Time
(Post-Focus)]
`[HOLD]/[OFF]
[Playback Operation
Priority]
[ON]/`[OFF]
This displays an image immediately after it is recorded.
[Duration Time (photo)]: Sets the Auto Review time when
taking pictures.
[Duration Time (6K/4K PHOTO)]: Sets the Auto Review
when recording 6K/4K photos.
[Duration Time (Post-Focus)]: Sets the Auto Review when
recording with Post-Focus.
[Playback Operation Priority]: When this is set to [ON],
you can toggle the playback screen during Auto Review, or
delete pictures.
0
If you set [Duration Time (photo)] to [HOLD], the image
recorded stays displayed until the shutter button is
pressed halfway.
[Playback Operation Priority] will be fixed to [ON].
14. Menu Guide
383
[Custom] menu ¨ [Monitor / Display (Photo)]
[Constant Preview]
[ON]/`[OFF]
[SET] [Effect]
[Preview While MF Assist]
You can always confirm the effects of aperture on the
recording screen when in [A]/[M] mode.
You can also confirm the shutter speed at the same time
when in [M] mode.
0
You can set the combination of the aperture effect and the
shutter speed effect in [Effect].
0
Preview also operates in the MF Assist screen when
[Preview While MF Assist] is set to [ON].
0
The preview of the shutter speed effect does not work
when using a flash.
14. Menu Guide
384
[Custom] menu ¨ [Monitor / Display (Photo)]
[Histogram]
[ON]/`[OFF]
This displays the histogram.
Turning this [ON] displays the histogram transition screen.
Press 3421 to set the position.
0
You can also move the position by dragging the histogram
on the recording screen.
0
A histogram is a graph that displays
brightness along the horizontal axis,
and the number of pixels at each
brightness level on the vertical axis.
By looking at the distribution of the
graph, you can determine the current
exposure.
A Dark
B Bright
0
When the recorded image and the histogram do not match
each other under the following conditions, the histogram is
displayed in orange:
– During exposure compensation
– When the flash fires
– When the standard exposure is not achieved, such as in
low light situations.
0
When the following function is being used, the [Histogram]
is not available:
– [Waveform Monitor]
0
The histogram is an approximation in the recording mode.
14. Menu Guide
385
[Custom] menu ¨ [Monitor / Display (Photo)]
[Photo Grid Line]
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/`[OFF]
Sets the grid line pattern to be displayed on the recording
screen.
When using [ ], you can press 3421 to set the
position.
0
When using [ ], you can also drag [ ] on the grid lines
on the recording screen to move the position.
[Frame Marker]
[ON]/`[OFF]
[SET] [Frame Aspect]
[Frame Color]
[Frame Mask]
A frame with the set aspect ratio is displayed on the
recording screen.
0
For details, refer to page 268.
[AF Area Display]
`[ON]/[OFF]
Displays the AF areas for the [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ],
[ ] to [ ] AF modes.
0
AF areas are not displayed in the following cases:
– When [AFC Start Point (225-Area)] is not used during
[]
– When AF area shapes are not registered in [ ] to
[]
0
When the following functions are being used, [AF Area
Display] is not available:
– Video recording
– [6K/4K PHOTO]
ヤヒ
ヤピ
ヤヒ
ヤピ
14. Menu Guide
386
[Custom] menu ¨ [Monitor / Display (Photo)]
[Live View Boost]
[MODE1]/[MODE2]/`[OFF]
[SET] [P/A/S/M]/`[M]
Displays the screen brighter to make it easier to check
subjects and compositions even in low-light environment.
[MODE1]: Setting for low brightness, with priority given to a
soft display.
[MODE2]: Setting for high brightness, with priority given to
image visibility.
0
You can change the recording mode in which [Live View
Boost] works by using [SET].
0
This mode does not affect recorded images.
0
Noise may be more noticeable in the screen than in the
recorded image.
0
This function does not work in the following cases:
– When adjusting the exposure (when the shutter button is
pressed halfway, for example)
– When recording a video or 6K/4K photo
– When using [Filter Settings]
– When displaying the shutter speed effect of [Constant
Preview] in the [M] mode
14. Menu Guide
387
[Custom] menu ¨ [Monitor / Display (Photo)]
[Night Mode]
[Monitor] [ON]/`[OFF]
[LVF] [ON]/`[OFF]
Displays the monitor and viewfinder in red.
In dark environments, this reduces brightness of the screen
that can make the surroundings difficult to see.
You can also set the luminance of the red display.
1 Press 3421 to select [ON] on the monitor or
viewfinder (LVF).
2 Press [DISP.] to display the brightness adjustment
screen.
0
Display the monitor to adjust the monitor, and display
the viewfinder to adjust the viewfinder.
3 Press 21 to adjust luminance and then press or
.
0
This effect is not applied to images output via HDMI.
[LVF/Monitor Disp.
Set]
[LVF Disp. Set] []/`[]
[Monitor Disp. Set] []/`[]
Selects whether to show the live view without covering the
information display, or to display over the entire screen.
[]: Scales down images slightly so
you can better review the composition of
the images.
[]: Scales images to fill the entire
screen so you can see their details.
999
±
0
AFSAFS
L
FINE
999
±
0
L
AFSAFS
FINE
ISO
AUTO
14. Menu Guide
388
[Custom] menu ¨ [Monitor / Display (Photo)]
[Expo.Meter]
[ON]/`[OFF]
This displays the exposure meter.
0
Set to [ON] to display the exposure meter when
performing Program Shift, setting aperture, and setting
shutter speed.
0
If no operations are performed for a certain period of time,
the exposure meter disappears.
[Focal Length]
`[ON]/[OFF]
Displays the focal length on the recording screen during
zoom control.
[Photo/Video
Preview]
`[]/[]
Switches the live view angle of view.
[]: Displays the recording area according to the angle of
view for picture-taking.
[]: Displays the recording area according to the angle of
view for video recording.
0
Angle of view display is a guideline.
0
When the following functions are being used, [Photo/Video
Preview] is fixed to [ ]:
– [6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
– [65:24]/[2:1] ([Aspect Ratio])
– [HLG Photo]
F5.630
SSSS
FF
125 60 30 15 8
5.64.0 8.0 11
14. Menu Guide
389
[Custom] menu ¨ [Monitor / Display (Photo)]
[Photos/Videos
Remaining]
`[ ]/[ ]
This will switch display between the number of recordable
pictures and available recording time.
[]: Displays the number of recordable pictures.
[]: Displays the available recording time for video.
0
Even when this is set to [ ], the number of
recordable pictures is displayed for a while after a picture
is taken.
0
When the following functions are being used, [Photos/
Videos Remaining] is fixed to [ ]:
– [65:24]/[2:1] ([Aspect Ratio])
– [HLG Photo]
0
When the following functions are being used, [Photos/
Videos Remaining] operates as [ ]:
– [6K/4K Burst]/[6K/4K Burst(S/S)]/[Post-Focus]
[Blinking
Highlights]
[ON]/`[OFF]
Overexposed areas appear blinking
in black and white during Auto
Review or playback.
0
The display without the highlights
is added to the display shown
when [DISP.] is pressed in the playback screen.
Use this to delete the highlight display. (l 68)
14. Menu Guide
390
[Custom] menu ¨ [Monitor / Display (Photo)]
[Sheer Overlay]
[ON]/`[OFF]
[SET] [Transparency]
[Image Select]
[Reset at Power Off]
[Disp. Image (shutter-press)]
Displays recorded pictures by overlapping on the recording
screen.
0
Use [Image Select] to select the pictures to be displayed.
Press 21 to select pictures and then press or
to confirm.
0
If you set [Disp. Image (shutter-press)] to [OFF], [Sheer
Overlay] is canceled while the shutter button is being
pressed halfway or pressed fully.
0
When the following functions are being used, [Sheer
Overlay] is not available:
– Video recording/[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
[I.S. Status Scope]
[ON]/`[OFF]
Displays a reference point A on the
recording screen in order to let you
check for camera shake.
0
When the following functions are
being used, [I.S. Status Scope] is
not available:
– Video recording/[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
14. Menu Guide
391
[Custom] menu ¨ [Monitor / Display (Photo)]
[Level Gauge]
`[ON]/[OFF]
Displays the level gauge which is useful in correcting
camera tilt.
A Horizontal
B Vertical
C Green (no tilt)
0
Even after correcting the tilt, there may still be an error of
approx. n1o.
0
When the camera is tilted significantly upwards or
downwards, the level gauge may not be displayed
correctly.
0
You can adjust the level gauge and reset the adjusted
values in [Level Gauge Adjust.] in the [Setup] ([Monitor /
Display]) menu. (l 398)
[Luminance Spot
Meter]
[ON]/`[OFF]
Specify any spot on the subject to measure the luminance
over a small area.
0
For details, refer to page 266.
[Framing Outline]
[ON]/`[OFF]
Displays the outline for the live view.
[Show/Hide Monitor
Layout]
[Control Panel] `[ON]/[OFF]
[Black Screen] `[ON]/[OFF]
Displays the control panel and black screen when switching
between displays using [DISP.] button. (l 67)
14. Menu Guide
392
[Custom] menu ¨ [Monitor / Display (Video)]
[V-Log View Assist]
[Read LUT File]
[LUT Select]
[LUT View Assist
(Monitor)]
[ON]/`[OFF]
[LUT View Assist
(HDMI)]
[ON]/`[OFF]
You can show images with LUT data applied on the monitor/
viewfinder, or output them via HDMI.
0
For details, refer to page 278.
[HLG View Assist]
[Monitor] [MODE1]/`[MODE2]/[OFF]
[HDMI] `[AUTO]/[MODE1]/[MODE2]/[OFF]
At recording or playback of [HLG Photo] and HLG video, this
displays images with converted color gamut and brightness
on the camera monitor/viewfinder, or outputs these over
HDMI.
0
For details, refer to page 282.
[Anamorphic
Desqueeze Display]
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/`[OFF]
This displays the desqueezed images suited to the
magnification of the anamorphic lens on this camera.
0
For details, refer to page 286.
[Monochrome Live
View]
[ON]/`[OFF]
You can display the recording screen in black and white.
0
If you use the HDMI output during recording, the output
image will not be displayed in black and white.
0
[Monochrome Live View] is not available when [Night
Mode] is used.
14. Menu Guide
393
[Custom] menu ¨ [Monitor / Display (Video)]
[Center Marker]
[ON]/`[OFF]
The center of the recording screen will be displayed as [i].
[Zebra Pattern]
[ZEBRA1]/[ZEBRA2]/[ZEBRA1+2]/`[OFF]
[SET] [Zebra 1]
[Zebra 2]
Parts that are brighter than the base value are displayed
with stripes.
0
For details, refer to page 267.
[Waveform Monitor]
[ON]/`[OFF]
You can display in the recording screen a waveform.
You can check detailed information about the brightness.
0
For details, refer to page 264.
[Red REC Frame
Indicator]
[ON]/`[OFF]
A red frame is displayed on the recording screen that
indicates that video is being recorded.
[Custom] menu ¨ [IN/OUT]
[HDMI Rec Output]
[Info Display] `[ON]/[OFF]
[HDMI Recording
Control]
[ON]/`[OFF]
[4K/60p Bit Mode]/
[4K/50p Bit Mode]
[4:2:2 10bit]/`[4:2:0 8bit]
[Sound Output
(HDMI)]
`[ON]/[OFF]
Sets HDMI output during recording.
0
For details, refer to page 292.
14. Menu Guide
394
[Custom] menu ¨ [Lens / Others]
[Lens Focus
Resume]
[ON]/`[OFF]
The camera saves the focus position when you turn it off.
[Lens Fn Button
Setting]
`[Focus Stop]/[AF Mode]/[Focus Ring Lock]/[AE LOCK]/[AF
LOCK]/[AF/AE LOCK]/[AF-ON]/[AF-ON : Near Shift]/[AF-ON
: Far Shift]/[AF-Point Scope]/[Focus Area Set]/[Image
Stabilizer]/[Preview]/[Preview Aperture Effect]/[No Setting]/
[Off (Disable Press and Hold)]/[Restore to Default]
Register a function to the focus button of an interchangeable
lens.
0
When [Focus Stop] is set, focus is fixed while the focus
button is being pressed.
0
When using an interchangeable lens that has a switch for
the image stabilizer (normal/panning), [Image Stabilizer] in
[Lens Fn Button Setting] is not available.
[Focus Ring
Control]
`[NON-LINEAR]/[LINEAR]
[SET] [90°] to [360°] (`[150°])/[Maximum]
Sets the amount of movement for focusing using the focus
ring. (When using supported lenses)
[NON-LINEAR]: Focus responds by accelerating according
to rotation speed of the focus ring.
[LINEAR]: Focus responds at a constant amount according
to the rotational angle of the focus ring.
[SET]: Sets the rotational angle of the focus ring for when
[LINEAR] is selected.
14. Menu Guide
395
[Setup] Menu
`: Default settings
[Setup] menu ¨ [Card/File]
[Card Format]
[Card Slot 1]/[Card Slot 2]
Formats the card (initialization).
0
For details, refer to page 48.
[Double Card Slot
Function]
[Recording Method] `[ ]/[ ]/[ ]
This sets the way recording to the card slots 1 and 2 is
performed.
0
For details, refer to page 88.
[Folder / File
Settings]
[Select Folder]/[Create a New Folder]/[File Name Setting]
Set the folder and file name where to save the images.
0
For details, refer to page 89.
[File Number Reset]
[Card Slot 1]/[Card Slot 2]
Resets the file number of the next recording to 0001.
0
For details, refer to page 91.
[Copyright
Information]
[Artist] [ON]/`[OFF]/[SET]
[Copyright Holder] [ON]/`[OFF]/[SET]
[Display Copyright Info.]
Records the names of the artist and the copyright holder in
the image Exif data.
0
You can register names from [SET] in [Artist] and
[Copyright Holder].
How to enter characters (l 415)
0
Up to 63 characters may be entered.
0
You can confirm registered copyright information in
[Display Copyright Info.].
14. Menu Guide
396
[Setup] menu ¨ [Monitor / Display]
[Power Save Mode]
[Sleep Mode] [10MIN.]/`[5MIN.]/[2MIN.]/[1MIN.]/
[OFF]
[Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)] `[ON]/[OFF]
[Auto LVF/Monitor
Off]
`[5MIN.]/[2MIN.]/[1MIN.]/[OFF]
[Power Save LVF
Shooting]
[Time to Sleep]
[Method of Activation]
This is a function to automatically turn the camera to sleep
(power save) status or turn off the viewfinder/monitor if no
operation is performed for a set time.
0
For details, refer to page 44.
[Monitor Frame
Rate]
[30fps]/`[60fps]
Sets the display speed for live view on the monitor when
recording pictures.
[30fps]: Reduces the power consumption for a longer
operating time.
[60fps]: Enables smooth display of movements.
0
When the following functions are being used, [Monitor
Frame Rate] is not available:
– [6K/4K PHOTO]
– HDMI output
14. Menu Guide
397
[Setup] menu ¨ [Monitor / Display]
[LVF Frame Rate]
`[60fps]/[120fps]
Sets the display speed for live view on the viewfinder when
recording pictures.
[60fps]: Reduces the power consumption for a longer
operating time.
[120fps]: Enables smooth display of movements.
0
[LVF120] is displayed on the viewfinder when it is
displayed at [120fps].
0
When set to [120fps], the images in the viewfinder will not
be as smooth as with [60fps], but there will be no change
to the images recorded.
0
When the following functions are being used, [LVF Frame
Rate] is not available:
– [6K/4K PHOTO]
– HDMI output
– While connected to Wi-Fi
[Monitor Settings]/
[Viewfinder]
[Brightness]/[Contrast]/[Saturation]/[Red Tint]/[Blue Tint]
This adjusts the brightness, coloring, and red or blue tints of
the monitor/viewfinder.
1 Press 34 to select the setting item, and press 21 to
adjust.
2 Press or to confirm the setting.
0
It will adjust the monitor when the monitor is in use, and
the viewfinder when the viewfinder is in use.
14. Menu Guide
398
[Setup] menu ¨ [Monitor / Display]
[Monitor Backlight]/
[LVF Luminance]
`[AUTO]/[j3] to [i3]
Adjusts monitor/viewfinder luminance.
[AUTO]: The brightness is adjusted automatically
depending on how bright it is around the camera.
0
Adjusts the monitor luminance when displaying the
monitor, and the viewfinder luminance when displaying the
viewfinder.
0
When either [AUTO] is set, or the adjusted value is set to
positive side, the usage period will shorten.
0
When [Night Mode] is being used, [Monitor Backlight]/[LVF
Luminance] are not available.
[Eye Sensor]
[Sensitivity] `[HIGH]/[LOW]
This will set the sensitivity of the eye sensor.
[LVF/Monitor Switch] `[LVF/MON AUTO] (automatic
viewfinder/monitor switching)/
[LVF] (viewfinder)/
[MON] (monitor)
This will set the method for switching between the viewfinder
and monitor.
0
If you press [LVF] to switch the display, the [LVF/Monitor
Switch] setting will also switch.
[Level Gauge
Adjust.]
[Adjust.]
Hold the camera in a horizontal position, and press or
. The level gauge will be adjusted.
[Level Gauge Value Reset]
Restores the default level gauge setting.
14. Menu Guide
399
[Setup] menu ¨ [IN/OUT]
[Beep]
[Beep Volume] [ ] (High)/`[ ] (Low)/[ ]
(Off)
[AF Beep Volume] [ ] (High)/`[ ] (Low)/[ ]
(Off)
[AF Beep Tone] `[ ] (Pattern 1)/[ ] (Pattern 2)/
[ ] (Pattern 3)
[E-Shutter Vol] [ ] (High)/`[ ] (Low)/[ ]
(Off)
[E-Shutter Tone] `[ ] (Pattern 1)/[ ] (Pattern 2)/
[ ] (Pattern 3)
Sets the beep sounds, AF beep, and electronic shutter
sounds.
[Headphone
Volume]
[0] to [LEVEL15] (`[LEVEL3])
Adjusts the volume when headphones are connected.
0
This functions in tandem with [Headphone Volume] in the
[Video] ([Audio]) menu.
0
For details, refer to page 299.
[Wi-Fi]
[Wi-Fi Function] (l 416)
[Wi-Fi Setup] (l 468)
14. Menu Guide
400
[Setup] menu ¨ [IN/OUT]
[Bluetooth]
[Bluetooth] (l 420)
[Send Image (Smartphone)] (l 447)
[Remote Wakeup] (l 440)
[Returning from Sleep Mode] (l 434)
[Auto Transfer] (l 437)
[Location Logging] (l 439)
[Auto Clock Set] (l 441)
[Wi-Fi network settings]
[Wi-Fi network settings]: Registers the Wi-Fi access point.
Wireless access points used to connect the camera to Wi-Fi
networks will be registered automatically.
[USB]
[USB Mode] `[y][Select on connection]/
[z][PC(Storage)]/
[ ][PC(Tether)]/
[{][PictBridge(PTP)]
This sets the communication method to be used when the
USB connection cable is connected.
[y][Select on connection]: Select this setting to select
the USB communication system when connecting to another
device.
[z][PC(Storage)]: Select this setting to import images to a
connected PC.
[ ][PC(Tether)]: Select this setting to control the camera
from a PC installed with “LUMIX Tether”.
[{][PictBridge(PTP)]: Select this setting when connecting
to a printer that supports PictBridge.
[USB Power Supply] `[ON]/[OFF]
Provides power from the USB connection cable. (l 41)
0
Even if this item is set to [OFF], power will be supplied
when the AC adaptor is connected.
14. Menu Guide
401
[Setup] menu ¨ [IN/OUT]
[Battery Use
Priority]
[BODY]/`[BG]
Selects which battery to use first when the batteries are
installed in both the camera and the Battery Grip.
0
For details, refer to page 490.
[TV Connection]
[HDMI Mode
(Playback)]
`[AUTO]/[4K/50p]/[4K/25p]/[1080p]/
[1080i]/[720p]/[576p]
Sets the HDMI output resolution for playback.
[AUTO]: Outputs with a resolution suited to the connected
TV.
0
If no image appears on the TV with [AUTO], switch to a
constant setting other than [AUTO] to set a format
supported by your TV.
(Refer to the operating instructions for the TV.)
0
Depending on the TV connected, output may be with a
different resolution than the setting, or it may not be
possible to play back video.
[LUT View Assist
(HDMI)]
[ON]/`[OFF]
Images with LUT (Look-Up Table) data applied are output
via HDMI when you play back videos recorded with [Photo
Style] set to [V-Log].
0
This is linked with [LUT View Assist (HDMI)] in [V-Log
View Assist] under the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display
(Video)]) menu.
0
For details, refer to page 278.
[HLG View Assist
(HDMI)]
`[AUTO]/[MODE1]/[MODE2]/[OFF]
At recording or playback of [HLG Photo] and HLG video, this
converts their color gamut and brightness for display.
0
This is linked with [HDMI] in [HLG View Assist] under the
[Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu.
0
For details, refer to page 282.
14. Menu Guide
402
[Setup] menu ¨ [IN/OUT]
[TV Connection]
(Continued)
[VIERA Link (CEC)] [ON]/`[OFF]
You can use the device remote control to operate the
camera when it is connected to a VIERA Link compatible
device using an HDMI micro cable.
0
For details, refer to page 476.
[Background
Color(Playback)]
[]/`[]
Sets the color of the bands displayed on the top and bottom
or the left and right of images output on a TV or similar
display.
0
We recommend setting to [ ] to prevent burn-in on the
screen of the output destination.
[Photo Luminance
Level]
[0-255]/`[16-255]
Sets the level of luminance when outputting pictures to TVs,
etc.
0
When pictures recorded with [HLG Photo] are output
without converting with [HLG View Assist], they are output
with the setting [64-940].
[Wireless
Connection Light]
`[ON]/[OFF]
While Wi-Fi/Bluetooth is functioning, the wireless connection
light stays on/blinks.
14. Menu Guide
403
[Setup] menu ¨ [Setting]
[Save to Custom
Mode]
[C1]/[C2]/[C3-1] to [C3-10]
You can register the currently set information of the camera.
0
For details, refer to page 337.
[Load Custom
Mode]
[C1]/[C2]/[C3-1] to [C3-10]
Calls up registered Custom mode settings to the selected
recording mode and overwrites the current settings with
these.
0
For details, refer to page 340.
[Custom Mode
Settings]
[Limit No. of Custom Mode]
[Edit Title]
[How to Reload Custom Mode]
[Select Loading Details]
Sets the ease of use of Custom mode.
0
For details, refer to page 338.
[Save/Restore
Camera Setting]
[Save]/[Load]/[Delete]/[Keep Settings While Format]
Saves the camera’s settings information to the card.
Saved settings information can be loaded to the camera,
letting you set the same settings on multiple cameras.
0
For details, refer to page 343.
[Reset]
Returns the camera to its default settings.
0
For details, refer to page 76.
14. Menu Guide
404
[Setup] menu ¨ [Others]
[Clock Set]
Sets the date and time.
0
For details, refer to page 54.
[Time Zone]
Sets the time zone.
Press 21 to select the time zone and then press or
to confirm.
A Current time
B Time difference
from GMT
(Greenwich
Mean Time)
0
If you are using Daylight Savings [ ], press 3. (The
time will move forward by 1 hour.)
To return to the normal time, press 3 again.
[Pixel Refresh]
This optimizes the image sensor and image processing.
0
The image sensor and image processing are optimized
when the camera is purchased. Use this function when
bright spots that do not exist in the subject get recorded.
0
Turn the camera off and on after the pixels are corrected.
[Sensor Cleaning]
Dust reduction to blow off the debris and dust that have
affixed to the front of the image sensor is performed.
0
You can use this function when the dust is particularly
noticeable.
0
Turn the camera off and on when finished.
14. Menu Guide
405
[Setup] menu ¨ [Others]
[Language]
This set the language displayed on the screen.
0
If you set a different language by mistake, select [ ]
from the menu icons to set the desired language.
[Firmware Version]
[Firmware Update]/[Software info]
You can check the firmware versions of the camera and
lens.
In addition, you can update the firmware, and display
information about the camera software.
[Firmware Update]: Updates firmware.
1 Download the firmware from the site on page 19.
2 Save the firmware to the root directory of the card (the
first folder that appears when you access the card on
your PC), and then insert the card into the camera.
3 Select [Firmware Update], press or , and
then select [Yes] to update the firmware.
[Software info]: Displays information about the camera
software.
0
When a supported optional item (XLR Microphone
Adaptor, etc.) is attached to the camera, you can also
check its firmware version.
[Online Manual]
[URL display]/[QR Code display]
Displays the URL or QR code in order to download the
“Operating Instructions” (PDF format).
14. Menu Guide
406
How to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] Menu
Follow the steps below when the image selection screen is displayed.
0
Images are displayed separately by card slot.
To switch the card to display, press [ ] and select the card slot.
0
The only images you can select and edit at one time are those on a single card.
When [Single] has been selected
1
Press 21 to select the image.
2
Press or .
0
If [Set/Cancel] is displayed at the right
bottom of the screen, the setting is
canceled when or is pressed
again.
When [Multi] has been selected
1
Press 3421 to select the image and
then press or (repeat).
0
The setting is canceled when or
is pressed again.
2
Press [DISP.] to execute.
When [Protect] is selected
Press 3421 to select the image, and
then press or to set (repeat).
0
The setting is canceled when or is
pressed again.
[Playback] Menu
6HW
321
654
2.
ュリヴヱハ
321
654
6HW&DQFHO
14. Menu Guide
407
`: Default settings
[Playback] ¨ [Playback Mode]
[Playback Mode]
`[Normal Play]/[Picture Only]/[Video Only]/[HLG Only]/
[Rating]/[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
Filters the type of images to play back.
0
When you have set [Rating], put a check mark in the rating
level you want to display, then press [DISP.].
[Slide Show]
[All]/[Picture Only]/[Video Only]/[HLG Only]/[Rating]/[6K/4K
PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
Selects image types and plays them back at regular
intervals in order.
0
When you have set [Rating], put a check mark in the rating
level you want to display, then press [DISP.].
[Start]: Starts slide show playback.
[Duration]: Sets repeat playback.
[Repeat]: Sets repeat playback.
Operations during slide show
3
:Plays/pauses.
You can also perform the same operation by touching
[ ] or [ ].
2
: Move to the previous image
1
: Move to the next image
4
: Ends the slide show
: Adjusts the volume
You can also perform the same operation by touching
[ ] or [ ].
0
When [Video Only] is set, [Duration] is not available.
[Rotate Disp.]
`[ON]/[OFF]
Automatically displays pictures vertically if they were
recorded when holding the camera vertically.
14. Menu Guide
408
[Playback] ¨ [Playback Mode]
[Picture Sort]
[FILE NAME]/`[DATE/TIME]
This sets the order in which the camera displays images
during playback.
[FILE NAME]: Displays images by folder name/file name.
[DATE/TIME]: Displays images by recording date.
0
If you insert another card, it may take some time to read all
data, therefore pictures may not be displayed in the set
order.
[Magnify from AF
Point]
[ON]/`[OFF]
Displays the point focused with AF.
Enlarges the AF focus location when enlarging the image.
0
The center of the image is enlarged for RAW images
recorded in the [High Resolution Mode] or for images that
are not focused.
[LUT View Assist
(Monitor)]
[ON]/`[OFF]
When playing back video recorded with [Photo Style] set to
[V-Log], this displays the images with LUT data applied on
the monitor/viewfinder.
0
This functions in tandem with [LUT View Assist (Monitor)]
in [V-Log View Assist] in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display
(Video)]) menu.
0
For details, refer to page 278.
14. Menu Guide
409
[Playback] ¨ [Playback Mode]
[HLG View Assist
(Monitor)]
[MODE1]/`[MODE2]/[OFF]
At recording or playback of [HLG Photo] and HLG video, this
converts their color gamut and brightness for display.
0
This functions in tandem with [Monitor] in [HLG View
Assist] in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu.
0
For details, refer to page 282.
[Anamorphic
Desqueeze Display]
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/`[OFF]
This displays the desqueezed images suited to the
magnification of the anamorphic lens on this camera.
0
This is linked with [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] under
the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu.
0
For details, refer to page 286.
14. Menu Guide
410
[Playback] ¨ [Process Image]
[RAW Processing]
Processes pictures taken in RAW format on the camera and
saves them in JPEG format. In addition, RAW images
recorded using [HLG Photo] can be saved in HLG format.
0
For details, refer to page 312.
[6K/4K PHOTO Bulk
Saving]
You can save any 5 second period of pictures from a 6K/4K
burst file all at once.
0
For details, refer to page 144.
[6K/4K PHOTO
Noise Reduction]
`[AUTO]/[OFF]
When saving pictures, reduce the noise that occurs due to
high ISO sensitivity.
0
For details, refer to page 141.
[Time Lapse Video]
This creates videos from group images recorded with [Time
Lapse Shot].
1 Press 21 to select a [Time Lapse Shot] group and
then press or .
2 Select the options for creating a video to combine the
pictures into a video.
0
For details, refer to page 152.
[Stop Motion Video]
This creates videos from group images recorded with [Stop
Motion Animation].
1 Press 21 to select the Stop Motion Animation group
and then press or .
2 Select the options for creating a video to combine the
pictures into a video.
0
For details, refer to page 152.
14. Menu Guide
411
[Playback] ¨ [Add/Delete Info.]
[Protect]
[Single]/[Multi]/[Cancel]
You can set protection for images so that they will not be
deleted by mistake.
However, if you format the card, the protected images will
also be deleted.
0
For information about how to select images, refer to page
406.
0
Be careful because the [Protect] setting may be disabled
on a device other than this camera.
[Rating]
[Single]/[Multi]/[Cancel]
If you set any of the five different rating levels for images,
you can do the following:
0
Deleting all images except for those with ratings.
0
Play back or show a slide show of images by the rating
level.
0
Check the rating level in the file details display in operating
systems such as Windows 10, Windows 8.1, and
Windows 8. (JPEG images only)
1 Select an image. (l 406)
2 Press 21 to select a rating level (1 to 5) and then
press or .
0
When [Multi] is selected, repeat Steps 1 and 2.
0
To cancel the setting, set the rating level to [OFF].
14. Menu Guide
412
[Playback] ¨ [Edit Image]
[Resize]
[Single]/[Multi]
Reduce the picture size of JPEG images and save them as
different images to enable them to be easily used for web
pages or sent as email attachments.
0
For information about how to select images, refer to page
406.
– When [Single] is selected, after choosing the image,
press 34 to select the size, then press or .
– When [Multi] is selected, before choosing the images,
press 34 to select the size, then press or .
0
You can set up to 100 images at once with [Multi].
0
The image quality of the resized image becomes lower.
0
[Resize] is not available for images recorded using the
following functions:
– Video recording/[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
– Group images
– [65:24]/[2:1] ([Aspect Ratio])
– [RAW] ([Picture Quality])
– [HLG Photo]
[Rotate]
Rotate images manually in 90o steps.
[]: Rotates 90o clockwise.
[]: Rotates 90o counter-clockwise.
0
For information about how to select images, refer to page
406.
[Video Divide]
Divide a recorded video or 6K/4K burst file into two.
0
For details, refer to page 318.
14. Menu Guide
413
[Playback] ¨ [Edit Image]
[Copy]
[Copy Direction] `[ ]/[ ]
[Select Copy]/[Copy All in Folder]/[Copy All in Card]
You can copy the images in one of the cards to the other
card.
0
Copied images will be saved in a new folder.
[Select Copy]: Copies selected images.
1 Select the folder containing the images to copy.
2 Select the images. (l 406)
[Copy All in Folder]: Copies all images in a folder.
1 Select the folder to copy.
2 Check the images to be copied and then press or
to execute copying.
[Copy All in Card]: Copies all images in the card.
Using the Fn button to copy images
If you press the Fn button with [Copy] assigned while playing
back images one at a time, the image currently being played
back will be copied to the other card.
0
Select the copy destination folder from the following
options. In the case of group images, [Create a New
Folder] is selected automatically.
[Same Folder Number as Source]: Copies to a folder with
the same name as the folder of the image to be copied.
[Create a New Folder]: Creates a new folder with an
incremented folder number and then copies the image to it.
[Select Folder]: Selects a folder to store the image and then
copies the image to it.
14. Menu Guide
414
[Playback] ¨ [Edit Image]
[Copy]
(Continued)
0
You can set up to 100 images at once with [Select Copy].
0
The [Protect] setting is not copied.
0
Copying may take a while.
0
When using the following combinations of cards, videos,
6K/4K photos, and images recorded with [Post-Focus]
cannot be copied:
– Copying from an SDXC memory card to an SD/SDHC
memory card
[Playback] ¨ [Others]
[Delete
Confirmation]
["Yes" first]/`["No" first]
This sets which option, [Yes] or [No], will be highlighted first
when the confirmation screen for deleting an image is
displayed.
["Yes" first]: [Yes] is highlighted first.
["No" first]: [No] is highlighted first.
[Delete All Images]
[Card Slot 1]/[Card Slot 2]
Deleting all images in a card.
0
Images cannot be restored once they have been deleted.
Carefully confirm the images before deletion.
0
If you select [Delete All Non-rating], all images except
those with a rating set are deleted.
0
[Delete All Images] can be used when [Playback Mode] is
set to [Normal Play].
14. Menu Guide
415
Follow the steps below when the character entry screen is displayed.
1
Enter characters.
≥Press 3421 to select characters
and then press or until the
character to enter is displayed.
(Repeat this)
0
To repeatedly enter the same character,
rotate or to the right to move
the entry position cursor.
0
If you select an item and press or , you can perform the following
operations:
– [ ]: Change the character type to [A] (upper case characters), [a] (lower
case characters), [1] (numbers), and [&] (special characters)
–[] ]: Enter a blank
– [Delete]: Delete a character
– [ ]: Move the entry position cursor to the left
– [ ]: Move the entry position cursor to the right
0
When entering a password, A shows the number of characters you have
entered and the number of characters you can enter.
2
Complete entering.
≥Select [Set] and then press or .
Entering Characters
416
15.
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
This chapter explains the Wi-Fi
®
and Bluetooth
®
functions of the camera.
This document refers to both smartphones and tablets as smartphones.
Checking Operation of the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth Functions
Remote Operations from a Smartphone
You can use the “LUMIX
Sync” smartphone app for
remote recording and image
transfers.
l 418
Transferring Images from This Camera
You can transfer images to
another device, such as a
smartphone or PC, by
operating the camera.
l 443
Light
(blue)
Monitor Operation
Lit
The Wi-Fi function is set to on,
or there is a connection.
The Bluetooth function is set to
on, or there is a connection.
A Wireless
connection light
Blinking
When image data is sent using
a camera operation.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
417
0
Do not remove the card or battery or move to an area without any reception
while sending images.
0
The camera cannot be used to connect to a public wireless LAN connection.
0
We strongly recommend that you set an encryption to maintain information
security.
0
We recommend that you use a sufficiently charged battery when sending
images.
0
When the remaining battery level is low, it may not be possible to connect to or
maintain communication with other devices.
(A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)
0
Images may not be completely sent depending on radio wave conditions.
If the connection is terminated while sending images, images with missing
parts may be sent.
0
You can set so that the wireless connection light does not turn on:
[] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Wireless Connection Light] (l 402)
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
418
Connect with a smartphone which has the “Panasonic LUMIX Sync”
(below: “LUMIX Sync”) smartphone app installed.
Use “LUMIX Sync” for remote recording and image transfers.
Flow of connecting a smartphone
0 You can also use the camera to transfer images to a smartphone.
For details, refer to “Sending Images from the Camera” on page 443.
Connecting to a Smartphone
1
Install “LUMIX Sync ” on your smartphone. (l 419)
2
Connect to a smartphone.
Using a smartphone that supports
Bluetooth Low Energy
0
Bluetooth connection (l 420)
Using a smartphone that does not
support Bluetooth Low Energy
0
Wi-Fi connection (l 424)
3
Operate the camera using the smartphone. (l 430)
0
[Remote shooting] (l 431)
0
[Shutter Remote Control] (l 433)
0
[Import images] (l 435)
0
[Auto Transfer] (l 437)
0
[Location Logging] (l 439)
0
[Remote Wakeup] (l 440)
0
[Auto Clock Set] (l 441)
0
[Camera settings copy] (l 442)
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
419
Installing “LUMIX Sync”
“LUMIX Sync” is an application for smartphones provided by Panasonic.
1
Connect the smartphone to a network.
2
(Android) Select “Google Play™ Store”.
(iOS) Select “App Store”.
3
Enter “LUMIX” or “panasonic lumix sync” into the
search box.
4
Select and install the “Panasonic LUMIX Sync” .
Supported OS
Android™: Android 5 or higher
iOS: iOS 11 or higher
0
Use the latest version.
0
Supported OSs are current as of September 2020 and are subject to change.
0
Read the [Help] in the “LUMIX Sync” menu for further details on how to
operate.
0
The app may not operate correctly depending on your smartphone.
For information on the “LUMIX Sync”, refer to the following support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(English only)
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
420
Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection)
Follow a simple connection setup procedure (pairing) to connect to a
smartphone that supports Bluetooth Low Energy.
When pairing is set up, the camera also automatically connects to the
smartphone via Wi-Fi.
0
For the first-time connection, pairing settings are required.
For information about connecting for the second and subsequent times, refer to
page 423.
1
On the smartphone, start up
“LUMIX Sync”.
≥A message regarding device
(camera) registration is displayed.
Select [Next].
0
If you have closed the message, select
[ ], then register the camera using
[Camera registration (pairing)].
2
Check the content in the
displayed guide and select
[Next] until the screen to
register the camera is
displayed.
0
Supported smartphones
Android™: Android 5 or higher with Bluetooth 4.0 or higher
(excluding those that do not support Bluetooth Low Energy)
iOS: iOS 11 or higher
0
Turn on the Bluetooth function on the smartphone beforehand.
LUMIX Sync
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
421
Operating the camera in accordance with the smartphone guide.
3
Set the camera to Bluetooth
pairing standby state.
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Bluetooth]
¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [SET] ¨ [Pairing]
≥The camera enters pairing standby
state and the device name A is
displayed.
4
On the smartphone, select the
camera’s device name.
0
(iOS devices) When a message to
confirm the change of destination is
displayed, select [Join].
5
When a message indicating
that device registration is
complete, select [OK].
≥A Bluetooth connection between
the camera and the smartphone will
be made.
0
The paired smartphone is registered as a paired device.
0
During Bluetooth connection, [ ] is displayed in the recording screen.
When the Bluetooth function is enabled, but a connection is not established
with the smartphone, [ ] appears translucent.
0
Up to 16 smartphones can be registered.
If you try to register more than 16 smartphones, the registration information
will be deleted from the oldest first.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
OK
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
422
End Bluetooth Connection
To terminate the Bluetooth connection, turn off the Bluetooth function of the
camera.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ Select [OFF]
0
Even if you terminate the connection, the pairing information for it will not be
deleted.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
423
Connecting to a Paired Smartphone
Connect paired smartphones using the following procedure.
1
Enable the Bluetooth function of the camera.
0
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [ON]
2
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
0
If a message is displayed indicating that the smartphone is searching for
cameras, close the message.
3
Select [ ].
4
Select [Bluetooth Setup].
5
Turn Bluetooth ON.
6
From [Camera registered] items, select
the camera’s device name.
0
Even if you set up pairing with more than one smartphone, you can only
connect to one smartphone at a time.
0
When pairing takes some time, canceling the pairing settings on both the
smartphone and camera and re-establishing the connection may result in the
camera being detected correctly.
LUMIX Sync
Bluetooth
XXXXXXXX
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
424
Canceling Pairing
1
Cancel the pairing setting of the camera.
0
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [SET] ¨ [Delete]
2
Select the smartphone for which to cancel the pairing.
Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection])
Use Wi-Fi to connect the camera and a smartphone.
With default settings, simple connection with smartphones is possible
without entering a password.
You can also use password authentication for enhanced connection
security.
1
Set the camera to Wi-Fi
connection standby status.
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨
[Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [New
Connection] ¨ [Remote Shooting &
View]
≥The SSID A of the camera is
displayed on the screen.
0
You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button assigned
with [Wi-Fi].
For information about the Fn button, refer to page 321.
0
Also cancel the pairing setting on the smartphone.
0
When [Reset] in the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu is used to reset the network
settings, the information for registered devices is deleted.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
425
2
In the setting menu of the
smartphone, turn the Wi-Fi
function ON.
3
Select the SSID displayed on
the camera.
4
On the smartphone, start up
“LUMIX Sync”.
5
(At the first connection)
Confirm the device name
displayed on the camera and
then select [Yes].
0
When a device different than the one you want to connect to is displayed, the
camera will automatically connect to that device if you select [Yes].
If there are other Wi-Fi connection devices nearby, we recommend using
either QR code or manual password input to connect with password
authentication. (l 426)
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi
XXXXXXXX
i
i
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
426
Using Password Authentication to Connect
You can enhance Wi-Fi connection security by using password
authentication through either QR code or manual input.
Scanning QR code to connect
1
Set [Wi-Fi Password] on the camera to [ON].
0
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Setup] ¨ [Wi-Fi Password] ¨ [ON]
2
Display the QR code A.
0
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi
Function] ¨ [New Connection] ¨ [Remote
Shooting & View]
0
You can also perform the same operation
by pressing the Fn button assigned with
[Wi-Fi].
For information about the Fn button, refer
to page 321.
0
Press or to enlarge the QR code.
3
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
0
If a message is displayed indicating that the smartphone is searching for
cameras, close the message.
4
Select [ ].
5
Select [Wi-Fi connection].
6
Select [QR code].
7
Scan the QR code displayed on the screen of the camera using
“LUMIX Sync”.
0
(iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is
displayed, select [Join].
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
427
Manually entering a password to connect
1
Display the screen in Step
2
on page 426.
2
In the setting menu of the smartphone,
turn the Wi-Fi function ON.
3
On the Wi-Fi setup screen, select the
SSID B displayed on the camera.
4
(At the first connection)
Enter the password B displayed on the
camera.
5
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX
Sync ”.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi
XXXXXXXX
i
i
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
428
Connection Methods Other Than the Default Settings
When connecting with [Via Network], or [WPS Connection] in [Direct],
follow the steps below:
1
Display the connection method setting screen for the camera.
0
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [New Connection] ¨
[Remote Shooting & View]
2
Press [DISP.].
Connecting via network
1 Select [Via Network] and then press or .
0
Follow the connection method on page 460 to connect the camera to a wireless
access point.
2 In the setting menu of the smartphone, turn the Wi-Fi function ON.
3 Connect the smartphone to the wireless access point that the camera is
connected to.
4 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
Connecting directly
1 Select [Direct] and then press or .
0
Select [WPS Connection], and follow the connection method on page 463 to
connect the camera to a smartphone.
2 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
429
Terminating the Wi-Fi Connection
To end the Wi-Fi connection between the camera and smartphone, follow
the steps below.
1
Press the shutter button halfway to put the camera in recording mode.
2
Terminate the Wi-Fi connection.
0
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi
Function] ¨ [Yes]
0
You can also perform the same operation
by pressing the Fn button assigned with
[Wi-Fi].
For information about the Fn button, refer
to page 321.
3
On the smartphone, close the “LUMIX
Sync ”.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
430
This explains the functions for operating the camera from a smartphone.
Functions described in this document with the ( ) symbol require
a smartphone that supports Bluetooth Low Energy.
Home Screen
When you start up “LUMIX Sync”, the home screen is displayed.
Operating the Camera with a
Smartphone
A
App settings (l 423, 426, 440)
This allows connection settings,
camera power operations, and displays
Help.
B
[Import images] (l 435)
C
[Remote shooting] (l 431)
D
[Shutter Remote Control] (l 433)
E
[Camera settings copy] (l 442)
Bluetooth
LUMIX Sync
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
431
[Remote shooting]
You can use the smartphone to record from a remote location while
viewing the live view images from the camera.
Getting started:
0
Connect the camera to a smartphone. (l 420, 424)
0
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
1
Select [ ] ([Remote shooting]) in the home screen.
0
(iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is
displayed, select [Join].
2
Start recording.
0
The recorded image is saved on the
camera.
A Takes a picture
B Starts/ends the video recording
0
Certain features, including some settings, may not be available.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
432
Operation Method During Remote Recording
Set either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be
used during remote recording.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Setup] ¨ Select [Priority of
Remote Device]
0
The default setting is [Camera].
[Camera]
Operation is possible on both the camera and the
smartphone.
0
The camera’s dial settings, etc. cannot be changed
with the smartphone.
[Smartphone]
Operation is possible only on the smartphone.
0
The camera’s dial settings, etc. can be changed with
the smartphone.
0
To end remote recording, press any of the buttons
on the camera to turn on the screen, and select
[End].
0
The setting of this function cannot be changed while the connection is active.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
433
[Shutter Remote Control]
You can use the smartphone as a remote control for the shutter.
Getting started:
0
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (l 420)
0
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
1
Select [ ] ([Shutter Remote Control]) in the home
screen.
2
Start recording.
Bulb Recording
The shutter can be kept open from the start to end of recording, which is
useful for recording of starry skies or night scenery.
Getting started:
0
Set the camera to [M] mode. (l 192)
0
Set the camera shutter speed to [B] (Bulb). (l 194)
1
Touch [ ] to start recording (keep touching, without removing your
finger).
2
Remove your finger from [ ] to end recording.
0
Slide [ ] in the direction of [LOCK] to record with the shutter button locked
in a fully-pressed state.
(Slide [ ] back to its original position or press the camera shutter button to
end recording)
0
During [B] (Bulb) recording, if the Bluetooth connection is broken, then carry out
Bluetooth connection again, then end recording from the smartphone.
Starts/ends the video recording
Takes a picture
0
Bulb recording (l 433)
Bluetooth
LOCK
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
434
Shortening the Return Time from [Sleep Mode]
You can shorten the time it takes for the camera to return from [Sleep
Mode] when the [Shutter Remote Control] is used.
Getting started:
0
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (l 420)
0
Set [Remote Wakeup] in [Bluetooth] to [ON]. (l 440)
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ Select [Returning from Sleep Mode]
[Import / Remote
Priority]
Shortens the time to return when using [Import
images] or [Remote shooting].
[Remote Shutter
Priority]
Shortens the time to return when using [Shutter
Remote Control].
0
To use the [Shutter Remote Control] to cancel [Sleep Mode] on the camera,
set [Bluetooth] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu as follows, then connect via
Bluetooth:
– [Remote Wakeup]: [ON] (l 440)
– [Auto Transfer]: [OFF] (l 437)
0
The camera cannot be turned on by using [Shutter Remote Control].
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
435
[Import images]
Transfer an image stored on the card to the smartphone connected via
Wi-Fi.
Getting started:
0
Connect the camera to a smartphone. (l 420, 424)
0
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
1
Select [ ] ([Import images]) in the home screen.
0
(iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is
displayed, select [Join].
2
Select the image to transfer.
0
You can switch the card displayed by
touching A.
3
Transfer the image.
≥Select [ ].
0
If the image is a video, you can play it
back by touching [ ] at the center of
the screen.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
436
0
When a video is played back, this has a small data size and is transmitted
using “LUMIX Sync”, therefore its image quality will differ from that of the
actual video recording.
Depending on the smartphone and on the usage conditions, the image quality
may deteriorate or the sound may skip during video or picture playback.
0
It is not possible to transfer images with file sizes exceeding 4 GB.
0
Images recorded using the following functions cannot be transferred:
– [MOV] videos
– [6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
– [HLG Photo] (HLG format pictures)
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
437
[Auto Transfer]
You can automatically transfer recorded pictures to a smartphone as they
are taken.
Getting started:
0
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (l 420)
1
Enable [Auto Transfer] on the
camera.
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Bluetooth]
¨ [Auto Transfer] ¨ [ON]
0
If a confirmation screen is displayed on
the camera asking you to terminate the
Wi-Fi connection, select [Yes] to terminate it.
2
On the smartphone, select [Yes] (for Android devices) or
[Join] (for iOS devices).
0
The camera automatically makes a Wi-Fi connection.
3
Check the send settings on
the camera and then press
or .
0
To change the send setting, press
[DISP.]. (l 466)
0
Automatic image transfer is possible
when [ ] is displayed on the camera
recording screen.
4
Record with the camera.
0
[ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being
sent.
Bluetooth
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
438
To Stop the Automatic Transfer of Images
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [Auto Transfer] ¨ Select [OFF]
≥ A confirmation screen is displayed, asking you to terminate the Wi-Fi
connection.
0
If the [Bluetooth] and [Auto Transfer] settings of the camera are [ON], the
camera automatically connects to the smartphone via Wi-Fi and Bluetooth
when you turn on the camera.
Start up the “LUMIX Sync” on the smartphone to connect to the camera.
0
When [Auto Transfer] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] cannot be used.
0
If the camera is turned off during image transfer, and the file sending is
interrupted, then turn on the camera to restart the sending.
– If the storage status of unsent files changes, then sending of files may no
longer be possible.
– If there are many unsent files, then sending of all files may not be possible.
0
Images recorded with the following functions cannot be transferred
automatically:
– Video recording/[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
– [HLG Photo] (HLG format pictures)
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
439
[Location Logging]
The smartphone sends its location information to the camera via Bluetooth,
and the camera performs recording while writing the acquired location
information.
Getting started:
0
Enable the GPS function on the smartphone.
0
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (l 420)
1
Enable [Location Logging] on
the camera.
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Bluetooth]
¨ [Location Logging] ¨ [ON]
0
The camera will enter a mode where
location information can be recorded and
[ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera.
2
Record images with the camera.
0
Location information will be written to the recorded images.
0
When [ ] on the recording screen appears translucent, location
information cannot be acquired, therefore data cannot be written.
Smartphone GPS positioning may not be possible if the smartphone is within
a building, a bag, or similar. Move the smartphone to a position affording a
wide view of the sky to improve positioning performance.
In addition, refer to the operating instructions of your smartphone.
0
Images with location information are indicated with [ ].
0
Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, the likeness rights, etc. of the
subject when you use this function. Use at your own risk.
0
The smartphone drains its battery faster while acquiring location information.
Bluetooth
GPS
GPS
GPS
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
440
[Remote Wakeup]
Even when the camera is turned off, the smartphone can be used to start
the camera and record images, or check the recorded images.
Getting started:
1
Connect to a smartphone using Bluetooth. (l 420)
2
Enable [Remote Wakeup] on the camera.
0
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [Remote Wakeup] ¨ [ON]
3
Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
4
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
Turning On the Camera
Select [Remote shooting] in the “LUMIX Sync” home screen.
0
(iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is displayed,
select [Join].
0
The camera turns on, and automatically connects using Wi-Fi.
Turning Off the Camera
1
Select [ ] in the “LUMIX Sync” home screen.
2
Select [Turn off the camera].
3
Select [Power OFF].
0
When [Remote Wakeup] has been set, the Bluetooth function continues to
work even if the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF], so the battery will drain.
Bluetooth
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
441
[Auto Clock Set]
Synchronize the clock and the time zone setting of the camera with those
of a smartphone.
Getting started:
0
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (l 420)
Enable [Auto Clock Set] on the
camera.
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨
[Auto Clock Set] ¨ [ON]
Bluetooth
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
442
[Camera settings copy]
This saves the camera’s settings information to the smartphone.
Saved settings information can be loaded to the camera, letting you set the
same settings on multiple cameras.
Getting started:
0
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (l 420)
1
Select [ ] ([Camera settings copy]) in the “LUMIX
Sync” home screen.
2
Save or load settings information.
0
Read the [Help] in the “LUMIX Sync” menu for further details on how to
operate the “LUMIX Sync ”.
0
Only settings information from the same model can be loaded.
0
When transferring settings information, a Wi-Fi connection is automatically
created.
(iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is
displayed, select [Join].
0
You can save or load the settings information of items that are the same as
those in [Save/Restore Camera Setting] under the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu.
(l 531)
Bluetooth
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
443
Operate the camera to send recorded images to a device connected by
Wi-Fi.
Operation flow
Sending Images from the Camera
1
Select the sending method.
Select the sending method from the [Send Images
While Recording] and [Send Images Stored in the
Camera] camera menus.
2
Select the destination (type of the
destination device).
– [Smartphone] (l 447)
– [PC] (l 451)
– [Cloud Sync. Service] (l 458)
– [Web service] (l 456)
– [Printer] (l 454)
3
Select the connection method and then
connect by Wi-Fi.
– [Via Network] (l 460)
– [Direct] (l 463)
4
Check the send settings.
Change the send settings as necessary.
– Image send settings (l 466)
5
[Send Images While Recording]
[Send Images Stored in the
Camera]
Take pictures.
This automatically sends the recorded
pictures as they are taken.
Select an image.
Send the selected images.
– Selecting images (l 467)
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
444
Detailed information about connection methods for each destination device
is described on pages 447 to 459.
Refer to the following pages for the steps common to all devices.
– Wi-Fi connections: [Via Network] (l 460)/[Direct] (l 463)
– Image send settings (l 466)
– Selecting images (l 467)
0
When recording, recording is prioritized so it will take time for sending to
complete.
0
If the camera is turned off, or the Wi-Fi is disconnected before sending is
completed, then sending will not restart.
0
You may not be able to delete files or use the [Playback] menu while sending.
0
When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not
available.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
445
Images That Can be Sent
Images that can be sent differ depending on the destination device.
¢ Sending is possible when the destination web service supports the sending of RAW
images from this camera.
0
When saving or sending RAW images to Android devices, an OS of Android 7.0 or
higher is required.
Depending on the smartphone or the OS version, these may not be displayed
correctly.
0
It is not possible to send images with file sizes exceeding 4 GB to [Smartphone].
0
4K videos cannot be sent to [Cloud Sync. Service] and [Web service].
0
It is not possible to send HLG format pictures recorded with [HLG Photo].
However, the RAW/JPEG images recorded at the same time will be sent to
[Smartphone], [PC], [Cloud Sync. Service] or [Web service].
Destination device
Images that can be sent
[Send Images While
Recording]
[Send Images Stored in
the Camera]
[Smartphone] (l 447) JPEG/RAW JPEG/RAW/MP4
[PC] (l 451) JPEG/RAW
JPEG/RAW/MP4/MOV/
6K/4K burst files/
Post-Focus images
[Cloud Sync. Service]
(l 458)
JPEG JPEG/MP4
[Web service] (l 456) JPEG/RAW
¢
JPEG/RAW
¢
/MP4
[Printer] (l 454) — JPEG
0
Sending may not be possible depending on your device.
0
It may not be possible to send images recorded with devices other than this
camera, or images edited or processed on a PC.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
446
Fn Button Assigned with [Wi-Fi]
You can perform the following operations by
pressing the Fn button assigned with
[Wi-Fi] after connecting to Wi-Fi.
For information on Fn buttons, refer to page
321.
0
Depending on the Wi-Fi function being used or the connection destination, you may
not be able to perform some of these operations.
[Terminate the
Connection]
Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.
[Change the Destination]
Terminates the Wi-Fi connection, and allows you to
select a different Wi-Fi connection.
[Change Settings for
Sending Images]
Sets the image size, file format, and other items for
sending recorded images. (l 466)
[Register the Current
Destination to Favorite]
Registers the current connection destination or
method so that you can easily connect with the same
connection settings next time.
[Network Address]
Displays the MAC address and IP address of the
camera. (l 469)
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
447
[Smartphone]
Transfer recorded images to a smartphone connected using Wi-Fi.
Getting started:
0
Install “LUMIX Sync” on your smartphone. (l 419)
1
Select the method for sending
the images on the camera.
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨
[Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [New
Connection] ¨ [Send Images While
Recording]/[Send Images Stored in
the Camera]
2
Set the destination to
[Smartphone].
3
Connect the camera to a
smartphone by Wi-Fi.
≥Select [Via Network] (l 460) or
[Direct] (l 463), and then connect.
4
On the smartphone, start up
“LUMIX Sync”.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
448
5
Select the destination smartphone on the camera.
6
Check the send settings and then press or .
0
To change the send settings of images, press [DISP.]. (l 466)
7
When [Send Images While Recording] is selected:
Take pictures.
0
[ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being
sent.
0
To end the connection, follow the steps below:
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [Yes]
When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] is selected:
Select an image.
0
To end the connection, select [Exit].
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
449
Sending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone with
Simple Operations
You can transfer pictures to a smartphone connected by Bluetooth just by
pressing [Q] during playback.
You can also use the menu to connect easily.
0
You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button registered with
[Send Image (Smartphone)].
For information about the Fn button, refer to page 321.
Getting started:
0
Install “LUMIX Sync” on your smartphone. (l 419)
0
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (l 420)
0
Press [(] on the camera to display the playback screen.
Send a single image
1
Press 21 to select the image.
2
Press [Q].
3
Select [Single Select].
0
To change the send settings of
images, press [DISP.]. (l 466)
4
On the smartphone, select [Yes]
(for Android devices) or [Join]
(for iOS devices).
0
This connects automatically using
Wi-Fi.
Send multiple images
1
Press [Q].
2
Select [Multi Select].
0
To change the send settings of
images, press [DISP.]. (l 466)
3
Select the images and then
transfer.
21: Select images
or : Set/Cancel
[DISP.]: Transfer
4
On the smartphone, select [Yes]
(for Android devices) or [Join]
(for iOS devices).
0
This connects automatically using
Wi-Fi.
0
This function is not available when [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON].
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
450
Using the menu to transfer easily
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Bluetooth] ¨ [Send Image (Smartphone)]
Settings: [Single Select]/[Multi Select]
0
If [Single Select], press 21 to select the image and then press or to
execute.
0
If [Multi Select], use the same operation as with “Send multiple images”.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
451
[PC]
Send recorded images to the PC connected with Wi-Fi.
Getting started:
0
Turn on the PC.
0
Create a destination folder for images.
0
If the workgroup of the destination PC has been changed from the standard setting,
change the corresponding setting of the camera in [PC Connection]. (l 468)
Create a Destination Folder for Images
When using Windows (Example for Windows 10)
1
Select the destination folder and then right-click.
2
Select [Properties] and then enable folder sharing.
0
You can also use “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” to create folders.
For details, refer to the operating instructions for “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.
When using Mac (Example for OS X v10.14)
1
Select the destination folder and then click the items in the following
order.
[File]
¨
[Get Info]
2
Enable folder sharing.
Supported OS
Windows: Windows 10/Windows 8.1/Windows 8
Mac: OS X v10.5 to v10.11, macOS 10.12 to macOS 10.15
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
452
1
Select the method for sending
images on the camera.
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨
[Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [New
Connection] ¨ [Send Images While
Recording]/[Send Images Stored in
the Camera]
2
Set the destination to [PC].
3
Connect the camera and PC by
Wi-Fi.
≥Select [Via Network] (l 460) or
[Direct] (l 463), and then connect.
0
Create a PC account name (up to 254 characters) and password (up to
32 characters) consisting of alphanumeric characters.
A destination folder may not be created if the account name includes
non-alphanumeric characters.
0
When the computer name (NetBIOS name for Mac) contains a space (blank
character), etc., it may not be recognized.
In that case, we recommend changing the name to one consisting only of 15
or less alphanumeric characters.
0
Refer to the operating instructions for your PC or Help on the OS for detailed
setting procedures.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
453
4
Enter the computer name of
the PC name you want to
connect to (for Mac, the
NetBIOS name).
0
How to enter characters (l 415)
5
Select a folder for storing
images.
0
Folders sorted by sent date will be
created in the selected folder, and
images will be saved there.
6
Check the send settings and
then press or .
0
To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (l 466)
7
When [Send Images While Recording] is selected:
Take pictures.
0
[ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being
sent.
0
To end the connection, follow the steps below:
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [Yes]
When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] is selected:
Select an image.
0
To end the connection, select [Exit].
0
If the screen for a user account and password entry appears, enter the one
you set on your PC.
0
When the firewall of the OS, security software, etc. is enabled, connecting to
the PC may not be possible.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
454
[Printer]
You can send images to a PictBridge (wireless LAN)
¢
-supported printer
connected by Wi-Fi for printing.
¢ DPS over IP standard-compliant
1
Select the method for sending
images on the camera.
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨
[Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [New
Connection] ¨ [Send Images
Stored in the Camera]
2
Set the destination to [Printer].
3
Connect the camera to a
printer by Wi-Fi.
≥Select [Via Network] (l 460) or
[Direct] (l 463), and then connect.
4
Select the destination printer.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
455
5
Select and print images.
0
The procedure for selecting images is the same as the one for when the USB
connection cable is connected. (l 487)
0
To terminate the connection, press [ ].
0
For details about PictBridge (wireless LAN-compatible) printers, contact their
manufacturers.
0
When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not
available.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
456
[Web service]
You can use “LUMIX CLUB” to upload recorded images to web services
such as social networking sites.
Getting started:
0
Register with “LUMIX CLUB”. (l 469)
0
Before sending images to a service, register that web service. (l 471)
1
Select the method for sending
images on the camera.
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨
[Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [New
Connection] ¨ [Send Images While
Recording]/[Send Images Stored in
the Camera]
2
Set the destination to [Web
service].
3
Connect to the web service.
≥Select [Via Network] and then
connect. (l 460)
4
Select the web service.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
457
5
Check the send settings and then press or .
0
To change the send settings of images, press [DISP.]. (l 466)
6
When [Send Images While Recording] is selected:
Take pictures.
0
[ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being
sent.
0
To end the connection, follow the steps below:
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [Yes]
When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] is selected:
Select an image.
0
To end the connection, select [Exit].
0
If image sending fails, a report email outlining the failure will be sent to the
email address registered in the “LUMIX CLUB”.
0
Panasonic assumes no responsibility for any damages resulting from the
leakage, loss, etc. of images uploaded on web services.
0
When uploading images to a web service, do not delete images from the
camera, even after they have finished sending, until you have checked that
they have been properly uploaded to the web service.
Panasonic assumes no responsibility for any damages resulting from the
deletion of images stored on the camera.
0
Images may contain information that can be used to identify the user, such as
recording dates and times, and location information. Check carefully when
uploading the images to a web service.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
458
[Cloud Sync. Service]
This camera can automatically transfer recorded images to a cloud sync
service via “LUMIX CLUB” to send them to a PC or smartphone.
1
Select the method for sending
images on the camera.
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨
[Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [New
Connection] ¨ [Send Images While
Recording]/[Send Images Stored in
the Camera]
2
Set the destination to [Cloud
Sync. Service].
To use [Cloud Sync. Service] (As of September 2020)
0
You need to register to the “LUMIX CLUB” (l 469) and set up cloud
synchronization to send images to a cloud folder.
To set up cloud synchronization, use “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.
0
Sent images are temporarily saved in the cloud folder. These can be
synchronized with your PC, smartphone, and other devices.
0
A cloud folder stores sent images for 30 days (up to 1000 images).
Please note that the images will be deleted automatically in the following
cases:
– If 30 days have passed after sending (even if within 30 days of the transfer,
if images have been downloaded to all specified devices, then these may be
deleted)
– If there are in excess of 1000 images (depending on the [Cloud Limit]
(l 466) setting)
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
459
3
Connect to the cloud sync
service.
≥Select [Via Network] and then
connect. (l 460)
4
Check the send settings and
then press or .
0
To change the send settings of images, press [DISP.]. (l 466)
5
When [Send Images While Recording] is selected:
Take pictures.
0
[ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being
sent.
0
To end the connection, follow the steps below:
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [Yes]
When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] is selected:
Select one or more images.
0
To end the connection, select [Exit].
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
460
When [New Connection] has been selected
in [Wi-Fi Function] in [Wi-Fi] of the [Setup]
([IN/OUT]) menu, select the connection
method from either [Via Network] or [Direct]
to connect.
On the other hand, when you use [Select a
destination from History] or [Select a
destination from Favorite], the camera connects to the selected device with
the previously-used settings.
[Via Network]
Connect the camera and destination device through the wireless access
point.
Select the method for connecting to
a wireless access point.
Wi-Fi Connections
Settings: [WPS (Push-Button)]/
[WPS (PIN code)]/
[From List] (l 461)
0
After selecting [Via Network] once, the camera will connect to the
previously-used wireless access point.
To change the wireless access point used for connection, press [DISP.] and
change the connection destination.
0
Check the operating instructions and settings of the wireless access point.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
461
[WPS (PIN code)]
Enter a PIN code into the wireless access point to set up a connection.
1
On the camera screen, select the wireless access point you are
connecting to.
2
Enter the PIN code displayed on the camera screen into the wireless
access point.
3
Press or of the camera.
[From List]
Searches for a wireless access point to use, and connects to this.
1
Select the wireless access point you
are connecting to.
0
Press [DISP.] to run a wireless access point
search again.
0
If no wireless access point is found, refer to
“Connecting by Manual Input” on page 462.
2
(If network authentication is encrypted)
Enter the encryption key.
0
How to enter characters (l 415)
[WPS (Push-Button)]
Press the WPS button on the wireless access
point to set up a connection.
Press the wireless access point WPS button until
it switches to WPS mode.
Example)
0
Confirm the encryption key of the wireless access point.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
462
Connecting by Manual Input
1
In the screen in Step
1
of “[From List]”, select [Manual Input]. (l 461)
2
Enter the SSID of the wireless access point you are connecting to, and
then select [Set].
0
How to enter characters (l 415)
3
Select the network authentication.
4
(When other than [No Encryption] is selected)
Enter the encryption key and then select [Set].
0
Check the SSID, network authentication, encryption, and encryption key of the
wireless access point you are using.
[WPA2-PSK]
Supported encryption: [TKIP], [AES]
[WPA2/WPA-PSK]
[No Encryption] —
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
463
[Direct]
Directly connect the camera and the destination device.
Select the method for connecting
with the destination device.
[WPS
Connection]
[WPS
(Push-Button)]
Press the WPS button on the destination
device to connect.
0
On the camera, press [DISP.] to extend
the connection wait time.
[WPS (PIN code)]
Enter the PIN code into the camera, and
connect.
[Manual
Connection]
Search for the camera on the destination device to connect.
Enter the SSID and password displayed on the camera into the
device.
0
If the destination is set to [Smartphone],
the password is not displayed. Select the
SSID to establish a connection. (l 424)
0
Please also refer to the operating instructions for the device to be connected.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
464
Connect to Wi-Fi Using Previously Saved Settings
Use the Wi-Fi connection history to connect using the same settings as
previously.
1
Display the Wi-Fi connection
history.
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨
[Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [Select a
destination from History]/[Select a
destination from Favorite]
2
Select the History item to
connect to.
0
Press [DISP.] to confirm details of the
connection history.
Register to Favorite
You can register the Wi-Fi connection history to Favorite.
1
Display the Wi-Fi connection history.
0
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [Select a destination
from History]
2
Select the History item to register and then press 1.
3
Enter a registration name and then select [Set].
0
How to enter characters (l 415)
0
A maximum of 30 characters can be entered. A two-byte character is treated as
two characters.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
465
Editing Items Registered in Favorite
1
Display items registered to Favorite.
0
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Function] ¨ [Select a destination
from Favorite]
2
Select the History item to edit in Favorite and then press 1.
[Remove from Favorite] —
[Change the Order in
Favorite]
Specify the destination location of the desired
item to change the display order.
[Change the Registered
Name]
Enter characters to change the registered name.
0
How to enter characters (l 415)
0
The number of items that can be saved in History is limited. Register
frequently-used connection settings to Favorite.
0
When [Reset] in the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu is used to reset the network
settings, the content registered in History and Favorite is deleted.
0
If the device you want to connect to (smartphone, etc.) is connected to a
wireless access point other than the camera, you cannot connect the device to
the camera using [Direct].
Change the Wi-Fi settings of the device you want to connect to so that the
access point to be used is set to the camera. You can also select [New
Connection] and reconnect the devices. (l 424)
0
It may be difficult to connect to networks to which many devices are
connected. In these cases, connect using [New Connection].
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
466
Image Send Settings
Set the size, file format, and other items for sending the image to the
destination device.
1
After Wi-Fi connection, the
send settings confirmation
screen will be displayed, so
press [DISP.].
2
Change the send settings.
Send Settings and Selecting Images
[Size]
Resize the image to send.
[Original]/[Auto]/[Change] ([L], [M], [S], or [VGA])
0
The [Auto] image size changes depending on the
status of the destination device.
(This can be set when the destination is [Web service])
[File Format]
Sets the file format of images to send.
[JPG]/[RAWiJPG]/[RAW]
0
This setting is possible when the destination supports
the sending of RAW images from this camera. (l 445)
[Delete Location Data]
Select whether to delete the location information from
images before sending them.
0
This can be set when the destination is [Cloud Sync.
Service] or [Web service].
0
This operation only deletes the location information
from the images that are set to be sent.
[Cloud Limit]
You can select whether to send images when the cloud
folder runs out of free space.
[ON]: Does not send images.
[OFF]: Deletes images from the oldest ones, then sends
new images.
0
This can be set when the destination is [Cloud Sync.
Service].
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
467
Selecting Images
When sending by [Send Images Stored in the Camera], select the images
using the following procedure.
1
Select [Single Select] or [Multi Select].
2
Select the image.
[Single Select] setting
1
Press 21 to select an image.
2
Press or .
[Multi Select] setting
1
Press 3421 to select an image and
then press or . (Repeat this)
0
To cancel the setting, press or
again.
0
Images are displayed separately by card
slot.
To switch the card to display, press [ ].
0
Selecting images at once is possible only
for the images in a single card.
2
Press [DISP.] to execute.
6HW
321
654
2.
ュリヴヱハ
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
468
This configures the settings required for the Wi-Fi function.
The settings cannot be changed when connected to Wi-Fi.
Displaying the [Wi-Fi Setup] menu.
≥ ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Setup]
[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu
[Priority of Remote
Device]
This sets either the camera or the smartphone as the
priority control device to be used during remote
recording. (l 432)
[Wi-Fi Password]
You can use a password to connect for enhanced
security. (l 426)
[LUMIX CLUB]
This acquires or changes the “LUMIX CLUB” login ID.
(
l 470)
[PC Connection]
You can set the workgroup.
To send images to a PC, you need to connect to the
same workgroup as the destination PC.
(The default setting is “WORKGROUP”.)
0
To change the workgroup name, press or
and enter the new workgroup name.
How to enter characters (l 415)
0
To return to the default settings, press [DISP.].
[Device Name]
You can change the name (SSID) of the camera.
0
To change the SSID name, press [DISP.] and enter
the new SSID name.
How to enter characters (l 415)
0
A maximum of 32 characters can be entered.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
469
“LUMIX CLUB”
Refer to the “LUMIX CLUB” site for details.
https://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/
[Wi-Fi Function Lock]
To prevent incorrect operation and use of the Wi-Fi
function by a third party and to protect personal
information in the camera and included with images,
protect the Wi-Fi function with a password.
[Setup]: Enter any 4-digit numbers as the password.
0
How to enter characters (l 415)
[Cancel]: Cancel the password.
0
Once a password is set, you are required to enter it
each time you use the Wi-Fi function.
0
If you forget your password, you can use [Reset] in
the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu to reset the network
settings and thereby reset the password.
[Network Address]
Displays the MAC address and IP address of the
camera.
0
The service may be suspended due to regular maintenance or unexpected
troubles, and the service contents may be changed or added, without prior
notice to the users.
The service may also be stopped in whole or in part with a reasonable period
of advance notice.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
470
Acquire a New Login ID from the Camera
From the camera menu, acquire a “LUMIX CLUB” login ID.
1
Follow the menu path.
0
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi
Setup] ¨ [LUMIX CLUB] ¨ [Set/Add
Account] ¨ [New account]
0
Connect to the network.
Proceed to the next page by selecting
[Next].
2
Select and set the method for connecting to a wireless access point,
and set. (l 460)
0
Except for the first-time connection, the camera will connect to the
previously-used wireless access point.
To change the connection destination, press [DISP.].
0
Proceed to the next page by selecting [Next].
3
Read through the “LUMIX CLUB” terms of use and then select [Agree].
0
Switch pages: 34
0
Zoom: Rotate to the right (to restore: rotate to the left)
0
Move the enlarged area: 3421
0
Cancel without registering: [ ] button
4
Enter a password.
0
Enter any combination of 8 to 16 characters and numbers for the password.
0
How to enter characters (l 415)
5
Check the login ID and then select
[OK].
0
Be sure to make a note of the login ID and
password.
0
The login ID (12-digit number) will be
displayed automatically.
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
471
Register a Web Service with “LUMIX CLUB”
Getting started:
0
Make sure that you have created an account on the web service you want to use,
and have the login information available.
1
Connect to the “LUMIX CLUB” site using a smartphone or PC.
https://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/
2
Enter your “LUMIX CLUB” login ID and password to log in.
0
If you have not registered your email address to the “LUMIX CLUB” yet, please
register it.
3
Select and register the web service you want to use for web service
link settings.
0
Follow the on-screen instructions to perform the registration.
Confirm/Change Login ID or Password
Getting started:
0
When using the acquired login ID, check the ID and password.
0
Access the “LUMIX CLUB” site from your PC to change the password.
1
Follow the menu path.
0
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi
Setup] ¨ [LUMIX CLUB] ¨ [Set/Add
Account] ¨ [Set Login ID]
0
The login ID and password are displayed.
0
The password is displayed as “ ”.
2
Select the item to change.
3
Enter the login ID or password.
0
How to enter characters (l 415)
4
Select [Exit].
0
Confirm web services supported by “LUMIX CLUB” in “FAQ/Contact us” at the
following site:
https://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/lumix_faqs/
15. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
472
Checking the “LUMIX CLUB” Terms of Use
Check the details if the terms of use have been updated, for example.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Setup] ¨ [LUMIX CLUB] ¨ Select
[Terms of use]
Deleting Your Login ID and Closing Your “LUMIX CLUB”
Account
Delete the login ID from the camera when transferring it to another party or
disposing of it.
You can also close your “LUMIX CLUB” account.
1
Follow the menu path.
0
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Wi-Fi] ¨ [Wi-Fi Setup] ¨ [LUMIX CLUB] ¨ [Delete
account]
0
A message is displayed. Select [Next].
2
Select [Yes] on the login ID delete confirmation screen.
0
A message is displayed. Select [Next].
3
Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen asking whether to close the
“LUMIX CLUB” account.
0
A message is displayed. Select [Next].
0
To continue without closing the account, select [No] to delete only the login ID.
4
Select [OK].
0
You can only change or delete the login ID acquired with the camera.
473
16.
Connecting to Other Devices
This chapter describes connections with other devices, such as TVs and
PCs.
Connect using either the [HDMI] socket or the USB port on the camera.
Refer to the sections below for more details about connections.
[HDMI] socket
Connect the camera and TV with a commercially available HDMI micro
cable.
0
Use a “High Speed HDMI micro cable” with the HDMI logo.
Cables that do not comply with the HDMI standards will not work.
“High Speed HDMI micro cable” (Type D–Type A plug, up to 2 m (6.6 feet) long)
0
Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the
plug.
(Inserting these at an angle may cause deformation or malfunction)
0
Do not connect the cable to the wrong terminals. This may cause a
malfunction.
16. Connecting to Other Devices
474
USB port
Use a USB connection cable to connect the camera to a PC, recorder, or
printer.
0
Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.
16. Connecting to Other Devices
475
You can connect the camera to a TV to view recorded pictures and videos
on the TV.
Getting started:
0
Turn off the camera and TV.
1
Connect the camera and TV with a commercially
available HDMI micro cable. (l 473)
2
Turn on the TV.
3
Switch the TV input to HDMI input.
4
Turn on the camera.
5
Display the playback screen.
≥Press [(].
≥The recorded images are displayed
on the TV. (The monitor and
viewfinder of the camera will turn
off.)
Viewing on a TV
16. Connecting to Other Devices
476
Using VIERA Link
VIERA Link (HDAVI Control™) is a function that allows you to use your
remote control for the Panasonic TV for easy operations when the camera
has been connected to a VIERA Link compatible device using an HDMI
micro cable for automatic linked operations.
(Not all operations are possible.)
0
With the default settings, pictures are output at the optimal resolution for the
connected TV.
The output resolution can be changed in [HDMI Mode (Playback)]. (l 401)
0
Depending on the aspect ratio, gray bands may be displayed on the top and
bottom or the left and right of images.
You can change the band color in [Background Color(Playback)] in [TV
Connection] of the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu. (l 402)
0
HDMI output is not possible if you connect a USB connection cable at the
same time while [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Storage)] or [PictBridge(PTP)].
0
If the temperature of the camera rises, [ ] may be displayed, recording may
stop, and some functions may become unavailable temporarily. Wait until the
camera cools down.
0
Change the screen mode on your TV if images are displayed with the top or
bottom cut off.
0
Depending on the connected TV, 6K/4K burst files may not be played back
correctly.
0
Please also refer to the operating instructions for the TV.
0
To use VIERA Link, you need to also configure the settings on the TV.
For the setting procedure, refer to the operating instructions for the TV.
16. Connecting to Other Devices
477
1
Connect the camera to a Panasonic TV compatible with VIERA Link
using a commercially available HDMI micro cable. (l 473)
2
Turn on the camera.
3
Turn on the VIERA Link.
0
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [TV Connection] ¨ [VIERA Link (CEC)] ¨ [ON]
4
Display the playback screen.
0
Press [(].
5
Operate with the remote control for the TV.
Power off link
If you turn off the TV with its remote control, the camera will also turn off.
Automatic input switching
If you turn on the camera and then press [(], the input of the TV automatically
switches to input to which this camera is connected.
Furthermore, when the TV power is in the standby state, it turns on automatically.
(When “Power on link” on the TV is set to “Set”)
0
VIERA Link is a unique Panasonic function built on an HDMI control function
using the standard HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) specification.
Linked operations with HDMI CEC compatible devices made by other
companies are not guaranteed.
0
The camera supports “VIERA Link Ver.5”. “VIERA Link Ver.5” is the standard
for Panasonic’s VIERA Link compatible devices. This standard is compatible
with Panasonic’s conventional VIERA Link devices.
0
Operation using the buttons on the camera will be limited.
16. Connecting to Other Devices
478
If you connect the camera to a PC, you can copy the recorded images to
the PC.
When using Windows, you can also copy using the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”
software for LUMIX.
You can also use software to perform operations such as organizing and
correcting recorded images, processing RAW images, and editing videos.
(l 480)
Copying Images to a PC
After connecting to the PC, you can copy the recorded images by dragging
files and folders on this camera to the PC.
Importing Images to a PC
– Windows: When importing using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”, refer to page 480.
– Mac: Supported by “Final Cut Pro X”.
For details on “Final Cut Pro X ”, please contact Apple Inc.
0
The camera can be connected to a PC running any of the following OSs which
can detect mass storage devices.
Supported OS
Windows: Windows 10/Windows 8.1/Windows 8
Mac: OS X v10.5 to v10.11, macOS 10.12 to macOS 10.15
16. Connecting to Other Devices
479
Getting started:
0
Turn on the camera and PC.
1
Connect the camera and PC with the USB connection
cable. (l 474)
2
Press 34 to select [PC(Storage)] and then press or
.
3
Drag the files and folders from the camera to the PC.
Folder Structure Inside Card
≥Windows: A drive (“LUMIX”) is displayed in [This PC].
≥Mac: A drive (“LUMIX”) is displayed on the desktop.
LUMIX
CAMSET: The camera’s setup
information
DCIM: Images
1 Folder number
2 Color space P: sRGB
_: AdobeRGB
3 File number
4 JPG: JPEG format pictures
RW2: RAW format pictures
HSP: HLG format pictures
MP4: MP4 videos,
6K/4K burst files
MOV: MOV videos
CAMSET
AD_LUMIX
DCIM
100XXXXX
PXXX0001.JPG
16. Connecting to Other Devices
480
Copying Images to a PC Using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”
Getting started:
0
Turn on the camera and PC.
0
Install “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” on PC. (l 480)
1
Connect the camera and PC with the USB connection cable. (l 474)
2
Press 34 to select [PC(Storage)] and then press or .
3
Copy images to the PC using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.
0
Do not delete or move the copied files and folders in, for example, Windows
Explorer.
Playback and editing using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” will become no longer
possible.
Installing Software
Install the software to perform operations such as organizing and
correcting recorded images, processing RAW images, and editing videos.
0
If [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Storage)] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, the
camera will be automatically connected to the PC without the [USB Mode]
selection screen being displayed. (l 400)
0
Take care not to turn off the camera while images are being imported.
0
After importing of the images is completed, perform the operation to safely
remove the USB connection cable on the PC.
0
Turn off the camera and disconnect the USB connection cable before
removing the card from the camera. Otherwise, the recorded data may be
damaged.
0
To download the software, your PC needs to be able to connect to the internet.
0
Supported OSs are current as of September 2020 and are subject to change.
16. Connecting to Other Devices
481
PHOTOfunSTUDIO 10.1 PE
This software allows you to manage your images. For example, it allows
you to import pictures and videos to your PC and then sort them by
recording date, model name.
You can also perform operations such as writing images to a DVD,
correcting images, and editing videos.
Check the following site and then download and install the software:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/soft/download/d_pfs101pe.html
(English only)
Download expiration: September 2025
Operating environment
0
A high-performance PC environment is required to use the playback and editing
functions for 4K videos and videos in 10-bit format or the picture cropping function
for 6K/4K photos.
For details, refer to the operating instructions for “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.
0
“PHOTOfunSTUDIO” is not available for Mac.
Supported OS
Windows 10 (32-bit/64-bit)
Windows 8.1 (32-bit/64-bit)
0
For 4K videos, videos in 10-bit format, and 6K/4K photos, a
64-bit version of the Windows 10/Windows 8.1 OS is required.
CPU Pentium
®
4 (2.8 GHz or higher)
Display 1024k768 or higher (1920k1080 or higher is recommended)
Installed memory 1 GB or more for 32-bit, 2 GB or more for 64-bit
Free hard disk
space
450 MB or more for installing the software
16. Connecting to Other Devices
482
SILKYPIX Developer Studio SE
This software processes and edits RAW images.
Edited images can be saved in a format (JPEG, TIFF, etc.) that can be
displayed on a PC.
Check the following site and then download and install the software:
http://www.isl.co.jp/SILKYPIX/english/p/
Operating environment
0
For more information such as how to use “SILKYPIX Developer Studio”, refer to the
Help or the Ichikawa Soft Laboratory’s support site.
30-Day Full Trial Version of “LoiLoScope”
This software allows you to easily edit videos.
Check the following site and then download and install the software:
http://loilo.tv/product/20
Operating environment
0
You can download a trial version that can be used for free for 30 days.
0
For more information on how to use “LoiLoScope”, refer to the “LoiLoScope”
manual available for download at the site.
0
“LoiLoScope” is not available for Mac.
Supported OS
Windows
Windows 10, Windows 8.1
(64-bit recommended)
Mac
OS X v10.10 to v10.11
macOS 10.12 to macOS 10.15
Supported OS Windows Windows 10, Windows 8.1, Windows 8
16. Connecting to Other Devices
483
By connecting the camera to a Panasonic Blu-ray disc recorder or DVD
recorder, you can store the pictures and videos.
Getting started:
0
Turn on the camera and recorder.
0
Insert a card into card slot 1.
1
Connect the camera and recorder with the USB
connection cable. (l 474)
2
Press 34 to select [PC(Storage)] and then press or
.
3
Operate the recorder to store the images.
Storing on a Recorder
0
If [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Storage)] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, the
camera will be automatically connected to the recorder without the [USB
Mode] selection screen being displayed. (l 400)
0
Take care not to turn off the camera while storage is in progress.
0
Images such as 4K videos may not be supported depending on your recorder.
0
Turn off the camera and disconnect the USB connection cable before
removing the card from the camera. Otherwise, the recorded data may be
damaged.
0
For the storage and playback procedures, refer to the operating instructions
for the recorder.
16. Connecting to Other Devices
484
If you install the “LUMIX Tether” camera control software on your PC, you
can connect the camera to the PC via USB and then control the camera
from the PC and record while checking the live view on the PC screen
(tethered recording).
In addition, you can output via HDMI to an external monitor or TV during
tethered recording.
Installing Software
“LUMIX Tether”
This software is for controlling the camera from a PC.
It allows you to change various settings and to record remotely and then
save the images to the PC.
Check the following site and then download and install the software:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/soft/download/d_lumixtether.html
(English only)
Operating environment
Tethered Recording
Supported OS
Windows Windows 10 (64-bit)
Mac OS X v10.11, macOS 10.12 to macOS 10.15
Interface USB port (SuperSpeed USB (USB 3.0))
0
Supported OSs are current as of September 2020 and are subject to change.
0
To download the software, your PC needs to be able to connect to the internet.
0
For how to operate the software, refer to the operation guide for “LUMIX
Tether”.
16. Connecting to Other Devices
485
Operating the Camera from a PC
Getting started:
0
Turn on the camera and PC.
0
Install “LUMIX Tether ” on PC.
1
Connect the camera and PC with the USB connection
cable. (l 474)
2
Press 34 to select [PC(Tether)] and then press or
.
≥[ ] is displayed on the camera’s screen.
3
Use “LUMIX Tether” to operate the camera from the PC.
0
If [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Tether)] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, the
camera will be automatically connected to the PC without the [USB Mode]
selection screen being displayed. (l 400)
0
The Wi-Fi/Bluetooth functions are not available while there is a PC connection
with [PC(Tether)].
16. Connecting to Other Devices
486
If you connect the camera to a printer that supports PictBridge, you can
select pictures on the camera’s monitor and then print them.
Getting started:
0
Turn on the camera and printer.
0
Set the print quality and other settings on the printer.
1
Play back the card that
contains the picture you want
to print.
≥Press [(].
≥After pressing [ ], press 34 to
select [Card Slot 1] or [Card Slot 2],
and then press or .
0
The card for printing cannot be changed after connecting to the printer.
2
Connect the camera and printer with the USB
connection cable. (l 474)
3
Press 34 to select [PictBridge(PTP)] and then press
or .
Printing
16. Connecting to Other Devices
487
4
Press 21 to select a picture
and then press or .
≥To print multiple pictures, press 3,
set the picture selection method,
and then select pictures.
5
Set the print settings.
6
Start printing.
≥Select [Print start] and then press
or .
[Multi Select]
Selects the picture to print.
1 Press 3421 to select a picture and then press
or .
0
To cancel the setting, press or again.
2 Press [DISP.] to end selection.
[Select All] Prints all the stored pictures.
[Rating] Prints all pictures with [Rating] levels from [¿1] to [¿5].
PictBridge
0XOWL3ULQW
3ULQW
16. Connecting to Other Devices
488
Setting Items (Print Settings)
[Print start] Starts printing.
[Print with Date]
Sets printing with date.
0
If the printer does not support printing with date, the date
cannot be printed.
[Num.of prints] Sets the number of prints to be printed (up to 999).
[Paper Size] Sets the paper size.
[Page Layout]
Sets whether to add borders and how many images to be
printed on each sheet of paper.
16. Connecting to Other Devices
489
0
If [USB Mode] is set to [PictBridge(PTP)] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, the
camera will be automatically connected to the printer without the [USB Mode]
selection screen being displayed. (l 400)
0
Take care not to turn off the camera while printing is in progress.
0
When connecting with the printer is not possible, set [USB Power Supply] to
[OFF] and then try connecting again. (l 400)
0
Do not disconnect the USB connection cable while [å] (Cable disconnect
prohibit icon) is displayed.
0
Disconnect the USB connection cable after printing.
0
Turn off the camera and disconnect the USB connection cable before
removing the card from the camera. Otherwise, the recorded data may be
damaged.
0
To print images with paper size and layout settings not supported by the
camera, set the [Paper Size] and [Page Layout] to [{] and then select the
desired settings on the printer.
(For details, refer to the operating instructions for your printer.)
0
If a yellow [¥] is displayed, the camera is receiving an error message from the
printer. Check that there is no problem with the printer.
0
If the number of prints is high, the pictures may be printed in batches. In this
case, the remaining number of prints indicated may differ from the number set.
0
RAW images cannot be printed.
0
Images recorded with the following functions cannot be printed:
– Video recording/[6K/4K Burst]/[Post-Focus]
– [HLG Photo]
490
17.
Materials
0
For information on the external flash, refer to page 227.
0
For information on the external microphone, refer to page 293.
0
For information on the XLR Microphone Adaptor, refer to page 296.
0
Some optional accessories may not be available in some countries.
Battery Grip (Optional)
When mounted on the camera, the Battery Grip
(DMW-BGS5: optional) improves ease of operation
and grip when the camera is held vertically.
Also, inserting a battery into the Battery Grip
provides a stable supply of power even for long
periods of recording.
0
The Battery Grip is dust and splash resistant.
Selecting Battery Usage Priority
Selects which battery to use first when the batteries are installed in both
the camera and the Battery Grip.
Getting started:
0
Turn the camera off, and remove the cover for the battery grip connector.
1
Attach the Battery Grip to the camera.
2
Turn on the camera.
3
Set the battery use priority.
0
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [Battery Use Priority]
Using Optional Accessories
[BODY] The battery in the camera is used first.
[BG] The battery in the Battery Grip is used first.
17. Materials
491
Shutter Remote Control (Optional)
You can connect the Shutter Remote Control
(DMW-RS2: optional) to use the camera as
follows:
– Fully pressing the shutter button without camera shake
– Securing the shutter button during bulb recording and
burst recording
– Start/end the video recording
– Using the functions registered in the video rec. button of
the Shutter Remote Control
Registering Functions to the Video Rec. Button
You can register a favorite function to the video rec. button on a Shutter
Remote Control.
The functions that can be registered are the same as the functions that can
be registered to the Fn buttons for recording
(l
325).
[Video Record] is registered in the default setting.
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select [Video Rec. Button (Remote)]
0
Register functions using the same operations as [Fn Button Set]. (l 321)
0
When the battery in the Battery Grip is used, [ ] is displayed on the
monitor.
0
You can register functions of your choice to the [Fn] button on the Battery
Grip. (l 321)
The [WB] button, [ISO] button, [ ] button, [AF ON] button, and joystick
each work the same as the buttons and joystick on the camera body.
0
Refer to the operating instructions for the Battery Grip for details.
0
Always use a genuine Panasonic Shutter Remote Control (DMW-RS2:
optional).
0
Refer to the operating instructions for the Shutter Remote Control for details.
17. Materials
492
Tripod Grip (Optional)
Attach a Tripod Grip (DMW-SHGR1: optional) to use it
as a grip for recording while walking, a tripod, or a
Shutter Remote Control.
0
Connect the grip cable to the [REMOTE] socket on the
camera.
AC Adaptor (Optional)/DC Coupler (Optional)
With an AC Adaptor (DMW-AC10: optional) and DC Coupler
(DMW-DCC17: optional), you can perform recording and playback without
worrying about the remaining battery charge.
0
Always use a genuine Panasonic Tripod Grip (DMW-SHGR1: optional).
0
The [Video Rec. Button (Remote)] menu does not work with the Tripod Grip.
0
Do not carry just by holding the hand strap when the camera is attached.
0
For details, refer to the operating instructions for the Tripod Grip.
0
Be sure to purchase both an AC Adaptor and a DC Coupler as a set.
They cannot be used independently of one another.
0
When the DC Coupler is being mounted, the DC coupler cover opens, so the
structure ceases to be dust and splash resistant.
Do not allow sand, dust and water droplets to adhere to or enter the camera.
After use, confirm that no foreign objects are adhering to the DC coupler
cover, then firmly close the cover.
0
For details, refer to the operating instructions for the AC Adaptor and DC
Coupler.
17. Materials
493
0
The screen is an monitor display example of when [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] is set to
[].
Recording Screen
1
Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
Fn7Fn7
Fn4Fn4
Fn3Fn3
Fn5Fn5
Fn6Fn6
OFFOFF
OFFOFF
ISO
SS
FF
MINIMINI
ISO
SS
FF
AWB
BKT
AEL BKT
AFSAFS
999
ISO
100
F
3.560
24m59s24m59s
GPS
APS-C
L
FINE
RAW
+
HLG
4K
+
1
/
3
‰
Œ
Flash mode (l 229)
Flash Synchro (l 234)/
Wireless (l 236)
AWBc
AWBw
VÐî
Ñ
White balance (l 202)
White Balance Bracket,
White Balance Bracket
(Color Temperature)
(l 161)
Adjusting the white balance
(l 206)
Photo Style (l 208)
WL
1
1
BKT
AWB
AWB
AWB
Filter setting (l 215)/
Filter effect adjustment
(l 215)
HLG photo (l 225)
Picture quality (l 86)/
Picture size (l 85)
Extended Tele Conversion
(l 125)
Recording file format
(l 249)/
Recording quality (l 250)
Slow & Quick setting
(l 270)
Electronic shutter (l 175)
EXPS
17. Materials
494
2
3
Focus mode (l 93, 120)
Focus Bracket (l 160)
AFL AF Lock (l 198)
Focus Peaking (l 356)
AF mode (l 100)
Drive mode (l 128)
Post-Focus (l 166)
Connected to Wi-Fi
(l 416)
Connected to Bluetooth
(l 421)
GPS Location logging (l 439)
Image stabilizer (l 177)
Camera shake alert
(l 178)
AFS
AFC
MF
AFS
BKT
ヤヒ
PRE
Pre-Burst recording
(l 137)
Multiple exposures (l 362)
Silent mode
(l
174)
APS-C Image area of video
(l 249)
Anamorphic Desqueeze
Display (l 286)
High Resolution mode
(l 221)
Live View Composite
recording (l 162)
Overlay indication (l 390)
LUT View Assist (l 278)
HLG View Assist (l 282)
Time code (l 254)
Built-in microphone,
External microphone
(l 263, 293)/
XLR microphone adaptor
setting (l 296)
Sound recording level
limiter (l 263)
Mute (l 263)
Sound recording level (l 263)
Exposure meter (l 388)
LC
17. Materials
495
4
5
Histogram (l 384)
AF area (l 115)
Spot metering target
(l 184)
Center marker (l 393)
Self-timer (l 154)
Operation lock (l 378)
24m59s
Elapsed recording time
(l 241)
Image being sent
(
l 437)
¥
Focus (turns green) (l 59)/
Recording state (turns red)
(l 223, 241)
Focus (in low light AF
situations) (l 95)
Focus (Starlight AF) (l 95)
Flash adjustment (l 233)
Recording mode (l 60)
Program Shift (l 186)
Metering mode (l 184)
AE Lock (l 198)
60
Shutter speed (l 59)
F3.5
Aperture value (l 59)
LOW
STAR
AE
AEL
Aperture Bracket (l 159)
Exposure compensation
value (l 196)
Exposure Bracket (l 159)
Manual Exposure Assist
(l 193)
ISO sensitivity (l 199)
Card access indication
(turns red) (l 241)
Card slot (l 46)/Double
card slot function (l 88)
No card
Card full
999
Number of still images that
can be taken (l 528)
r20
Number of pictures that can
be taken continuously
(l 131)
24m59s
Video recording time
(l 529)
Battery indication (l 42)
Power supply (l 41)
Battery Grip (l 490)
F3.5
BKT
BKT
+
1
/
3
ISO100
17. Materials
496
6
Temperature rise warning
icon (l 505)
Touch Tab (l 377)
Fn button (l 329)
Touch Zoom (l 126)
Touch AF, Touch Shutter
(l 80)
Exposure compensation
(l 196)
Touch AE (l 81)
Focus Peaking (l 356)
// (l 246)
Type of defocus ([Miniature
Effect]) (l 218)
One Point Color (l 219)
Light source position
([Sunshine]) (l 219)
Filter effect adjustment
(l 215)
Filter on/off (l 217)
MINI
Filter setting (l 215)
F
Aperture value (l 246)
SS
Shutter speed (l 246)
Fn3
AE
Exposure compensation
(l 246)
ISO ISO sensitivity (l 246)
Sound recording level
adjustment (l 246)
Slow & Quick setting
(l 246)
17. Materials
497
Control Panel
1
2
3
F3.5
1/60
999
999
AWB
Fn
0 0
0
ISO
100
AFS FINE
3:2
Recording mode (l 60)
1/60 Shutter speed (l 59)
F3.5 Aperture value (l 59)
Battery indication (l 42)
Power supply (l 41)
Battery indication (battery
grip) (l 42)
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection
state (l 416)
ISO sensitivity (l 199)
Exposure compensation
value (l 196)/
Manual Exposure Assist
(l 193)
Œ
Flash setting (l 233, 234,
236)/
Flash mode (l 229)
ISO
100
0
0
Drive mode (l 128)/
Post-Focus (l 166)/
High Resolution mode
(l 221)
Focus mode (l 93, 120)
AF mode
(
l 100)
FINE Picture quality (l 86)
APS-C
Image area of video
(l 249)/Recording file
format (l 249)/Recording
quality (l 250)
Picture size/Aspect ratio
(l 85)
Slow & Quick setting
(l 270)
HLG photo (l 225)
Fn button settings (l 321)
AFS
L
3:2
Fn
17. Materials
498
4
Photo Style (l 208)
AWB
White balance (l 202)
i.Dynamic Range (l 353)
Metering mode (l 184)
Card slot (l 46)/Double
card slot function (l 88)
No card
Card full
999
Number of still images that
can be taken (l 528)
r20
Number of pictures that can
be taken continuously
(l 131)
R24m59s
Video recording time
(l 529)
---- No card
17. Materials
499
Playback Screen
12
2020.12.1 10:00 100-0001 1/999
8m30s
ISO
100F3.560
±
0
3
GPS
L
FINE
Playback mode (l 407)
Recording date and time
(l 54)
Card slot (l 46)
Ü
3
Rating (l 411)
Video playback (l 303)
Protected picture (l 411)
GPS Location logging (l 439)
Obtaining information
å
Cable disconnect prohibit
icon (l 489)
Marker available (l 141,
143)
Reduce Rolling Shutter
(l 140)
Saving pictures from a 6K/
4K burst file (l 139)
Saving pictures from a
Post-Focus image (l 169)
2020.12. 1
10:00
100-0001 Folder/file number (l 479)
1/999
Image number/Total
number of images
Number of group images
8m30s
Video recording time
(l 303)
Slow & Quick video
(l 269)
HLG View Assist (l 282)
LUT View Assist (l 278)
SLF
30
s
8
m
30
s
MON
MODE2
MONITOR LUT
17. Materials
500
3
4
5
Playback (video) (l 303)
Group images (l 310)
Time code (l 254)
XLR microphone adaptor
setting (l 296)
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection
state (l 416)
Silent mode
(l
174)
Recording information
Battery indication (l 42)
Power supply (l 41)
Battery Grip (l 490)
17. Materials
501
Detailed information display Photo Style display
1 Card slot (l 46)
2 Recording date and time (l 54)
3 Folder/file number (l 479)
4 Recording information (basic)
5 Recording information (advanced)
White balance display
Histogram display Lens information display
6 The focal length corresponding to the
angle of view when using a full-frame
lens with the [Aspect Ratio] set to
[3:2]
100
100-0001
ISO
ISO
0
F3.5
60
2020.12. 1 10:00
s
RGB
1/5
FINE
AFS
5500
0
STD.
L
3:2
1

3/5
100
100-0001
ISOISO
0
F3.5
60
2020.12. 1 10:00
100
100-0001
ISO
ISO
0
F3.5
60
2020.12. 1 10:00
4/5
5500K
1
G
M
AB
2/5
R
Y
B
G
100
100-0001
ISO
ISO
0
F3.5
60
2020.12. 1 10:00
5/5
100
100-0001
ISOISO
0
F3.5
60
2020.12. 1 10:00
17. Materials
502
Meanings of main messages displayed on the camera screen, and
response methods.
Card
0
It is a format that cannot be used with the camera.
Either insert another card, or back up any necessary data before formatting. (l 48)
0
Use a card compatible with the camera. (l 24)
0
Unable to access the card. Reinsert the card.
0
Insert a different card.
0
Failure to read or write data.
Turn off the camera, reinsert the card, and then turn it on again.
0
The card may be broken.
0
Insert a different card.
0
The card does not meet the writing speed requirements for recording.
Use a card of a supported Speed Class. (l 25)
0
If the recording stops even when you are using a card that meets the specified
Speed Class rating, the data writing speed of the card is getting slow.
We recommend backing up data, and formatting (l 48).
Message Displays
[Memory Card Error]/[Format this card?]
[Memory Card Error]/[This memory card cannot be used]
[Insert memory card again.]/[Try another card]
[Read Error]/[Write Error]/[Please check the card]
[Recording was cancelled due to the limitation of the writing speed of
the card]
17. Materials
503
Lens
0
Remove the lens once, and then attach it again without pressing the lens release
button. (l 49)
Turn on the camera again, and if it is still displaying, contact the dealer.
0
Remove the lens from the camera body and gently wipe the contacts on the lens and
the camera body using a dry cotton swab.
Attach the lens, turn on the camera again, and if it is still displaying, contact the
dealer.
Battery
0
Use a genuine Panasonic battery.
If this message is displayed even when a genuine Panasonic battery is used, contact
the dealer.
0
If the terminal of the battery is dirty, remove the dirt and dust from the terminal.
[The lens is not attached properly. Do not push lens release button
while lens is attached.]
[Lens attachment failed. Please make sure the lens is attached
correctly.]
[This battery cannot be used]
17. Materials
504
Others
0
Images that do not comply with the DCF standard cannot be deleted.
Back up any necessary data before formatting the card. (l 48)
0
The maximum number of folder numbers has been reached, so new folders cannot
be created.
After formatting the card, execute [File Number Reset] in the [Setup] ([Card/File])
menu. (l 91)
0
Turn off and on the camera.
If the message is displayed even when doing this several times, contact the dealer.
[Some pictures cannot be deleted]/[This picture cannot be deleted]
[A folder cannot be created]
[Please turn camera off and then on again]/[System Error]
17. Materials
505
First, try out the following procedures (l 505 to 515).
0
[Power Save Mode] is enabled. (l 44)
0
When [6K/4K Pre-Burst] or [Pre-Burst Recording] is set, the battery drains faster.
Set these settings only when recording.
0
When connected to Wi-Fi, the battery drains quickly.
Turn the camera off frequently such as by using [Power Save Mode] (l 44).
0
In high ambient temperatures or if the camera is used for continuous recording, the
temperature of the camera will rise.
To protect the camera against a rise in temperature, after [ ] is displayed,
recording will be stopped, and the following functions will not be available for a time.
Wait until the camera cools down.
– [6K/4K PHOTO]
– [Post-Focus]
– Video recording
– [AF-Point Scope]
– HDMI output
– Power supply
Troubleshooting
If the problem is not resolved, it may be improved by selecting
[Reset] (l 76) on the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu.
Power, Battery
The camera turns off automatically.
The battery becomes flat too quickly.
Recording
Recording stops before finishing.
Cannot record.
Cannot use some functions.
17. Materials
506
0
If [Focus/Shutter Priority] is set to [FOCUS], then recording will not take place until
focus is achieved. (l 373)
0
Images may look whitish when the lens or image sensor gets dirty with fingerprints or
similar.
If the lens is dirty, turn the camera off, then wipe the lens surface with a soft, dry
cloth.
For information about how to clean the image sensor, refer to page 517.
0
Ensure AE Lock is not set where it is not appropriate. (l 198)
0
When drive mode is set to [ ] (Burst Shot 1) or [ ] (Burst Shot 2), pressing
and holding the shutter button will take burst pictures. (l 128)
0
When [Bracketing] is set, then pressing the shutter button records multiple images
while automatically changing the settings. (l 156)
0
Confirm the following details:
– Is the subject outside of the focus range?
– Is [Shutter AF] set to [OFF]? (l 376)
– Is [Focus/Shutter Priority] set to [RELEASE]? (l 373)
– Is AF Lock (l 198) set where it is not appropriate?
0
The shutter speed will become slower and the image stabilizer function may not
work properly when recording in dark places.
In these cases, use a tripod and the self-timer when recording.
Cannot record images.
The shutter will not operate immediately when the shutter button is
pressed.
The recorded image is whitish.
The recorded image is too bright or dark.
Multiple images are recorded at once.
The subject is not focused properly.
The recorded image is blurred.
The image stabilizer is not effective.
17. Materials
507
0
Try the following:
– Reduce the ISO sensitivity. (l 199)
– Increase [Noise Reduction] of [Photo Style] to the positive direction, or adjust each
item other than [Noise Reduction] to the negative direction. (l 211)
– Set [Long Exposure NR] to [ON]. (l 351)
0
When a moving subject is recorded while using the following functions, the subject
may appear distorted in the picture:
– [ELEC.]
– Video recording
– [6K/4K PHOTO]
This is a characteristic of the CMOS sensor that is the image sensor of the camera,
and is not a malfunction.
0
This is characteristic of CMOS sensors which serve as
the camera’s pickup sensors.
This is not a malfunction.
0
When using the electronic shutter (l 175), lowering the
shutter speed may reduce the effect of the horizontal
stripes.
0
If flicker or horizontal stripes are noticeable when
recording video, this can be mitigated by fixing the shutter speed.
Either set [Flicker Decrease (Video)] (l 365), or fix the shutter speed with the
[ ]/[S&Q] mode (l 244).
The recorded image looks rough.
Noise appears on the picture.
The subject appears distorted on the image.
Striping or flicker may appear under lighting such as fluorescent or
LED lighting.
17. Materials
508
0
Stripes may appear in high ISO sensitivity or depending on the lens you use.
Decrease the ISO sensitivity. (l 199)
0
When recording under lighting such as fluorescent or LED lighting, increasing the
shutter speed may introduce slight changes to brightness or coloring.
These are a result of the characteristics of the light source and do not indicate a
malfunction.
0
When recording subjects in extremely bright locations or recording under lighting
such as fluorescent, LED, mercury, or sodium lighting, the coloring or screen
brightness may change or horizontal striping may appear on the screen.
0
Pixels may be missing from the image sensor.
Perform [Pixel Refresh]. (l 404)
Stripes appear in high ISO sensitivity.
The brightness or coloring of the recorded image is different from the
actual scene.
Bright spot not in subject is recorded.
17. Materials
509
0
When using a large capacity card, you may not be able to record for a while after
turning on the camera.
0
Recording video requires a card of a supported speed class. Use a compatible card.
(l 25)
0
Depending on the recording conditions or the lens used, the sound of aperture and
focus actions may be recorded in videos.
You can set the focus operation during video recording to [OFF] in [Continuous AF]
(l 256).
0
Do not block the microphone hole during video recording.
0
We recommend setting the [ ]/[S&Q] mode and recording with touch operation if
you are bothered about the operation sounds during recording. (l 246)
Video
Cannot record videos.
Video recording stops in the middle.
In videos, abnormal clicking and buzzing sounds are recorded.
The recorded audio is very quiet.
An operation sound is recorded in a video.
17. Materials
510
0
Folders and images processed on a PC cannot be played on the camera.
We recommend using the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” to write images from the
PC to the card.
0
Some images are not displayed when the [Playback Mode] is set. Set to [Normal
Play]. (l 407)
0
When Red-Eye Removal ([ ] or [ ]) is performed, red parts may be
corrected to black.
We recommend recording images with the flash mode set to [‰] or [Red-Eye
Removal] set to [OFF]. (l 231)
Playback
Cannot play back.
There are no recorded pictures.
Red part of the recorded image has changed color to black.
17. Materials
511
0
If no operations are performed during the set time period, [Auto LVF/Monitor Off]
(l 44) is activated, and the monitor/viewfinder turns off.
0
When an object or your hand is positioned near the eye sensor, the monitor display
may switch to the viewfinder display.
0
This occurs when the shutter button is pressed halfway, or when the subject
brightness changes, making the lens aperture change.
This is not a malfunction.
0
The viewfinder of the camera is built with OLED components. Screen burn-in may
occur on the screen/viewfinder when a same image is displayed for a long period of
time, but it does not affect the recorded images.
0
The flash does not fire when using the following functions:
– Video recording/[6K/4K PHOTO]/[Post-Focus]
– [ELEC.]/[Silent Mode]/[High Resolution Mode]
– [Filter Settings]
Monitor/Viewfinder
The monitor/viewfinder turns off when the camera is turned on.
It may flicker for an instant or the brightness of the screen may
change significantly for an instant.
Unevenly bright parts or irregular colors appear on the viewfinder.
Flash
The flash does not fire.
17. Materials
512
General tips for using a Wi-Fi connection
0
Use within the communication range of the device to be connected.
0
Usage near devices that utilize the 2.4 GHz frequency such as microwave ovens
and cordless telephones may result in the radio wave being lost.
Use the camera at a sufficient distance from these devices.
0
When the remaining battery level is low, it may not be possible to connect to or
maintain communication with other devices.
(A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)
0
If you place the camera on a metal table or shelf, the radio waves may be adversely
affected. In such cases, you may not be able to establish a connection.
Move the camera away from the metal surface.
Wireless access point
0
Confirm that the connected wireless access point can be used.
0
Confirm the radio wave conditions of the wireless access point.
– Move the camera closer to the wireless access point.
– Change the location and angle of the wireless access point.
0
Depending on the wireless access point, the radio wave may not be displayed even
though it is present.
– Turn off and then on the wireless access point.
– If the wireless channel of the wireless access point cannot be set automatically,
manually set the channel supported by the camera.
– If the wireless access point SSID is set not to broadcast, it may not be detected.
Enter the SSID, and then connect. (l 462)
0
Depending on the wireless access point, connection may be automatically
disconnected after specific time has passed.
Reconnect the connection again.
Wi-Fi Function
A Wi-Fi connection cannot be established.
Radio waves get disconnected.
Wireless access point is not displayed.
17. Materials
513
0
The wireless access point information set on the camera is wrong.
Check the authentication type and encryption key. (l 462)
0
Radio waves from other devices may block the connection to a wireless access
point.
Check the status of other devices that are connected to the wireless access point as
well as the status of other wireless devices.
0
Follow the message displayed to allow connection to the camera.
If you still cannot connect, select the SSID of the camera on the Wi-Fi setup screen
of the smartphone to connect.
If the SSID is not displayed, turn off and on the camera, then perform the Bluetooth
connection settings again.
0
Change the access point to connect to in the smartphone Wi-Fi settings to the
camera.
0
Depending on the version of the OS, there are two types of user account (local
account/Microsoft account).
Ensure you use the local account user name and password.
Cannot connect with a wireless access point.
Wi-Fi connection on an iOS device fails.
Wi-Fi connection with a smartphone is not possible.
When trying to connect to a PC by Wi-Fi, this does not recognize the
user name and password, and connection is not possible.
17. Materials
514
0
At the time of purchase, this camera is set to use a workgroup name of
“WORKGROUP”.
If you have changed the workgroup name of the PC, this will not be recognized.
In the [Wi-Fi Setup] menu, [PC Connection], change the workgroup name of the PC
to which to connect. (l 468)
0
Check that the login name and password are correctly typed.
0
When the clock settings of the PC connected to the camera differs considerably from
those of the camera, the camera cannot be connected to the PC depending on the
OS.
0
Is the size of the image too large?
– Reduce the image size at [Size] (l 466), and then send.
– Transmit after dividing the video with [Video Divide] (l 318).
0
File format of the video that can be sent differs depending on the destination.
(l 445)
0
In the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu, [Reset], reset network settings. (l 76)
However, all information set in [Wi-Fi Setup] and [Bluetooth] will also be reset.
(With the exception of [LUMIX CLUB])
The PC is not recognized when I use a Wi-Fi connection.
The camera cannot be connected to the PC using the Wi-Fi function.
It takes time to transmit an image to the web service.
Transmission of the image fails midway.
Some images cannot be transmitted.
I have forgotten the password for the Wi-Fi.
17. Materials
515
0
Depending on the [Aspect Ratio], gray bands may be displayed on the top and
bottom or the left and right of the images. You can change the band color in
[Background Color(Playback)] in [TV Connection] of the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu.
(l 402)
0
Set the [USB Mode] of the camera to [PC(Storage)]. (l 400)
0
Turn the camera off and on.
0
Pictures cannot be printed using a printer that does not support PictBridge.
0
Set the camera’s [USB Mode] to [PictBridge(PTP)]. (l 400)
0
The sound is caused by the in-body stabilizer. This is not a malfunction.
0
This is the sound of the lens moving and aperture operation. It is not a malfunction.
0
Reselect the language from the menu using the following procedure:
¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ [ ] ¨ Select desired language (l 405)
0
The camera surface and back of the monitor may become warm during use, but this
does not indicate a problem with performance or quality.
TV, PC, Printer
The TV images are displayed with gray bands.
Images cannot be imported even when connected to a PC.
Cannot print when the camera is connected to a printer.
Others
When the camera is shaken, a rattling sound is heard from the
camera.
There is rattling noise from the lens when the camera is turned on or
off, or when the camera is swung.
There is a sound from the lens when recording.
An unreadable language was selected by mistake.
The camera becomes warm.
17. Materials
516
The Camera
Keep this unit as far away as possible from electromagnetic
equipment (such as microwave ovens, TVs, video games etc.).
0
If you use this unit on top of or near a TV, the pictures and/or sound on this unit may
be disrupted by electromagnetic wave radiation.
0
Do not use this unit near cell phones because doing so may result in noise adversely
affecting the pictures and/or sound.
0
Recorded data may be damaged, or pictures may be distorted, by strong magnetic
fields created by speakers or large motors.
0
Electromagnetic wave radiation may adversely affect this unit, disturbing the pictures
and/or sound.
0
If this unit is adversely affected by electromagnetic equipment and stops functioning
properly, turn this unit off and remove the battery or disconnect AC adaptor. Then
reinsert the battery or reconnect AC adaptor and turn this unit on.
Do not use this unit near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines.
0
If you record near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines, the recorded pictures and/
or sound may be adversely affected.
Always use the supplied cords and cables.
If you use optional accessories, use the cords and the cables
supplied with them.
Do not extend the cords or the cables.
Do not spray the camera with insecticides or volatile chemicals.
0
If the camera is sprayed with such chemicals, the body of the camera may be
damaged and the surface finish may peel off.
Do not keep products made of rubber, PVC or similar materials in
contact with the camera for a long period of time.
Cautions for Use
17. Materials
517
Cleaning
Before cleaning the camera, remove the battery or the DC Coupler,
and disconnect the power plug from the electrical outlet. Then wipe
the camera with a dry, soft cloth.
0
When the camera is soiled badly, it can be cleaned by wiping the dirt off with a wrung
wet cloth, and then with a dry cloth.
0
Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, alcohol, kitchen detergents, etc., to
clean the camera, since it may deteriorate the external case or the coating may peel
off.
0
When using a chemical cloth, be sure to follow the accompanying instructions.
Dirt on the Image Sensor
If dirt gets inside the mount when changing lenses, depending on the
recording conditions, it may adhere to the image sensor and appear on the
recorded picture.
To prevent debris or dust adhering to internal parts of the body, avoid
changing the lens in a dusty environment and always fit the body cap or a
lens when storing the camera.
Remove any dirt on the body cap before attaching it.
Dust reduction function
The camera has a dust reduction function that will blow off the dirt and dust
that have affixed to the front of the image sensor.
If the dirt is particularly noticeable, from the [Setup] ([Others]) menu,
perform [Sensor Cleaning]. (l 404)
17. Materials
518
Removing dirt on the image sensor
The image sensor is very precise and delicate, so be sure to observe the
following when you do have to clean it yourself.
0
Blow dust off the surface of the image sensor using a commercially available blower.
Do not blow the dust off with excessive power.
0
Do not put the blower further inside than the lens mount.
The blower can scratch the image sensor if it touches.
0
Do not use any objects except a blower to clean the image sensor.
0
If you cannot remove the dirt or dust with the blower, consult the dealer or
Panasonic.
Cleaning the Viewfinder
If the viewfinder becomes dirty, blow dirt off the surface of the viewfinder
using a commercially available blower, then lightly wipe with a soft dry
cloth.
0
The eye cup cannot be removed, so make sure it does not come loose when
cleaning the viewfinder.
0
If the eye cup accidentally gets removed, consult the dealer or Panasonic.
17. Materials
519
Monitor/Viewfinder
0
Do not push hard on the monitor.
This may cause irregular coloration or malfunction.
0
Extremely high precision technology is employed to produce the monitor/viewfinder
screen. However there may be some dark or bright spots, or spots that light
constantly (red, blue, or green) on the screen.
This is not a malfunction.
Though the monitor/viewfinder screen parts are produced with highly controlled
precision technology, some pixels may be inactive or always lit.
The spots will not be recorded on images on a card.
Lens
0
When using this lens, take care not to drop, bump, or apply undue force to it.
Doing so may cause malfunction or damage to this lens and the digital
camera.
0
Do not aim the lens at the sun or strong light sources.
The concentrated light may cause fire or damage.
0
Images may be affected by dust, dirt, and soiling (water, oil, fingerprints, etc.) on the
lens surface.
Before and after recording, use a blower to blow off dust and dirt from the surface of
the lens, then lightly wipe with a soft dry cloth to remove soiling.
0
When the camera is not being used, attach the lens cap and lens rear cap to prevent
dust and dirt from adhering to or entering the camera.
0
To protect the lens contact points A, do not do the
following.
These may cause a malfunction.
– Touch the lens contact points.
– Soil the lens contact points.
– Place the lens with its mount surface facing
down.
0
To improve the dust and splash resistant
performance of the interchangeable lens
(S-R2060), a lens mount rubber is used in the mount.
– The lens mount rubber will leave scuff marks on the digital camera mount, but this
does not impact performance.
– To replace the lens mount rubber, contact Panasonic.
17. Materials
520
Battery
The battery is a rechargeable lithium ion battery.
It is highly sensitive to temperature and humidity, and the effect on performance
increases as the temperature rises or drops.
Always remove the battery after use.
0
Place the removed battery in a plastic bag, etc., and keep away from metallic objects
(clips, etc.) for storage or transport.
If you drop the battery accidentally, check to see if the body of the
battery and the contacts are deformed.
0
Damage to the camera will result if a battery with deformed contacts is inserted into
the camera.
Dispose of unusable battery.
0
The battery has a limited life.
0
Do not throw the battery into fire because it may cause an explosion.
Do not allow battery terminals to come into contact with metal objects
(such as necklaces, hairpins, etc.).
0
This can cause short-circuiting or heat generation and you may be badly burned if
you touch a battery.
17. Materials
521
Charger, AC Adaptor
0
The charging lights may blink under the influence of
static electricity or electromagnetic wave, depending
on the charging environment. This phenomenon has
no effects on charging.
0
If you use the AC adaptor near a radio, the radio
reception may be disturbed.
Keep the AC adaptor 1 m (3.3 feet) or more away
from radio.
0
During usage, the AC adaptor may emit an electrical hum; this is not a malfunction.
0
After use, be sure to disconnect the power plug from the electrical outlet.
(A very small amount of current is consumed if it is left connected.)
0
Keep the contacts A of the charger and battery clean.
Wipe them with a dry cloth if they get dirty.
Card
Do not leave the card in areas with high temperatures, direct sunlight,
or areas prone to electromagnetic waves and static.
Do not bend or drop the card.
Do not subject the card to strong vibration.
0
Otherwise, the card and recorded data may be damaged.
0
Put the card in the card case or the storage bag after use and when storing or
carrying the card.
0
Do not allow dirt, water or other foreign objects to get into the contacts on the card.
Additionally, do not touch the contacts with your hands.
17. Materials
522
Personal Information
Personal information is stored within the camera and in recorded images.
We recommend that you enhance security by setting a Wi-Fi password and
Wi-Fi function lock to protect personal information. (l 468, 469)
0
Images may contain information that can be used to identify the user, such as
recording dates and times, and location information.
Confirm details carefully before uploading images to a web service.
Disclaimer
0
Information including personal information may be altered or vanish due to
erroneous operation, effect of static electricity, accident, malfunction, repair, or other
handlings.
Please note in advance that Panasonic is not liable in any way for any direct or
indirect damage from the alteration or vanishing of information or personal
information.
When requesting a repair or transferring/disposing of the camera
0
After making a copy of personal information, be sure to delete information, including
personal information, such as wireless LAN connection settings that you have
registered or saved within the camera with [Reset] (l 76), and [Delete account]
([LUMIX CLUB]) (l 472).
0
Reset the settings to protect the personal information. (l 76)
0
Remove the card from the camera.
0
Settings may return to factory default when camera is repaired.
0
Please contact the dealer where you purchased the camera or Panasonic if above
operations are not possible due to malfunction.
Points to remember when disposing of/transferring the memory card
Format or delete using the camera or a PC will only modify the file management
information, so it will not delete the data in the card completely.
We recommend physically destroying the card or using commercially available PC
data deletion software to delete the card data completely when disposing of/
transferring the card.
You are responsible for handling of data on cards.
17. Materials
523
When Not Using the Camera for a Long Period of Time
0
Ensure you remove the battery and card from the camera.
If the battery is left in the camera, it may over-discharge, and be rendered unusable
even after charging.
0
Store the battery in a cool and dry place with a relatively stable temperature.
(Recommended temperature: 15 oC to 25 oC (59 oF to 77 oF); recommended
humidity: 40 %RH to 60 %RH)
0
If storing for a long period of time, it is recommended that the battery be charged
once per year, fully drained in the camera, then removed from the camera and then
stored again.
0
We recommend storing the camera with a desiccant (silica gel) when you keep it in a
closet or a cabinet.
0
Check all the parts before recording when you have not used the camera for a long
period of time.
Image Data
0
Recorded data may be damaged or lost if the camera breaks down due to
inappropriate handling.
Panasonic will not be liable for any damage caused due to loss of recorded data.
Tripod
0
Make sure the tripod is stable when the camera is attached to it.
0
When using a tripod, removal of the battery may not be possible.
0
Care is required because tightening the screw excessively may damage the camera,
or cause the rating label to come off.
0
Please also refer to the operating instructions for the tripod.
Shoulder Strap
0
If you attach a heavy interchangeable lens to the camera body, do not carry the
camera by the shoulder strap.
Hold the camera and the lens when carrying them.
17. Materials
524
Wi-Fi Function
Use the camera as a wireless LAN device.
When using devices or computer systems that require more reliable
security than wireless LAN devices, ensure that the appropriate measures
are taken for safety designs and defects for the systems used.
Panasonic will not take any responsibility for any damage that arises when
using the camera for any purpose other than as a wireless LAN device.
Use of the Wi-Fi function of the camera is presumed to be in
countries where it is sold.
There is the risk that the camera violates the radio wave regulations if used
in countries other than those where it is sold, and Panasonic takes no
responsibility for any violations.
There is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be
intercepted.
Please note that there is the risk that data sent and received via radio
waves may be intercepted by a third party.
Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity
or interference.
0
Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or interference,
such as near microwave ovens.
These may cause the interruption of the radio waves.
0
Using the camera near devices such as microwave ovens or cordless telephones
that use the 2.4 GHz radio wave band may cause a decrease in performance in both
devices.
Do not connect to the wireless network you are not authorized to use.
When using Wi-Fi, wireless networks (SSID) that you are not allowed to
use may be displayed, but you should not connect to these as it may be
viewed as unauthorized access.
17. Materials
525
Listed below are the numbers of pictures that can be taken and the time
lengths available for recording when the supplied battery is being used.
0
The number of pictures that can be taken is according to the CIPA (Camera &
Imaging Products Association) standards.
0
Using a Panasonic SDHC memory card.
0
Using the interchangeable lens (S-R2060).
0
The values listed are approximate.
Recording Pictures (When Using the Monitor)
Recording Pictures (When Using the Viewfinder)
0
The numbers in parentheses indicate the values that result when [Time to Sleep] in
[Power Save LVF Shooting] is set to [1SEC] and the [Power Save LVF Shooting]
function works as intended.
(Based on the test conditions derived from the CIPA standard and specified by
Panasonic)
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken
and Available Recording Time with the
Battery
Number of pictures that can be taken 440
Number of pictures that can be taken 470 (1500)
17. Materials
526
Recording Videos (When Using the Monitor)
[MP4] (Recording with the recording quality set to [FHD/8bit/28M/50p])
[MP4] (Recording with the recording quality set to [4K/10bit/100M/50p])
[MOV] (Recording with the recording quality set to [FHD/50p/420/8-L])
[MOV] (Recording with the recording quality set to [4K/50p/420/10-L])
0
Actual available recording time is the time available for recording when repeating
actions such as turning the camera on and off, starting/stopping recording, etc.
Continuous available recording time
(minutes)
140
Actual available recording time
(minutes)
70
Continuous available recording time
(minutes)
110
Actual available recording time
(minutes)
55
Continuous available recording time
(minutes)
140
Actual available recording time
(minutes)
70
Continuous available recording time
(minutes)
100
Actual available recording time
(minutes)
50
17. Materials
527
Playback (When Using the Monitor)
Playback time (minutes) 280
0
The number of pictures that can be taken and the available recording time
vary depending on the surrounding environment and the usage conditions.
For example, these will reduce in the following case:
– In low-temperature environments, such as on ski slopes.
0
If the usage duration drops significantly even when the battery is fully charged,
then the battery is at the end of its service life.
Replace with a new battery.
17. Materials
528
Listed below are the numbers of pictures and the time lengths of videos
that can be recorded on a card.
0
The values listed are approximate.
Number of Still Images That Can Be Taken
0
[Aspect Ratio]: [3:2]; [Picture Quality]: [FINE]
0
[Aspect Ratio]: [3:2]; [Picture Quality]: [RAWiFINE]
¢ Indicates the number of pictures when [L]-size JPEG images are recorded
simultaneously with [HLG Photo] set to [Full-Res.].
Number of Still Images That Can Be
Taken and Video Recording Time with
Cards
[Picture Size]
Card capacity
32 GB 64 GB 128 GB
[L] (24M) 2460 4940 9780
[M] (12M) 4520 8980 17790
[S] (6M) 7940 15440 30570
[Full-Res.]
¢
970 1930 3830
[Picture Size]
Card capacity
32 GB 64 GB 128 GB
[L] (24M) 650 1300 2580
[M] (12M) 730 1480 2930
[S] (6M) 790 1590 3150
[Full-Res.]
¢
460 920 1830
17. Materials
529
Video Recording Time
0
“h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for minute and “s” for second.
0
Video recording time is the total time of all the videos which have been recorded.
0
[Rec. File Format]: [MP4]
[Switch NTSC/PAL]: [NTSC]
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
32 GB 64 GB 128 GB
[4K/10bit/100M/60p]/
[4K/8bit/100M/30p]/[4K/8bit/100M/24p]
41m00s 1h25m 2h45m
[4K/10bit/72M/30p]/[4K/10bit/72M/24p] 58m00s 1h55m 3h55m
[FHD/8bit/28M/60p] 2h25m 4h55m 9h45m
[FHD/8bit/20M/30p] 3h15m 6h30m 13h00m
[FHD/8bit/24M/24p] 2h50m 5h40m 11h25m
[Switch NTSC/PAL]: [PAL]
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
32 GB 64 GB 128 GB
[4K/10bit/100M/50p]/[4K/8bit/100M/25p] 41m00s 1h25m 2h45m
[4K/10bit/72M/25p] 58m00s 1h55m 3h55m
[FHD/8bit/28M/50p] 2h25m 4h55m 9h45m
[FHD/8bit/20M/25p] 3h15m 6h30m 13h00m
17. Materials
530
0
[Rec. File Format]: [MOV]
[Switch NTSC/PAL]: [NTSC]
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
32 GB 64 GB 128 GB
[4K/60p/420/10-L] 20m00s 42m00s 1h20m
[4K/60p/420/8-L]/[4K/30p/422/10-L]/
[4K/24p/422/10-L]/
[4K-A/30p/422/10-L]/[4K-A/24p/422/10-L]
27m00s 56m00s 1h50m
[4K/30p/420/8-L]/[4K/24p/420/8-L]/
[FHD/60p/422/10-L]/[FHD/60p/420/8-L]/
[FHD/30p/422/10-L]/[FHD/30p/420/8-L]/
[FHD/24p/422/10-L]/[FHD/24p/420/8-L]/
[4K-A/30p/420/8-L]/[4K-A/24p/420/8-L]
41m00s 1h25m 2h45m
[Switch NTSC/PAL]: [PAL]
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
32 GB 64 GB 128 GB
[4K/50p/420/10-L]/[4K-A/50p/420/10-L] 20m00s 42m00s 1h20m
[4K/50p/420/8-L]/[4K/25p/422/10-L]/
[4K-A/50p/420/8-L]/[4K-A/25p/422/10-L]
27m00s 56m00s 1h50m
[4K/25p/420/8-L]/[FHD/50p/422/10-L]/
[FHD/50p/420/8-L]/[FHD/25p/422/10-L]/
[FHD/25p/420/8-L]/[4K-A/25p/420/8-L]
41m00s 1h25m 2h45m
0
Depending on the recording conditions and the type of card, number of still
images that can be taken, video recording time vary.
0
[9999+] is displayed on the recording screen if the remaining number of still
images that can be taken is 10000 or more.
0
The continuous recordable time for videos is displayed on the screen.
17. Materials
531
List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/
Settings Available for Copying
: Using [Reset], the function to return to default settings
: Using [Save to Custom Mode], the function to save settings details in the Custom
mode
: Using [Save/Restore Camera Setting], the function to copy settings details
Menu Default setting
[Photo]: [Image Quality]
[Photo Style] [ ] 333
[Metering Mode] [ ] 333
[Aspect Ratio] [3:2] 333
[Picture Quality] [FINE] 333
[Picture Size] [L] (24M) 333
[HLG Photo] [OFF] 333
[High Resolution
Mode]
[Start] —
[Picture Size] [XL] 333
[Picture Quality] [COMBINED] 333
[Simul Record Normal
Shot]
[ON] 333
[Shutter Delay] [2 SEC] 333
[Motion Blur Processing] [MODE1] 333
[Long Exposure NR] [ON] 333
[ISO Sensitivity
(photo)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit
Setting]
[100] 333
[ISO Auto Upper Limit
Setting]
[AUTO] 333
[Min. Shutter Speed] [AUTO] 333
[i.Dynamic Range] [OFF] 333
[Vignetting Comp.] [ON] 333
[Diffraction Compensation] [OFF] 333
[Filter Settings]
[Filter Effect] [OFF] 333
[Simultaneous Record w/o
Filter]
[OFF] 333
17. Materials
532
Menu Default setting
[Photo]: [Focus]
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)] [Set 1] 333
[AF Assist Light] [ON] 333
[Focus Peaking]
[ON]/[OFF] [ON] 333
[SET] — 333
[1-Area AF Moving Speed] [FAST] 333
[Photo]: [Flash]
[Flash Mode] [‰] 333
[Firing Mode] [TTL] 333
[Flash Adjust.]
[±0 EV] 333
[Flash Synchro] [1ST] 333
[Manual Flash Adjust.] [1/1] 333
[Auto Exposure Comp.] [OFF] 333
[Red-Eye Removal] [OFF] 333
[Wireless] [OFF] 333
[Wireless Channel] [1CH] 333
[Wireless FP] [OFF] 333
[Communication Light] [HIGH] 333
[Wireless Setup] — 333
[Photo]: [Others (Photo)]
[Bracketing]
[Bracketing Type] [OFF] 333
[More Settings] — 333
[Silent Mode] [OFF] 333
[Image Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode] [ ] 333
[Body(B.I.S.) /
Lens(O.I.S.)]
[] 333
[When to Activate] [HALF-SHUTTER] 333
[E-Stabilization (Video)] [OFF] 333
[Boost I.S. (Video)] [OFF] 333
[Anamorphic (Video)] [OFF] 333
[Focal Length Set] [35.0 mm] 333
17. Materials
533
Menu Default setting
[Burst Shot 1 Setting] [H] 333
[Burst Shot 2 Setting] [ ] 333
[Shutter Type] [MECH.] 333
[Shutter Delay] [OFF] 333
[Ex. Tele Conv.] [OFF] 333
[Time Lapse/
Animation]
[Mode] [Time Lapse Shot] 333
[Shooting Interval Setting] [ON] 333
[Start Time] [Now] 333
[Image Count] [1] 333
[Shooting Interval] [1m00s] 333
[Exposure Leveling] [OFF] 333
[Live View
Composite]
[Start] —
[Shutter Delay] [OFF] 333
[Self Timer] [ ] 333
[6K/4K PHOTO]
[Picture Size / Burst
Speed]
[6K 18M] 333
[Rec Method] [ ] 333
[Pre-Burst Recording] [OFF] 333
[Post-Focus] [OFF] 333
[Multiple Exposure]
[Start] —
[Auto Gain] [ON] 333
[Overlay] [OFF] 333
[Video]: [Image Quality]
[Exposure Mode] [P] 333
[Photo Style] [ ] 333
[Metering Mode] [ ] 333
[ISO Sensitivity
(video)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit
Setting]
[100] 333
[ISO Auto Upper Limit
Setting]
[AUTO] 333
17. Materials
534
Menu Default setting
[Flicker Decrease (Video)] [OFF] 333
[i.Dynamic Range] [OFF] 333
[Vignetting Comp.] [ON] 333
[Diffraction Compensation] [OFF] 333
[Filter Settings]
[Filter Effect] [OFF] 333
[Simultaneous Record w/o
Filter]
[OFF] 333
[Video]: [Image Format]
[Image Area of Video] [FULL] 333
[Rec Quality]
When [Switch NTSC/
PAL] is set to [NTSC]:
[FHD/8bit/28M/60p]
333
When [Switch NTSC/
PAL] is set to [PAL]:
[FHD/8bit/28M/50p]
[Slow & Quick Setting] [30fps] 333
[Switch NTSC/PAL] [PAL] 333
[Rec. File Format] [MP4] 333
[Time Code]
[Time Code Display] [OFF] 333
[Count Up] [REC RUN] 333
[Time Code Value] —
[Time Code Mode] [DF] 333
[HDMI Time Code Output] [OFF] 333
[Luminance Level] [16-255] 333
[Anamorphic(4:3)] [OFF] 33
17. Materials
535
Menu Default setting
[Video]: [Focus]
[AF Custom
Setting(Video)]
[ON]/[OFF] [OFF] 333
[SET] — 333
[Continuous AF] [MODE1] 333
[AF Assist Light] [ON] 333
[Focus Peaking]
[ON]/[OFF] [ON] 333
[SET] — 333
[1-Area AF Moving Speed] [FAST] 333
[Video]: [Audio]
[Sound Rec Level Disp.] [OFF] 333
[Sound Rec Level Adj.] [0dB] 333
[Sound Rec Level Limiter] [ON] 333
[Wind Noise Canceller] [STANDARD] 333
[Wind Cut] [OFF] 333
[Mic Socket] [ ] 333
[Special Mic.] [STEREO] 333
[XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] [ON] 333
[Sound Output] [REALTIME] 333
[Headphone Volume] [LEVEL3] 33
[Video]: [Others (Video)]
[Silent Mode] [OFF] 333
[Image Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode] [ ] 333
[Body(B.I.S.) /
Lens(O.I.S.)]
[] 333
[When to Activate] [HALF-SHUTTER] 333
[E-Stabilization (Video)] [OFF] 333
[Boost I.S. (Video)] [OFF] 333
[Anamorphic (Video)] [OFF] 333
[Focal Length Set] [35.0 mm] 333
[Live Cropping] [OFF] 333
17. Materials
536
Menu Default setting
[Custom]: [Image Quality]
[Photo Style
Settings]
[Show/Hide Photo Style] — 333
[My Photo Style Settings] — 333
[Reset Photo Style] —
[ISO Increments] [1/3 EV] 333
[Extended ISO] [OFF] 333
[Exposure Offset
Adjust.]
[Multi Metering] [n0EV] 333
[Center Weighted] [n0EV] 333
[Spot] [n0EV] 333
[Highlight Weighted] [n0EV] 333
[Color Space] [sRGB] 333
[Exposure Comp. Reset] [OFF] 33
[Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M] [ON] 333
[CreativeVideo
Combined Set.]
[F/SS/ISO/Exposure
Comp.]
[] 333
[White Balance] [ ] 333
[Photo Style] [ ] 333
[Metering Mode] [ ] 333
[AF Mode] [ ] 333
17. Materials
537
Menu Default setting
[Custom]: [Focus/Shutter]
[Focus/Shutter
Priority]
[AFS] [FOCUS] 333
[AFC] [BALANCE] 333
[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor] [OFF] 333
[AF/AE Lock Hold] [OFF] 333
[AF+MF] [OFF] 333
[MF Assist]
[Focus Ring] [ON] 333
[AF Mode] [ON] 333
[Press Joystick] [OFF] 333
[MF Assist Display] [PIP] 333
[MF Guide] [ ] 333
[Focus Ring Lock] [OFF] 333
[Show/Hide AF
Mode]
[Face/Eye/Body/Animal
Detect.]
[ON] 333
[Tracking] [ON] 333
[225-Area] [ON] 333
[Zone (Vert./ Horz.)] [ON] 333
[Zone (Square)] [OFF] 333
[Zone (Oval)] [ON] 333
[1-Area+] [ON] 333
[Pinpoint] [ON] 333
[Custom1] [OFF] 333
[Custom2] [OFF] 333
[Custom3] [OFF] 333
17. Materials
538
Menu Default setting
[Pinpoint AF
Setting]
[Pinpoint AF Time] [MID] 333
[Pinpoint AF Display] [PIP] 333
[AF-Point Scope
Setting]
[Keep Enlarged Display] [OFF] 333
[PIP Display] [PIP] 333
[Shutter AF] [ON] 333
[Half-Press Shutter] [OFF] 333
[Quick AF] [OFF] 333
[Eye Sensor AF] [OFF] 333
[Looped Focus Frame] [OFF] 333
[AFC Start Point (225-Area)] [OFF] 333
[Custom]: [Operation]
[Q.MENU Settings]
[Layout Style] [MODE1] 333
[Front Dial Assignment] [Value] 333
[Item Customize (Photo)] — 333
[Item Customize (Video)] — 333
[Touch Settings]
[Touch Screen] [ON] 333
[Touch Tab] [OFF] 333
[Touch AF] [AF] 333
[Touch Pad AF] [OFF] 333
[Operation Lock
Setup]
[Cursor] [ ] 333
[Joystick] [ ] 333
[Touch Screen] [ ] 333
[Dial] [ ] 333
[DISP. Button] [ ] 333
[Fn Button Set]
[Setting in REC mode] — 333
[Setting in PLAY mode] — 333
[WB/ISO/Expo. Button] [AFTER PRESSING2] 333
[ISO Displayed
Setting]
[Front/Rear Dials] [ / ] 333
[Exposure Comp.
Disp. Setting]
[Cursor Buttons (Up/
Down)]
[OFF] 333
[Front/Rear Dials] [ / ] 333
17. Materials
539
Menu Default setting
[Dial Set.]
[Assign Dial (F/SS)] [SET1] 333
[Rotation (F/SS)] [ ] 333
[Control Dial Assignment] [ ] 333
[Exposure Comp.] [OFF] 333
[Dial Operation Switch
Setup]
— 333
[Rotation (Menu
Operation)]
[] 333
[Joystick Setting] [D.FOCUS Movement] 333
[Video Rec. Button (Remote)] [Video Record] 333
[Custom]: [Monitor / Display (Photo)]
[Auto Review]
[Duration Time (photo)] [OFF] 333
[Duration Time (6K/4K
PHOTO)]
[HOLD] 333
[Duration Time
(Post-Focus)]
[HOLD] 333
[Playback Operation
Priority]
[OFF] 333
[Constant Preview]
[ON]/[OFF] [OFF] 333
[SET] — 333
[Histogram] [OFF] 333
[Photo Grid Line] [OFF] 333
[Frame Marker]
[ON]/[OFF] [OFF] 333
[SET] — 333
[AF Area Display] [ON] 333
[Live View Boost]
[MODE1]/[MODE2]/[OFF] [OFF] 333
[SET] [M] 333
[Night Mode]
[Monitor] [OFF] 333
[LVF] [OFF] 333
[LVF/Monitor Disp.
Set]
[LVF Disp. Set] [ ] 333
[Monitor Disp. Set] [ ] 333
17. Materials
540
Menu Default setting
[Expo.Meter] [OFF] 333
[Focal Length] [ON] 333
[Photo/Video Preview] [ ] 333
[Photos/Videos Remaining] [ ] 333
[Blinking Highlights] [OFF] 333
[Sheer Overlay]
[ON]/[OFF] [OFF] 3
[SET] — 3
[I.S. Status Scope] [OFF] 333
[Level Gauge] [ON] 333
[Luminance Spot Meter] [OFF] 333
[Framing Outline] [OFF] 333
[Show/Hide Monitor
Layout]
[Control Panel] [ON] 333
[Black Screen] [ON] 333
[Custom]: [Monitor / Display (Video)]
[V-Log View Assist]
[Read LUT File] —
[LUT Select] [Vlog_709] 33
[LUT View Assist
(Monitor)]
[OFF] 33
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] [OFF] 33
[HLG View Assist]
[Monitor] [MODE2] 333
[HDMI] [AUTO] 333
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] [OFF] 333
[Monochrome Live View] [OFF] 333
[Center Marker] [OFF] 333
[Zebra Pattern]
[ZEBRA1]/[ZEBRA2]/
[ZEBRA1+2]/[OFF]
[OFF] 333
[SET] — 333
[Waveform Monitor] [OFF] 333
[Red REC Frame Indicator] [OFF] 333
17. Materials
541
Menu Default setting
[Custom]: [IN/OUT]
[HDMI Rec Output]
[Info Display] [ON] 333
[HDMI Recording Control] [OFF] 333
[4K/60p Bit Mode]/
[4K/50p Bit Mode]
[4:2:0 8bit] 333
[Sound Output (HDMI)] [ON] 333
[Custom]: [Lens / Others]
[Lens Focus Resume] [OFF] 333
[Lens Fn Button Setting] [Focus Stop] 333
[Focus Ring
Control]
[NON-LINEAR]/[LINEAR] [NON-LINEAR] 333
[SET] [150°] 333
[Setup]: [Card/File]
[Card Format] —
[Double Card Slot
Function]
[Recording Method] [ ] 33
[Destination Card Slot] [ ] 33
[Folder / File
Settings]
[Select Folder] —
[Create a New Folder] —
[File Name Setting] [Folder Number Link] 33
[File Number Reset] —
[Copyright
Information]
[Artist] [OFF] 33
[Copyright Holder] [OFF] 33
[Display Copyright Info.] —
[Setup]: [Monitor / Display]
[Power Save Mode]
[Sleep Mode] [5MIN.] 33
[Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)] [ON] 33
[Auto LVF/Monitor Off] [5MIN.] 33
[Power Save LVF
Shooting]
— 33
17. Materials
542
Menu Default setting
[Monitor Frame Rate] [60fps] 33
[LVF Frame Rate] [60fps] 33
[Monitor Settings]/[Viewfinder] — 3
[Monitor Backlight]/[LVF Luminance] [AUTO] 33
[Eye Sensor]
[Sensitivity] [HIGH] 33
[LVF/Monitor Switch] [LVF/MON AUTO] 33
[Level Gauge
Adjust.]
[Adjust.] — 3
[Level Gauge Value
Reset]
—
[Setup]: [IN/OUT]
[Beep]
[Beep Volume] [ ] 33
[AF Beep Volume] [ ] 33
[AF Beep Tone] [ ] 33
[E-Shutter Vol] [ ] 33
[E-Shutter Tone] [ ] 33
[Headphone Volume] [LEVEL3] 33
[Wi-Fi] — 3
[Bluetooth] — 3
[USB]
[USB Mode]
[y][Select on
connection]
33
[USB Power Supply] [ON] 33
[Battery Use Priority] [BG] 33
[TV Connection]
[HDMI Mode (Playback)] [AUTO] 33
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] [OFF] 33
[HLG View Assist (HDMI)] [AUTO] 333
[VIERA Link (CEC)] [OFF] 33
[Background
Color(Playback)]
[] 33
[Photo Luminance Level] [16-255] 33
[Wireless Connection Light] [ON] 33
17. Materials
543
Menu Default setting
[Setup]: [Setting]
[Save to Custom Mode] — 33
[Load Custom Mode] — 33
[Custom Mode
Settings]
[Limit No. of Custom
Mode]
[3] 33
[Edit Title] — 33
[How to Reload Custom
Mode]
— 33
[Select Loading Details] — 33
[Save/Restore
Camera Setting]
[Save] —
[Load] —
[Delete] —
[Keep Settings While
Format]
[OFF] 33
[Reset] —
[Setup]: [Others]
[Clock Set] 0:00:00 1/1/2020
[Time Zone] GMT i 1:00 3
[Pixel Refresh] —
[Sensor Cleaning] —
[Language] [ENGLISH] 33
[Firmware Version] —
[Online Manual] —
17. Materials
544
Menu Default setting
[My Menu]: [Edit My Menu]
[Add] — 33
[Sorting] —
[Delete] —
[Display from My Menu] [OFF] 33
[Playback]: [Playback Mode]
[Playback Mode] [Normal Play] 33
[Slide Show] — 33
[Rotate Disp.] [ON] 33
[Picture Sort] [DATE/TIME] 33
[Magnify from AF Point] [OFF] 33
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)] [OFF] 33
[HLG View Assist (Monitor)] [MODE2] 333
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] [OFF] 333
[Playback]: [Process Image]
[RAW Processing] —
[6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving] —
[6K/4K PHOTO Noise Reduction] [AUTO] 33
[Time Lapse Video] —
[Stop Motion Video] —
[Playback]: [Add/Delete Info.]
[Protect] —
[Rating] —
[Playback]: [Edit Image]
[Resize] —
[Rotate] —
[Video Divide] —
[Copy] —
[Playback]: [Others]
[Delete Confirmation] ["No" first] 33
[Delete All Images] —
17. Materials
545
List of Functions That Can Be Set in
Each Recording Mode
Menu iA P A S M
S&Q
[Photo]: [Image Quality]
[Photo Style] 33333
[Metering Mode] 3333
[Aspect Ratio] 33333
[Picture Quality] 33333
[Picture Size] 33333
[HLG Photo] 3333
[High Resolution
Mode]
[Start] 3333
[Picture Size] 3333
[Picture Quality] 3333
[Simul Record Normal
Shot]
3333
[Shutter Delay] 3333
[Motion Blur
Processing]
3333
[Long Exposure NR] 3333
[ISO Sensitivity
(photo)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit
Setting]
3333
[ISO Auto Upper Limit
Setting]
3333
[Min. Shutter Speed] 33
[i.Dynamic Range] 3333
[Vignetting Comp.] 3333
[Diffraction Compensation] 3333
[Filter Settings]
[Filter Effect] 3333
[Simultaneous Record
w/o Filter]
3333
[Photo]: [Focus]
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)] 3333
[AF Assist Light] 3333
17. Materials
546
Menu iA P A S M
S&Q
[Focus Peaking]
[ON]/[OFF] 33333
[SET] 33333
[1-Area AF Moving Speed] 33333
[Photo]: [Flash]
[Flash Mode] 33333
[Firing Mode] 3333
[Flash Adjust.] 3333
[Flash Synchro] 3333
[Manual Flash Adjust.] 3333
[Auto Exposure Comp.] 3333
[Red-Eye Removal] 3333
[Wireless] 3333
[Wireless Channel] 3333
[Wireless FP] 3333
[Communication Light] 3333
[Wireless Setup] 3333
[Photo]: [Others (Photo)]
[Bracketing]
[Bracketing Type] 33333
[More Settings] 33333
[Silent Mode] 33333
[Image Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode] 33333
[Body(B.I.S.) /
Lens(O.I.S.)]
33333
[When to Activate] 33333
[E-Stabilization
(Video)]
33333
[Boost I.S. (Video)] 33333
[Anamorphic (Video)] 33333
[Focal Length Set] 33333
17. Materials
547
Menu iA P A S M
S&Q
[Burst Shot 1 Setting] 33333
[Burst Shot 2 Setting] 33333
[Shutter Type] 33333
[Shutter Delay] 33333
[Ex. Tele Conv.] 33333
[Time Lapse/Animation] 33333
[Live View
Composite]
[Start] 3
[Shutter Delay] 3
[Self Timer] 33333
[6K/4K PHOTO]
[Picture Size / Burst
Speed]
33333
[Rec Method] 33333
[Pre-Burst Recording] 33333
[Post-Focus] 33333
[Multiple Exposure]
[Start] 3333
[Auto Gain] 3333
[Overlay] 3333
[Video]: [Image Quality]
[Exposure Mode] 33
[Photo Style] 3333333
[Metering Mode] 33333 3
[ISO Sensitivity
(video)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit
Setting]
33
[ISO Auto Upper Limit
Setting]
33
[Flicker Decrease (Video)] 3333
[i.Dynamic Range] 33333 3
[Vignetting Comp.] 33333
[Diffraction Compensation] 33333 3
[Filter Settings]
[Filter Effect] 33333
[Simultaneous Record
w/o Filter]
3333
17. Materials
548
Menu iA P A S M
S&Q
[Video]: [Image Format]
[Image Area of Video] 333333
[Rec Quality] 333333 3
[Slow & Quick Setting] 3
[Switch NTSC/PAL] 333333 3
[Rec. File Format] 333333
[Time Code]
[Time Code Display] 333333
[Count Up] 333333
[Time Code Value] 333333
[Time Code Mode] 333333
[HDMI Time Code
Output]
3
[Luminance Level] 3333333
[Anamorphic(4:3)] 3
[Video]: [Focus]
[AF Custom
Setting(Video)]
[ON]/[OFF] 333333 3
[SET] 333333 3
[Continuous AF] 333333 3
[AF Assist Light] 33333 3
[Focus Peaking]
[ON]/[OFF] 333333 3
[SET] 333333 3
[1-Area AF Moving Speed] 3333333
[Video]: [Audio]
[Sound Rec Level Disp.] 333333
[Sound Rec Level Adj.] 333333
[Sound Rec Level Limiter] 333333
[Wind Noise Canceller] 333333
[Wind Cut] 333333
[Mic Socket] 333333 3
[Special Mic.] 333333 3
[XLR Mic Adaptor Setting] 333333 3
[Sound Output] 3333333
[Headphone Volume] 333333 3
17. Materials
549
Menu iA P A S M
S&Q
[Video]: [Others (Video)]
[Silent Mode] 333333 3
[Image Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode] 333333 3
[Body(B.I.S.) /
Lens(O.I.S.)]
333333 3
[When to Activate] 33333
[E-Stabilization
(Video)]
333333
[Boost I.S. (Video)] 333333 3
[Anamorphic (Video)] 333333 3
[Focal Length Set] 333333 3
[Live Cropping] 3
17. Materials
550
The specifications are subject to change for performance enhancement.
Digital camera body (DC-S5):
Information for your safety
Specifications
Power source:
Power consumption:
8.4 V
4.3 W (when recording with the monitor), 3.2 W (when
playing back with the monitor)
[When using the interchangeable lens (S-R2060)]
Type
Type Digital Single Lens Mirrorless camera
Recording media SD memory card / SDHC memory card / SDXC memory
card
0
Card slot 1
– Compliant with UHS-
I
/UHS-
II
UHS Speed Class 3
– Compliant with UHS-
II
Video Speed Class 90
0
Card slot 2
– Compliant with UHS-
I
UHS Speed Class 3
Double slot recording function is available.
Lens mount Leica Camera AG L-Mount
Image sensor
Image sensor 35 mm full-frame (35.6 mmk23.8 mm) CMOS sensor, a
total of 25,280,000 pixels, primary color filter
Effective number of
pixels of the camera
24,200,000 pixels
Latitude
14i stops ([V-Log])
17. Materials
551
Recording format for still images
File format for still
images
JPEG (DCF compliant, Exif 2.31 compliant) / RAW / HLG
photo (CTA-2072 compliant)
File format for 6K/4K
photos
6K photo: MP4 (H.265/HEVC, AAC (2ch))
4K photo: MP4 (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC (2ch))
Picture size
(pixels)
When the aspect ratio setting is [4:3]
[L]: 5328k4000 (3536k2656)
¢
[M]: 3792k2848 (2560k1920)
¢
[S]: 2688k2016 (1840k1376)
¢
[High Resolution Mode] ([XL]): 10656k8000
[High Resolution Mode] ([LL]): 7552k5664
6K photo: 4992k3744
4K photo: 3328k2496 (3328k2496)
¢
[HLG Photo] ([Full-Res.]): 5312k3984
[HLG Photo] ([4K-Res.]): 2880k2160 (2880k2160)
¢
When the aspect ratio setting is [3:2]
[L]: 6000k4000 (3984k2656)
¢
[M]: 4272k2848 (2880k1920)
¢
[S]: 3024k2016 (2064k1376)
¢
[High Resolution Mode] ([XL]): 12000k8000
[High Resolution Mode] ([LL]): 8496k5664
6K photo: 5184k3456
4K photo: 3504k2336 (3504k2336)
¢
[HLG Photo] ([Full-Res.]): 5984k4000
[HLG Photo] ([4K-Res.]): 3232k2160 (3232k2160)
¢
When the aspect ratio setting is [16:9]
[L]: 6000k3368 (3984k2240)
¢
[M]: 4272k2400 (2880k1624)
¢
[S]: 3024k1704 (1920k1080)
¢
[High Resolution Mode] ([XL]): 12000k6736
[High Resolution Mode] ([LL]): 8496k4784
4K photo: 3840k2160 (3840k2160)
¢
[HLG Photo] ([Full-Res.]): 5888k3312
[HLG Photo] ([4K-Res.]): 3840k2160 (3840k2160)
¢
¢ Figures in parentheses are for APS-C lenses
17. Materials
552
Picture size
(pixels)
When the aspect ratio setting is [1:1]
[L]: 4000k4000 (2656k2656)
¢
[M]: 2848k2848 (1920k1920)
¢
[S]: 2016k2016 (1376k1376)
¢
[High Resolution Mode] ([XL]): 8000k8000
[High Resolution Mode] ([LL]): 5664k5664
4K photo: 2880k2880 (2880k2880)
¢
[HLG Photo] ([Full-Res.]): 4000k4000
[HLG Photo] ([4K-Res.]): 2144k2144 (2144k2144)
¢
When the aspect ratio setting is [65:24]
[L]: 6000k2208
When the aspect ratio setting is [2:1]
[L]: 6000k3000
¢ Figures in parentheses are for APS-C lenses
Image quality for
pictures
Fine / Standard / RAWiFine / RAWiStandard / RAW
17. Materials
553
Recording format for video
Video format MP4 (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.265/HEVC) /
MOV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.265/HEVC)
Audio format MP4 AAC (2ch)
MOV LPCM (2ch, 48 kHz/16-bit)
Image quality for
video
Refer to page 250 and 285 in this document for
information about resolution, recording frame rate, and
other elements of recording quality.
S&Q
(Slow & Quick)
[Switch NTSC/PAL]: [NTSC]
When the recording quality setting is [4K/8bit/100M/30p]
Frame rate: 1 fps to 60 fps
When the recording quality setting is [4K/8bit/100M/24p]
Frame rate: 1 fps to 60 fps
When the recording quality setting is [FHD/8bit/28M/60p]
Frame rate: 1 fps to 180 fps
When the recording quality setting is [FHD/8bit/20M/30p]
Frame rate: 1 fps to 180 fps
When the recording quality setting is [FHD/8bit/24M/24p]
Frame rate: 1 fps to 180 fps
[Switch NTSC/PAL]: [PAL]
When the recording quality setting is [4K/8bit/100M/25p]
Frame rate: 1 fps to 60 fps
When the recording quality setting is [FHD/8bit/28M/50p]
Frame rate: 1 fps to 180 fps
When the recording quality setting is [FHD/8bit/20M/25p]
Frame rate: 1 fps to 180 fps
17. Materials
554
Viewfinder
System Aspect ratio 4:3, 0.39 inches, approx. 2,360,000 dots,
organic EL (OLED) live view viewfinder
Field of view ratio Approx. 100 %
Magnification Approx. 0.74k (j1.0 m
j1
50 mm at infinity, with aspect
ratio set to [3:2])
Eye point Approx. 20.0 mm (at j1.0 m
j1
)
Diopter adjustment
range
j4.0 to i4.0 diopter
Eye sensor Yes
Monitor
System Aspect ratio 3:2, 3.0 inches,
approx. 1,840,000 dots monitor, capacitive touch screen
Field of view ratio Approx. 100 %
Focus
AF type TTL type based on image detection (Contrast AF)
Focus mode AFS / AFC / MF
AF mode Automatic detection (Face/Eye/Body/Animal) / Tracking /
225-Area / Zone (Vertical/Horizontal) / Zone (Square) /
Zone (Oval) / 1-AreaiSupplementary / 1-Area / Pinpoint /
Custom1, 2, 3,
Focus area selection is possible by touching or with the
joystick
17. Materials
555
Exposure control
Light metering
system,
Light metering mode
1728-zone metering, multi-metering / center-weighted
metering / spot metering / highlight-weighted metering
Metering range EV 0 to EV 18
(F2.0 lens, ISO100 conversion)
Exposure Program AE (P) / Aperture-Priority AE (A) /
Shutter-Priority AE (S) / Manual Exposure (M)
Exposure
compensation
1/3 EV steps, n5EV
ISO sensitivity
(standard output
sensitivity)
AUTO / 100 to 51200,
When [Extended ISO] is set: AUTO / 50 to 204800,
1/3 EV steps
Image stabilizer
Image stabilizer type Compliant with Image sensor shift type, 5-axis stabilizer,
Dual I.S.2
Image stabilizer
effect
In-body image stabilizer: 5.0 stops
[Focal length f=60 mm, using an interchangeable lens
(S-R2060)]
Dual I.S.2: 6.5 stops
[Focal length f=200 mm, using an interchangeable lens
(S-E70200)]
(Based on the CIPA standard, Yaw/Pitch direction)
White balance
White balance mode AWB / AWBc / AWBw / Daylight / Cloudy / Shade /
Incandescent lights / Flash / Set mode 1, 2, 3, 4 /
Color temperature 1, 2, 3, 4
17. Materials
556
Shutter
Format Focal-plane shutter
Shutter speed Pictures:
Mechanical shutter: Bulb (max. approx. 30 minutes),
60 seconds to 1/8000 of a second
Electronic front curtain: Bulb (max. approx. 30 minutes),
60 seconds to 1/2000 of a second
Electronic shutter: Bulb (max. approx. 60 seconds),
60 seconds to 1/8000 of a second
Videos:
1/25
¢
of a second to 1/16000 of a second
¢ When [Exposure Mode] is set to [M] in Creative Video
mode and focus mode is set to [MF], this can be set up
to 1/2
Flash
synchronization
speed
Equal to or smaller than 1/250 of a second
¢
¢ The guide number decreases at 1/250 of a second, only
during [S]/[M] modes
Burst recording
Mechanical shutter/
Electronic front
curtain
High
speed
7 frames/second ([AFS], [MF]) /
5 frames/second ([AFC])
Medium
speed
5 frames/second
Low
speed
2 frames/second
Electronic shutter High
speed
7 frames/second ([AFS], [MF]) /
5 frames/second ([AFC])
Medium
speed
5 frames/second
Low
speed
2 frames/second
17. Materials
557
Maximum number of
frames recordable
[FINE] / [STD.]: 999 frames or more
[RAWiFINE] / [RAWiSTD.] / [RAW]: 24 frames or more
(When recording is performed under the test conditions
specified by Panasonic (Using a card in card slot 1
compatible with UHS-
II
))
Zoom
Extended Tele
Conversion
(Picture)
Max. 2k
¢
(when a picture size of [S] is selected.)
¢ Max. 1.9k when using APS-C lenses
Microphone / Speaker
Microphone Stereo
Speaker Monaural
Interface
USB USB Type-C™, SuperSpeed USB3.1 GEN1
0
Data from the PC cannot be written to the camera using
the USB connection cable.
[HDMI] micro HDMI Type D
[REMOTE] ‰ 2.5 mm jack
[MIC] ‰ 3.5 mm stereo mini jack,
Mic Input (Plug-in Power) / Mic Input / Line Input
(Operate the menu to switch between these inputs),
Standard input level: j55 dBV (Mic Input) / j10 dBV
(Line Input)
Headphones ‰ 3.5 mm stereo mini jack
Splash Resistant
Yes
17. Materials
558
External dimensions / Mass
External dimensions Approx. 132.6 mm (W)k97.1 mm (H)k81.9 mm (D)
(5.22q (W)k3.82q (H)k3.22q (D))
(excluding the projecting parts)
Mass Approx. 714 g/1.58 lb (camera body, with battery and one
card)
Approx. 630 g/1.39 lb (only camera body)
Operating environment
Recommended
operating
temperature
0 oC to 40 oC (32 oF to 104 oF)
Permissible relative
humidity
10 %RH to 80 %RH
17. Materials
559
35 mm full-frame interchangeable lens:
S-R2060 “LUMIX S 20-60 mm F3.5-5.6”
Mount Leica Camera AG L-Mount
Focal length f=20 mm to 60 mm
Lens construction 11 elements in 9 groups (2 aspherical lenses, 3 ED
lenses, 1 UHR lens)
Aperture type 9 diaphragm blades/Circular aperture diaphragm
Maximum aperture F3.5 (Wide) to F5.6 (Tele)
Minimum aperture value F22
Angle of view 94o (Wide) to 40o (Tele)
In focus distance 0.15 m (0.49 feet) to (Wide to focal length 26 mm)/
0.4 m (1.31 feet) to (Tele) (from the focus distance
reference line)
Maximum image
magnification
0.43k (focal length 26 mm)
Optical Image Stabilizer No
Filter diameter 67 mm
Maximum diameter ‰77.4 mm (3.0q)
Overall length Approx. 87.2 mm (3.4q) (from the tip of the lens to the
base side of the lens mount)
Mass Approx. 350 g (0.77 lb)
Dust and splash resistant Yes
Recommended operating
temperature
j10 oC to 40 oC (14 oF to 104 oF)
Permissible relative
humidity
10 %RH to 80 %RH
560
Numerics
1 Shot "6K/4K PHOTO"...................... 326
1 Shot RAW+JPG .............................. 325
1 Shot Spot Metering .........................325
1-Area (AF) ........................................ 110
1-Area AF Moving Speed................... 356
1-Area+ (AF) ...................................... 110
225-Area (AF) .................................... 107
4K/50p Bit Mode ....................... 292, 393
4K/60p Bit Mode ....................... 292, 393
6K/4K Burst........................................ 134
6K/4K Burst (S/S)............................... 135
6K/4K burst file................................... 139
6K/4K PHOTO .......................... 133, 361
6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving ...... 144, 410
6K/4K PHOTO Noise Reduction
.................................................. 141, 410
6K/4K Photo Play ...............................328
6K/4K Pre-Burst ................................. 135
A
AC adaptor................................ 492, 521
AF ........................................................ 94
AF Area Display ................................. 385
AF Assist Light ................................... 355
AF Custom Setting (Photo) ......... 98, 355
AF Custom Setting (Video) ....... 258, 367
AF mode ............................................ 100
AF ON ......................................... 95, 122
AF/AE Lock ........................................ 198
AF/AE Lock Hold................................ 373
AF+AE................................................ 117
AF+MF ............................................... 373
AFC...................................................... 93
AFC Start Point (225-Area) ....... 107, 377
AF-Point Scope ....................................97
AF-Point Scope Setting ..................... 376
AFS ..................................................... 93
Anamorphic (4:3)....................... 284, 366
Anamorphic (Video)................... 182, 359
Anamorphic Desqueeze Display
.......................................... 286, 392, 409
Anamorphic recording ....................... 283
Android .............................................. 419
Animal detection................................ 103
Aperture Bracket ............................... 159
Aperture-Priority AE mode ................ 187
Aspect Ratio ................................ 83, 350
Auto Clock Set........................... 400, 441
Auto Exposure Comp. ............... 235, 357
Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M......... 241, 372
Auto focus ........................................... 94
Auto LVF/Monitor Off................... 44, 396
Auto Review ...................................... 382
Auto Transfer............................. 400, 437
Auto White Balance........................... 203
Automatic scene detection .................. 78
Available recording time .................... 525
Available recording time
(for video recording)
.......................... 526
B
Backlight compensation ...................... 78
Battery ................................... 34, 37, 520
Battery Grip ....................................... 490
Battery Use Priority ................... 401, 490
Beep .................................................. 399
Blinking Highlights ............................. 389
Bluetooth ................................... 400, 420
Boost I.S. (Video) ...................... 182, 359
Bracketing ................................. 156, 358
Bulb ........................................... 194, 433
Index
Index
561
Burst rate ........................................... 130
Burst Shot .......................................... 129
Burst Shot 1 Setting .......... 129, 133, 359
Burst Shot 2 Setting .......... 129, 133, 359
C
Calendar screen................................. 309
Card ................................ 24, 46, 88, 521
Card Access Light ................................46
Card Format................................ 48, 395
Card Slot Change ..................... 302, 328
Center Marker .................................... 393
Center-weighted metering.................. 184
Charge ................................................. 34
Cleaning............................................. 517
Clock Set..................................... 54, 404
Cloud Limit ......................................... 466
Cloud sync service .............................458
Color Space .............................. 371, 479
Color Tone ......................................... 211
Communication Light ................ 239, 358
Compression rate........................ 86, 350
Condensation....................................... 20
Constant Preview ...............................383
Continuous AF .......................... 256, 367
Contrast ............................................. 211
Control dial........................................... 62
Control panel......................... 67, 71, 497
Copy................................................... 413
Copyright Information......................... 395
Creating a picture from a video ..........305
Creative Video Combined Set.
.................................................. 247, 372
Creative Video mode ......................... 244
Custom (AF)....................................... 113
Custom menu..................................... 370
Custom mode..................................... 337
Custom Mode Settings .............. 338, 403
D
DC Coupler........................................ 492
DCF standard .................................... 302
Delete ................................................ 311
Delete All Images .............................. 414
Delete Confirmation........................... 414
Delete Location Data......................... 466
Delete Single ..................................... 311
Destination Card Slot .................. 88, 327
Device Name..................................... 468
Dial Operation Switch Setup ..... 330, 381
Dial Setting ........................................ 380
Diffraction Compensation .................. 354
Diopter adjustment .............................. 65
Double Card Slot Function .......... 88, 395
Drive mode ........................................ 128
Dust reduction function...................... 517
E
Electronic front curtain............... 175, 360
Electronic shutter....................... 175, 360
Enlarged display................................ 306
Entering characters ........................... 415
E-Stabilization (Video)............... 179, 359
Exposure Bracket .............................. 159
Exposure compensation.................... 196
Exposure Compensation Display Setting
.......................................................... 379
Exposure Compensation Reset......... 372
Exposure Meter ................................. 388
Exposure Mode ......................... 245, 364
Exposure Offset Adjustment.............. 371
Extended ISO .................................... 371
Extended Tele Conversion ........ 125, 360
External flash..................................... 227
Index
562
External microphone .......................... 293
External monitor/external recorder..... 289
Eye cup .............................................. 518
Eye Sensor ................................. 66, 398
Eye Sensor AF................................... 376
F
Face/Eye/Body/Animal Detect. ... 79, 102
File number ................. 89, 479, 499, 501
File Number Reset ...................... 91, 395
Filter Effect................................ 215, 355
Filter Settings ............................ 215, 355
Firing Mode ............................... 232, 357
Firmware update ......................... 19, 405
Firmware Version ...............................405
Flash .................................................. 227
Flash Adjust. ............................. 233, 357
Flash Mode ............................... 229, 357
Flash Synchro ........................... 234, 357
Flicker Decrease (Video) ................... 365
Fn button................................... 321, 322
Fn Button Set ............................ 323, 378
Focal Length ...................................... 388
Focal Length Set ....................... 183, 359
Focus .......................................... 94, 256
Focus Area Set ..................................325
Focus Bracket .................................... 160
Focus mode ......................................... 93
Focus Peaking ................................... 356
Focus Ring Control ............................394
Focus Ring Lock ................................374
Focus Stacking .................................. 171
Focus Switching for Vert/Hor .... 119, 373
Focus/Shutter Priority ........................ 373
Folder number...... 89, 91, 479, 499, 501
Folder/File Settings ..................... 89,
395
F
orced Flash Off ................................ 229
Frame Marker............................ 268, 385
Framing Outline................................. 391
Front dial ............................................. 61
G
Gamma setting (Photo Style) .... 208, 350
Group image...................................... 310
H
Half-Press Shutter ............................. 376
HDAVI Control
TM
................................ 476
HDMI micro cable......289, 473, 475, 477
HDMI Mode (Playback) ..................... 401
HDMI output ...................................... 289
HDMI Rec Output ...................... 292, 393
HDMI Recording Control ........... 292, 393
HDMI socket.............................. 289, 473
Headphone socket ............................ 298
Headphone Volume........... 299, 369, 399
High Resolution Mode ............... 221, 351
Highlight ............................................ 211
Highlight-weighted metering.............. 184
Histogram .......................................... 384
HLG Photo................................. 225, 350
HLG video ......................................... 280
HLG View Assist........................ 282, 392
HLG View Assist (Monitor) ................ 409
Hot shoe cover .................................. 227
Hue.................................................... 211
I
i.Dynamic Range ............................... 353
I.S. Status Scope............................... 390
Image Area of Video.................. 249, 366
Image Quality .................................... 211
Image Stabilizer......................... 177, 359
Info Display (During HDMI Output)
.................................................. 292, 393
Index
563
Intelligent Auto mode ...........................77
iOS ..................................................... 419
ISO Displayed Setting ........................379
ISO Increments .................................. 370
ISO sensitivity .................................... 199
ISO Sensitivity (photo) .......................352
ISO Sensitivity (video)............... 262, 364
J
Joystick ................................................ 63
Joystick Setting .................................. 381
K
Knee................................................... 260
L
Language ........................................... 405
Lens ...................................... 23, 49, 519
Lens Fn Button Setting ...................... 394
Lens Focus Resume .......................... 394
Lens hood ............................................ 51
Level Gauge....................................... 391
Level Gauge Adjustment.................... 398
Live Cropping............................ 272, 369
Live View Boost ................................. 386
Live View Composite ................ 162, 361
Load Custom Mode................... 340, 403
Location Logging....................... 400, 439
Log recording ..................................... 276
Long Exposure NR............................. 351
Looped Focus Frame .........................377
Low illumination AF ..............................95
Luminance Level ....................... 259, 366
Luminance Spot Meter .............. 266, 391
LUMIX CLUB ..................................... 469
LUMIX Sync ....................................... 419
LUMIX Tether..................................... 484
LUT View Assist ........................ 278, 392
LUT View Assist (Monitor)................. 408
LVF Frame Rate................................ 397
LVF Luminance ................................. 398
LVF/Monitor Display Set.................... 387
LVF/Monitor Display Style ................. 327
LVF/Monitor Switch ........................... 398
M
Magnify from AF Point....................... 408
Manual Exposure mode .................... 192
Manual Flash Adjust.......... 232, 238, 357
Manual focus ..................................... 120
Mechanical shutter .................... 175, 360
Metering Mode .......................... 184, 350
MF ..................................................... 120
MF Assist........................................... 374
MF Assist Display.............................. 374
MF Guide........................................... 374
Mic Socket................................. 293, 368
Minimum Shutter Speed.................... 352
Monitor ........................................ 53, 493
Monitor Backlight............................... 398
Monitor Frame Rate .......................... 396
Monitor Settings ................................ 397
Monochrome Live View ..................... 392
MOV .......................................... 249, 366
MP4 ........................................... 249, 366
Multi-metering.................................... 184
Multiple Exposure.............................. 362
My Menu............................................ 341
N
Network Address ............................... 469
Night Mode ........................................ 387
Noise Reduction ................................ 212
Number of pictures that can be taken
.......................................................... 525
Index
564
Number of pictures that can be taken
continuously ....................................... 131
Number of prints ................................ 488
Number of still images that can be taken
........................................................... 528
O
One Push AE ..................................... 325
Online Manual.................................... 405
Operation Lock................................... 326
Operation Lock Setup ........................378
Optical zoom ...................................... 124
P
Page Layout....................................... 488
Paper Size ......................................... 488
PC connection........... 451, 468, 478, 484
Photo Grid Line .................................. 385
Photo menu........................................ 350
Photo Style................................ 208, 350
Photo Style Settings........................... 370
Photo/video preview........................... 388
PHOTOfunSTUDIO............................ 481
Photos/videos remaining.................... 389
PictBridge........................................... 486
Picture Quality............................. 86, 350
Picture Size................................. 85, 350
Picture Sort ........................................ 408
Pinpoint (AF) ...................................... 111
Pinpoint AF Setting ............................375
Pixel Refresh...................................... 404
Play back picture................................ 300
Play back video ..................................303
Playback ............................................ 300
Playback menu .................................. 406
Playback Mode .................................. 407
Post-Focus................................ 166, 362
Post-Recording Refinement ...............140
Power Save LVF Shooting .......... 44, 396
Power Save Mode ....................... 44, 396
Power supply....................................... 41
Pre-Burst Recording.................. 137, 361
Preview.............................................. 195
Preview Aperture Effect............. 326, 394
Print ........................................... 454, 486
Print with Date ................................... 488
Program AE mode............................. 185
Program Shift .................................... 186
Protect ............................................... 411
Q
Q.Menu Settings........................ 332, 377
Quick AF............................................ 376
Quick menu ................................. 69, 332
R
Rating ................................................ 411
RAW .................................................... 86
RAW Processing ....................... 312, 410
Rear dial .............................................. 61
Rec Quality................................ 250, 366
Rec. File Format........................ 249, 366
Rec/Playback Switch................. 326, 328
Recording distance reference ........... 123
Recording mode .................................. 60
Recording videos............................... 240
Recording with Time Lapse Shot ...... 145
Red REC Frame Indicator ................. 393
Red-Eye Removal ..................... 231, 357
Reduce Rolling Shutter ..................... 140
Register to Favorite (Wi-Fi connection)
.......................................................... 464
Remote shooting ............................... 431
Remote Wakeup........................ 400, 440
Reset ........................................... 76, 403
Index
565
Resize ................................................ 412
Restore to default...................... 327, 328
Returning from Sleep Mode ...... 400, 434
Rotate ................................................ 412
Rotate Display.................................... 407
S
Saturation........................................... 211
Save to Custom Mode .............. 337, 403
Save/Restore Camera Setting
.................................................. 343, 403
SD Speed Class................................... 25
Self-timer................................... 154, 361
Send Image (Smartphone)
.......................................... 400, 447, 449
Sending file format ............................. 466
Sending size ...................................... 466
Sensor Cleaning ................................ 404
Setup menu........................................ 395
Shadow .............................................. 211
Sharpness.......................................... 212
Sheer Overlay .................................... 390
Shoulder strap...................................... 33
Show/Hide AF Mode .......................... 375
Show/Hide Monitor Layout .................391
Shutter AF.......................................... 376
Shutter Delay ..................................... 360
Shutter Remote Control ............ 433, 491
Shutter Type ............................. 175, 360
Shutter-Priority AE mode ...................190
Silent Mode ............................... 174, 358
Simultaneous Record w/o Filter
.................................................. 220, 355
Sleep Mode................................. 44, 396
Sleep Mode (Wi-Fi) ..................... 44, 396
Slide show.......................................... 407
Slow & Quick mode................... 244, 269
Slow & Quick Setting................. 270, 366
Sound Output ............................ 298, 368
Sound Output (HDMI)................ 292, 393
Sound Rec Level Adj................. 263, 368
Sound Rec Level Disp............... 263, 368
Sound Rec Level Limiter ........... 263, 368
Special Mic.
............................... 294, 368
Spot metering .................................... 184
Starlight AF.......................................... 95
Stereo Shotgun Microphone...... 293, 368
Stop Motion Animation .............. 149, 360
Stop Motion Video ............................. 410
Storage (recorder) ............................. 483
Switch NTSC/PAL ..................... 248, 366
T
Tethered Recording........................... 484
Thumbnail screen.............................. 308
Time Code................................. 254, 366
Time Lapse Shot ....................... 145, 360
Time Lapse Video ............................. 410
Time Zone ......................................... 404
Touch AE............................................. 81
Touch AF............................. 80, 117, 377
Touch Pad AF ........................... 118, 377
Touch screen....................................... 64
Touch Settings .................................. 377
Touch Shutter...................................... 80
Touch Tab ......................................... 377
Touch Zoom ...................................... 126
Tracking (AF)............................... 79, 105
Tripod ................................................ 523
Tripod Grip ........................................ 492
TTL ............................................ 232, 233
TV Connection................................... 401
TV playback....................................... 475
Index
566
U
UHS Speed Class ................................ 25
USB.................................................... 400
USB connection cable
.....35, 39, 474, 479, 480, 483, 485, 486
USB Mode.......................................... 400
USB port ..................................... 39, 474
USB Power Supply ............................ 400
V
Vertical orientation detection function
............................................................. 58
Video Divide.............................. 318, 412
Video menu........................................ 364
Video rec. button ................................240
Video Rec. Button (Remote) ..... 381, 491
Video recording time .......................... 529
Video Speed Class .............................. 25
VIERA Link (CEC)..................... 402, 476
Viewfinder ........................... 65, 397, 493
Vignetting Compensation ...................354
V-Log ................................................. 276
V-Log View Assist ..................... 278, 392
W
Waveform Monitor..................... 264, 393
WB/ISO/Exposure Button .................. 379
Web service ....................................... 456
White balance .................................... 202
White balance adjustment.................. 206
White Balance Bracket....................... 161
White Balance Bracket
(Color Temperature) .......................... 161
Wi-Fi.......................................... 399, 416
Wi-Fi Function........................... 399, 416
Wi-Fi Function Lock ...........................469
Wi-Fi network settings........................ 400
Wi-Fi Password ................................. 468
Wi-Fi Setup menu...................... 399, 468
Wind Cut.................................... 295, 368
Wind Noise Canceller................ 263, 368
Wireless..................................... 237, 357
Wireless Channel ...................... 237, 357
Wireless Connection Light......... 402, 416
Wireless flash .................................... 236
Wireless FP ............................... 239, 358
Wireless printing................................ 454
Wireless Setup .......................... 238, 358
WPS .......................................... 460, 463
X
XLR Mic Adaptor Setting ........... 296, 368
XLR Microphone Adaptor .................. 296
Z
Zebra Pattern ............................ 267, 393
Zone (AF) .......................................... 108
Zoom ................................................. 124
567
0
L-Mount is a trademark or registered trademark of Leica Camera AG.
0
SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
0
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the
United States and other countries.
0
USB Type-C™ and USB-C™ are trademarks of USB Implementers Forum.
0
The SuperSpeed USB Trident Logo is a registered trademark of USB Implementers
Forum, Inc.
0
QuickTime and the QuickTime logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Apple Inc., used under license therefrom.
0
HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
0
Adobe is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the
United States and/or other countries.
0
Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
0
Windows is a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Trademarks and Licenses
Trademarks and Licenses
568
0
Final Cut Pro, Mac, OS X and macOS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
0
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
0
Google, Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google LLC.
0
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
0
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
0
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
0
“Wi-Fi
®
” is a registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
0
“Wi-Fi Protected Setup™”, “WPA™”, and “WPA2™” are trademarks of Wi-Fi
Alliance
®
.
0
This product uses “DynaFont” from DynaComware Corporation. DynaFont is a
registered trademark of DynaComware Taiwan Inc.
0
QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.
0
Other names, company names, product names mentioned in this document are
trademarks or registered trademarks of the companies concerned.
Trademarks and Licenses
569
This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal use of
a consumer or other uses in which it does not receive remuneration to (i) encode video
in compliance with the AVC Standard (“AVC Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that
was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal activity and/or was obtained from
a video provider licensed to provide AVC Video. No license is granted or shall be
implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA,
L.L.C.
See http://www.mpegla.com
Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries
Only for European Union and countries with recycling systems
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or
accompanying documents mean that used electrical and
electronic products and batteries must not be mixed with general
household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and
used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points
in accordance with your national legislation.
By disposing of them correctly, you will help to save valuable
resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human
health and the environment.
For more information about collection and recycling, please
contact your local authority.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste,
in accordance with national legislation.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom symbol):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical
symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the
Directive for the chemical involved.
… 547 …


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Panasonic DC-S5 Lumix at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Panasonic DC-S5 Lumix in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 16,9 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Panasonic DC-S5 Lumix

Panasonic DC-S5 Lumix User Manual - German - 570 pages

Panasonic DC-S5 Lumix User Manual - Dutch - 570 pages

Panasonic DC-S5 Lumix User Manual - French - 570 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info